Notes

Notes

 

Chapters

Chapters

330 1. wave of dismay and alarmBecause very few of Theo's letters survive, characterizations of his basic attitude toward his brother and his brother's art are necessarily inferential: i.e., based on the subject, tenor, and pattern of Vincent's responses. His specific criticisms, on the other hand, are relatively easy to limn from Vincent's elaborate rebuttals.   2. in the fall of 1880 BVG 138, 11/1/1880. Theo has apparently defined a mediocre artist in a way that Vincent disputes, or maybe given an example that Vincent disagrees with, and Vincent gingerly contradicts his new benefactor by suggesting that maybe something useful can be found even in "mediocre" artists: "I'll do what I can, but in no way do I despise the mediocre in its simple sense. And one certainly doesn't rise above that level by despising that which is mediocre, in my opinion one must at least begin by having some respect for the mediocre as well." (ibid.) 

Context:
JLB 160, 11/1/1880: "As regards mediocre artists, to whose ranks you think I should not want to belong, what shall I say? That depends on what one calls mediocre."

3. old-fashioned BVG 238, 10/10/1882: Vincent says he "agrees ... that the one of the bench is done more in the old-fashioned way," but no criticism Theo ever lodged against his art prompted a longer or more emphatic series of rebuttals -- probably because, at this point, nostalgia was Vincent's sole consolation: his identity as an artist was wholly involved in his belief that art's greatest achievements were in the past (JLB 272, 10/15/1882). Later in the same letter in which he says he "agrees," he rejects the criticism out of hand: "I believe nonetheless that many artists who worked less definitely to that end, and are now seen as old-fashioned, will always remain fresh and green because their approach had its raison d'être too and still does" (ibid.; emphasis in original).

A few weeks later, to Anthon van Rappard, he describes some landscapes in his collection of prints that "I've always liked ... even if they're regarded as old-fashioned" (JLB 273, 10/22/1882). And in another letter to his friend a few days later, he openly mocks his brother's criticism: "I've heard [images like this] dismissed by people who pass for first-rate connoisseurs with a 'yes, well, that's the old-fashioned manner'" (JLB 279, 11/1/1882). Invoking his beloved English illustrators, he goes on to defend his drawings in the direct way he could not with Theo: "that brings us to what H.H. [Hubert von Herkomer] means. The old manner of engraving, that solid, honest, uncontrived drawing, is by far the best. Herkomer says: be careful, don't let that be lost." (ibid.) In a letter to Theo soon thereafter, he returns to the argument in a defiant tone: "although I can't help admiring what they make now, the old landscapes in a more old-fashioned manner always give me pleasure when I see them. ... the new, although it takes someone in, doesn't always continue to make the same strong, moving impression over time." (JLB 280, 11/5/1882.)

By the end of November, his tone has grown more combative, even sarcastic, suggesting that the earlier criticism has not ceased to rankle: "It's easier to say ... 'Oh, that's the old manner, we don't need that', than to replace the old manner by something equivalent, let alone something better. And since many reason like [Hendrik Willem] Mesdag these days, without giving it any further thought, it can do no harm if others do reflect on whether we are in the world to pull down rather than to build up. The phrase 'not needed any more' -- how eagerly people use it and what a stupid and ugly phrase it is. I believe that in a certain fairy tale Andersen puts it in the mouth not of a person but of an old pig. People who live in glass houses shouldn't throw stones. ... I fear, Theo, that it will come about that many who have sacrificed the old for the sake of the new will deeply regret it. Especially in the realm of art." (JLB 286, 11/24/1882; emphasis in original.)

Just as Theo used particular artists and works to make arguments to Vincent about the new art, Vincent continued to defend "old-fashioned" art with examples of his own. The large number and huge range of the examples he cites suggest the fervor of his feeling on this issue: Émile Adélard Breton, Théodore Rousseau, Jan van Goyen, "Old Crome" (John Crome), Georges Michel, Jacob van Ruisdael, Isaac van Ostade, Antoine Chintreuil, Raymond Eugène Goethals, Camille Bernier, Marie Collart, Jules Dupré, Edwin Edwards, and "Lavieille" (Eugène Antoine Samuel Lavieille or Jacques Adrien Lavieille) (all JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882).

Regarding two drawings Vincent did in December (JH281, the other unknown) he declared them "most decidedly in what one might call an old-fashioned sentiment" (JLB 294, 12/13/1882-12/18/1882). In May 1883, at least six months after Theo lodged the original complaint, Vincent is still replaying and rebutting it. Referring to a picture by Henri Leys, Vincent writes pointedly: "It isn't that movement, though, that's the order of the day at present, but the sentiment in it is something eternal, and one can conceive reality, nature, in different ways, and even now recognize what was perhaps sought and felt more generally in Leys's time than it is today" (JLB 347, 5/30/1883). And in July, he writes, still defiant of his brother's criticism: "Among the figures of types from the people that I did there are several with a certain, what many would call old-fashioned, character, also in the approach" (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). Strangely, in almost all non-artistic contexts, Vincent uses the phrase "old-fashioned" in a pejorative sense, especially in describing his parents and their "prejudices" (JLB 186, 11/18/1881). 

Context:
JLB 272, 10/15/1882: "I agree with what you say about the small drawings -- namely, that the one of the bench is done more in the old-fashioned way. Yet I did that more or less deliberately, and may well do it more."

4. "too dry" JLB 370, 8/3/1883: When it is first mentioned, Vincent does not specifically attribute this criticism to Theo: "With regard to the size of the drawings or the subjects, I'll gladly listen to what Mr T. or Mauve has to say about it. I've been working on several large ones recently, because no matter what, I must get over that dry manner in which my studies of this summer were done." (JLB 201, 1/21/1882.) But the reference to "this summer" (i.e., 1881) -- before either H. G. Tersteeg or Anton Mauve saw his drawings, -- suggests that he is referring to something Theo said when he visited that summer. This is confirmed the following January (1883) when Vincent sends Theo some sketches using lithographic crayon, accompanied by an apology: "This is only a beginning -- later you'll get fine things from me, old chap! For the time being, let me know whether you think some of the objections to using pencil alone could be removed somewhat by using crayon as well." (JLB 298, 1/3/1883; emphasis added.) Vincent mentions the criticism again a month later, still in defensive mode: "In the studies, too, one sees for oneself the agitation and a certain precision that's diametrically opposed to the calm breadth one seeks" (JLB 310, 2/8/1883).

The criticism obviously weighed heavily on Vincent, as he carried it into his resumption of painting in the summer of 1883, referring to the "dry manner" in which he had painted figures the previous summer -- "drawing first and then filling in the outline" -- and apologizing for one of his current drawings (in paint): "the drawing isn't right as it is now, for it's too dry and too meagre" (JLB 370, 8/3/1883). He returns to the criticism twice more before leaving for Drenthe in September: "I've often tried to work less drily, but each time it came out roughly the same" (JLB 371, 8/7/1883); and, "As to the work, what is becoming increasingly clear to me in everything since it caught my attention is the meagreness of the execution" (JLB 375, 8/18/1883). In one very clever turn, he employs the conceit of a desert to blame the dryness of his work on Theo's meager allowance: "But it's [the dryness] out of my hands. If I don't have a little extra on occasion, I have to pay out so much each time when I receive the normal amount that not much is left for the 10 days that lie ahead, on the last of which one walks along the road with a very weak and faint feeling in the stomach. And then one of those sandy roads in the dunes begins to resemble a desert." (JLB 365, 7/23/1883.) 

Context:
JLB 370, 8/3/1883: "the drawing isn't right as it is now, for it's too dry and too meager."

5. a rebuke of Vincent's BVG 257, 1/3/1883: When Vincent begins drawing with a lithographic crayon in late 1882, he is freed to acknowledge Theo's previous complaints about the use of pencil. 

Context:
JLB 298, 1/3/1883: "This is only a beginning -- later you'll get fine things from me, old chap! For the time being, let me know whether you think some of the objections to using pencil alone could be removed somewhat by using crayon as well."

6. too meager BVG 301, 7/22/1883: Vincent throws this criticism back in Theo's face by blaming it on the impoverished state in which Theo's meager allowance keeps him: "That doesn't surprise me in the least when I consider that someone's physical state influences his work, and my life is too dry and too meager. Honestly, Theo, for the sake of the work we ought to have eaten a little better." (JLB 363, 7/22/1883.) Subsequently, he merges these two objections -- dryness and meagerness -- into a single one: "What I wrote to you about (and about which you also wrote, our thoughts have crossed again), the meagreness or what they call the dryness is what must be overcome each day anew, and mustn't become a chronic defect" (JLB 338, 4/30/1883). He also constructs an elaborate excuse for this persistent problem: "I could show you a similar moment of dryness in the history of many who have completely overcome it. ... I gave myself the task of studying the figure with perseverance for the sake of raising the level of my drawing. And precisely because of that effort, because of that over-exertion, I ended up in that dryness." (ibid.) 

Context:
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "You say that the effect of the autographs is rather meagre. That doesn't surprise me in the least when I consider that someone's physical state influences his work, and my life is too dry and too meagre."

7. "pleasant and attractive" BVG 230, 9/11/1882. We have slightly altered the translation.

Context:
BVG 230, 9/11/1882: "Well, I hope this little bench, though perhaps not yet saleable, will show you that I am not averse to choosing subjects sometimes which are pleasant or attractive and, as such, will find buyers sooner than things of a more gloomy sentiment."
JLB 262, 9/11/1882: "Well, I hope that the small bench, even if not yet saleable, will show you that I have nothing against tackling subjects with something agreeable or pleasant about them, which are thus more likely to find buyers than things with a more sombre sentiment."

8. have an innate talent BVG 251, 12/3/1882-12/5/1882: Vincent himself introduces the notion of a "born" landscapist, but does so in a context that casts suspicion on his motives, if not his sincerity. As discussed in the text, he is trying to convince Theo that he, Theo, not Vincent, is the landscapist in the Van Gogh family. To what extent this is merely a strategy to escape Theo's pressure to do landscape, or a genuine conviction, is unknowable. Vincent, as always, makes a vigorous case: "Many landscape painters don't have that intimate knowledge of nature possessed by those who have looked at the fields with feeling from childhood. Many landscape painters give something that satisfies neither you nor me, for example, as people (even if we appreciate them as artists). ... You will say, but everyone has surely seen landscapes and figures from childhood. Question: was everyone also thoughtful as a child? Question: did everyone who saw them -- heath, grassland, fields, woods -- also love them, and the snow and the rain and the storm? Not everyone has that the way you and I do; it takes a special kind of setting and circumstances to contribute to it, and a special kind of temperament and character as well to make it take root." (JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882)

So far, this sounds like an affectionate claim of solidarity with Theo. But Vincent goes on to turn it into yet another convoluted, even supercilious plea for Theo to reconsider his career: "Many can't help it that they aren't deep enough, and act in good faith, in so far as they have good faith. Yet I believe you'll admit (the more so since it's a question here of something that isn't your own sphere, although it does concern you somewhat) that it's a fact that if many a landscape painter who is now highly rated knew half what you know of sound ideas about the outdoors, with which you're naturally familiar, he would produce much better and sounder work. Think this over, and put this and many more things besides in the balance when, weighing yourself, you say things like, 'I would only be something mediocre'. Unless you mean mediocre in its good, noble sense." (ibid.) What Vincent thinks he means by this is not clear, but he appears to suggest that Theo will never be better than a mediocre dealer, whereas he could be an exceptional landscapist. How he develops this bizarre notion to its obsessive, irrational extreme will be discussed in the next chapter. 

9. more elaboration BVG 273, 3/6/1883: Referring to a drawing he has enclosed, Vincent writes: "there isn't enough fullness of detail. Far from it. But the fullness of detail that both you and I would like to see doesn't consist in details added later." (JLB 326, 3/6/1883.) In another letter about the same time, in a less argumentative mood, Vincent apologizes for the lack of elaboration and gives an odd excuse for it: "But in my view the main reason is that I don't always have the time to work as elaborately as I would like. It's possible to search for the different tones more elaborately if one repeatedly comes back to a drawing. But often I have to work in quite a hurry. I daren't ask too much of my models. If I paid them more elaborately I could ask for more elaborate poses, that's to say longer and more." (JLB 327, 3/11/1883.)

This is an odd excuse because elsewhere Vincent writes proudly about the speed at which he works and advertises it as one of the salient characteristics of his working style and his art. Here, he seems to be lamenting that he has to work so fast and therefore can't take the time to make the drawings more elaborate. This strikes us as an argument of convenience, ginned up to address one of Theo's primary criticisms at a time when he, Vincent, is spending inordinately on his soup kitchen preparations. Later in the same letter, he comes back to this criticism, obviously determined to allay Theo's concerns by dedicating himself to addressing it: "I must become much more skilled than I am if I'm to be at all content with myself. And I hope that gradually I'll work more deftly and more elaborately in the same amount of time that I now devote to it." (ibid.; emphasis added.)

Only a week or two later, he returns to the subject. In a barrage of excuses and apologies for his work, he pledges himself to make more elaborate images -- i.e., images that have details and background and setting. Referring to the letter sketch of a drawing he has done, he writes, "here there's now no foreground at all -- at any rate in the actual study there's a little more; ... Then perhaps it would become a composition breadthways, and the figure would be in its setting and in its place. If I did all that in the study itself, the figure would be so small that it would be of no use to me as a serious study for the figure. Believe me, the appearance isn't a tough job, if my studies are good I'm very calm about that point. And Space, Sky, breadth -- don't think that I rationalize them away." (JLB 331, 3/21/1883; emphasis in original.)

From a later letter, it appears that this criticism was one of Theo's earliest of Vincent's work. In May 1883, Vincent writes about some early drawings : "Do you remember that in the very beginning I once sent you sketches of a sort, 'Winter Tale', Shadows passing, etc.? You said at the time that you thought the action of the figures was insufficiently expressed -- do you remember?" (JLB, 5/30/1883; emphasis in original.) It is not clear what images Vincent is referring to, whether they were done in the Borinage in 1880, or in Brussels or Etten in 1881, or if they have survived. They could be the two sketches that Vincent sent to Theo along with letter JLB 162, January 1881) En Route (F none JH Juv. 15) and Before the Hearth (F none JH Juv. 16) (JLB 347, n. 3). 

Context:
JLB 326, 3/6/1883: "Although the accompanying sketch is very unfinished, it seemed to me that there could be things in it that corresponded with your intention -- and again it's a sketch from life. Don't think that I count it a quality if there isn't enough fullness of detail. Far from it. But the fullness of detail that both you and I would like to see doesn't consist in details added later, I believe, but should be more present at once than it is now."

10. those endless solitary figures BVG 287, 5/30/1883: Referring to a more elaborate composition, Vincent says of his many studies of solitary figures: "I believe you may not be opposed to taking this one when it's finished to show to the people at the illustrated magazines. And will take greater pleasure from something like this than from separate studies." (JLB 347, 5/30/1883.)  11. "details" BVG 273, 3/6/1883: Vincent rebuts Theo's demand for more details in a volley of French (see context). 

Context:
BVG 273, 3/6/1883: "But of course I shall try to bring more variation into the tones. 'Y mettre des détails' leaves me rather cool, but 'dégrossit' [take away the coarseness] is certainly my aim, that is, 'serrer la forme de plus près' [concentrating the form more firmly]."
JLB 326, 3/6/1883: "However, I'll naturally work at getting more variation in the tones. I'm relatively indifferent to putting in details, but removing more of the rough edges is definitely my aim. That's to say, keeping closer to the form."

12. "finish" BVG 273, 3/6/1883: Theo's demand for "finish" can be inferred from this passage: "Although the accompanying sketch is very unfinished, it seemed to me that there could be things in it that corresponded with your intention. ... Don't think that I count it a quality if there isn't enough fullness of detail. Far from it. But the fullness of detail that both you and I would like to see doesn't consist in details added later, I believe, but should be more present at once than it is now." (JLB 326, 3/6/1883.)  331 13. Theo's Goupil mailbox JLB 486, 3/27/1885. A note from Hans Luitjen to the authors adds: "In his early years Vincent sometimes put a letter or package in the crates that went from one branch of Goupils', where Vincent worked, to the branch where Theo worked."  14. wrote lengthy descriptions "Yesterday evening, for example, I came back with a study of the woods ... and lo and behold, in your letter of this morning you happen to remark on how you were struck in Montmartre by the very pronounced colours, which nonetheless remained harmonious" (JLB 260, 9/3/1882). Scenes in Montmartre, where Theo lived, were a common subject of the colorful word-paintings he sent his brother. Theo also sent descriptions of Paris by night, in the style of Une page d'amour by Émile Zola (JLB 244, 7/6/1882). Some of these descriptions included figures -- perhaps a signal to Vincent that figural images did not have to be black-and-white (JLB 264, 9/17/1882). "Well -- then your description of the house and its surroundings -- the cab-stand is very good. Stands out from other townscapes by you because of the more distinctive staffage -- the cab-stand is excellent. Couldn't you arrange for the figure with the red nose to pose for me sometime?" (JLB 331, 3/21/1883). Apparently, Theo began sending these word-paintings at least as early as Brussels, in early 1881 (JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882). Of course, the brothers had been trading descriptions like this almost since they began writing letters. We believe they acquired a new significance, however, when Vincent became an artist and Theo, as his supporter, began to concern himself with the direction of Vincent's career.  15. the praises of successful Theo apparently strongly pushed Eugène Cicéri, a French landscapist and watercolorist known for his light touch and easy-on-the-eyes color -- the exact opposite of Vincent's work so far. Ciceri also wrote Cours d'aquarelle (1878), a "how-to" book on watercolor that Theo may have recommended or that Vincent may already have seen. Ciceri was also probably known to Theo for his Montmartre landscapes, which may be related to the scenic word-paintings that Theo sends Vincent around this time. Vincent responds to the example of Ciceri with a reflex of enthusiasm ("that idea of yours might be feasible -- I believe I'll learn things myself, won't I?" [JLB 330, 3/18/1883]), and then ignores it -- never mentioning Ciceri again.

Theo also pushed two landscapists that had long been joint favorites of the brothers: Georges Michel (JLB 312, 2/11/1883), a proto-Barbizon painter even more celebrated for his many views of the countryside from Montmartre, and Jules Dupré (JLB 361, 7/11/1883), one of the giants of the Barbizon school. At the same time he suggested Ciceri, Theo proposed Léon Lhermitte as a model for Vincent to emulate. Vincent takes up this suggestion, by contrast, with great enthusiasm, largely because Lhermitte's reputation was primarily as a draftsman and illustrator. There is much back-and-forth about Lhermitte in the brothers' letters and the artist became one of Vincent's favorites (he referred to him as "MILLET II" [JLB 528, 8/18/1885; emphasis in original]). Theo might have hoped that Vincent could emulate the Frenchman's exquisite draftsmanship and he may have associated Vincent's aspirations with Lhermitte's monumental series of works on the life of the peasant laborer, the second of which, Harvester's Payday, had just been exhibited at the Salon in 1882. Theo may also have known (but surely Vincent didn't) that in 1879 Degas invited Lhermitte to exhibit with the Impressionists (although he never participated in any of their shows). 

16. He repeatedly solicited BVG 274, 3/11/1883. 

Context:
JLB 327, 3/11/1883: "While for your part you say you sometimes long for us to be able to talk rather more about various things in art, for my part I feel that longing constantly, and on occasion very strongly. I would so often dearly like to know your opinion about this or that -- about some studies &c., for example whether they might be made into something suitable, or whether it was advisable to press on with something for one purpose or another."

17. He repledged his love BVG 270, 3/2/1883: Vincent follows this pledge immediately with a steadfast refusal to move on from the figure drawing he has been doing for more than a year: "But the basis for everything is knowledge of the figure. So that one can readily draw fellows and females and children in every possible action. I'm working mostly on that, for I don't think one can get to what I want by another route." (JLB 322, 3/2/1883.) Throughout the winter, Vincent repeatedly protests to Theo that he is eager to do watercolors ("nearer winter I hope to have figure watercolours" [JLB 251, 7/26/1882]), that the re-lighted studio is ideal for watercolors (JLB 324, 3/4/1883), that he is starting to work on watercolors (JLB 322, 3/2/1883; JLB 324, 3/4/1883), that he will use his drawings as the basis for watercolors (JLB 308, 2/5/1883), that the spring weather is ideal for watercolors, etc. Yet he completes no significant watercolor work during the period. In early March, he reports returning to a watercolor that he "began ... a few months ago, and since then it has had a lick or two now and again," but it does not appear to have survived (JLB 322, 3/2/1883). A short time later, he started another watercolor depicting a woman and child on his soup kitchen "set," but it became "too unclear" and presumably he destroyed it (JLB 324, 3/4/1883). As late as June, he is giving Van Rappard a very different, very disdainful view of watercolor: "And so it is that these days watercolour is the order of the day and considered to be the most expressive medium, and in my view too little effort goes into Black and White, to the point even that there's a certain antipathy to it" (JLB 354, 6/15/1883). 

Context:
JLB 322, 3/2/1883: "I like watercolour enough never to abandon it completely, I mess about with it constantly."

18. painting into the indefinite future BVG 262, 1/25/1883-1/29/1883: In March 1883, Vincent went through the trouble to send Theo a word-painting which would appear to be a landscape in gestation: "This morning I went for a walk outside the city in the meadows beyond Zuid Buitensingel ... For a long time I stood looking there, in front of a row of the most gnarled, twisted and disoriented pollard willows I've ever seen. They lined the edge of a vegetable garden -- freshly dug -- and were reflected in a small, dirty ditch -- very dirty -- but where blades of spring foliage were already glittering." (JLB 326, 3/6/1883.) But, in fact, this scene puts him in mind not of a landscape, but of his black lithographic crayon! "That brown, rough bark -- the turned-over earth -- in which one could see the fertility, so to speak -- all that had something peculiarly warm in the dark, strong tones that again made me think of natural chalk" (ibid.). Nevertheless, he puts off doing even a black-and-white landscape using the crayon: "So that when I have some again I hope to tackle landscape with it" (ibid.). This, of course, is right at the time he is preparing his grand soup-kitchen plans and, in a letter to Van Rappard, comparing landscape unfavorably to figure drawing in the most peremptory terms (JLB 325, 3/5/1883). As of June, he is still putting off doing landscapes: "Yes, I want to start on these drawings in the next few days, I have the sites pretty well in my head, and shall seek out a fine potato field at my convenience and do studies of it for the lines of the landscape" (JLB 353, 6/15/1883). In July, he does "some studies for seascapes," but comes home and immediately announces to Theo, "What I had just started on, which is actually more pressing than anything else, is painting figure studies" (JLB 366, 7/24/1883). 

Context:
JLB 305, 1/27/1883: "But for the time being I believe that both he and I must do our best at thorough study of the figure; the more one has mastered that the more attainable such plans become."

19. he praised the vividBVG 248, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882: A comparison to Dupré and Daubigny, two of the brothers' favorite landscapists, was high praise indeed -- and advanced (by indirection, of course) Vincent's argument that Theo should quit dealing and become a landscape painter. Elsewhere, Vincent compares Theo's descriptions to those of Zola -- even more hyperbolic praise. "I must tell you that I was very taken by one passage in your letter describing Paris by night" (JLB 244, 7/6/1882). Vincent determinedly overlooked the "lessons" that Theo no doubt intended in sending these colorful scenic descriptions. "Well, brother -- best wishes ... I long, for instance, for another of your descriptions of an aspect of Paris." (JLB 327, 3/11/1883.) The self-conscious way in which Vincent turned these descriptions into fodder for his argument that Theo should become a landscape painter suggests that he was fully aware of Theo's intentions in sending them. 

Context:
JLB 288, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882: "Just as I get back from the printer's I receive your letter. I think your Montmartre is splendid, and I would certainly have shared the emotion that it evoked in you. I believe, by the way, that Jules Dupre or Daubigny also often tried to arouse those thoughts in their work."

20. to become a painter BVG 251, 12/3/1882-12/5/1882. In March 1883, when Theo sends Vincent a description of a Paris streetscape, Vincent writes: "Your description of the cab-stand and the venerable urinal and the bills stuck on it is really very good -- it's a great pity you don't draw it" (JLB 331, 3/21/1883). A few weeks later, Vincent again turns these descriptions back on Theo. He sends a lengthy word-painting of the view from his window -- "dug-over gardens and soil, mostly warm black earth, very deep in tone. ... the little road of yellowish sand with green edges of grass and the thin, spindly poplars. ... a grey silhouette of the city with the round roof of the station and towers and chimneys ... It was just like a page in [Victor] Hugo" -- but instead of offering to turn it into a landscape himself, he concludes: "[it was] something that would certainly have struck you and that you could describe better than I. And I thought of you at the time." (JLB 333, 3/29/1883 and 4/1/1883.) 

Context:
JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882: "Yet I believe you'll admit (the more so since it's a question here of something that isn't your own sphere, although it does concern you somewhat) that it's a fact that if many a landscape painter who is now highly rated knew half what you know of sound ideas about the outdoors, with which you're naturally familiar, he would produce much better and sounder work. Think this over, and put this and many more things besides in the balance when, weighing yourself, you say things like, 'I would only be something mediocre'. Unless you mean mediocre in its good, noble sense."

21. "my life is too cramped" BVG 301, 7/22/1883. Later, in August, Vincent reverses this argument and attributes the improvement in his art to his weakened state: "I've often tried to work less drily, but each time it came out roughly the same. But these days, now that some weakening prevents me from working as normal, it's just as if this helps rather than hinders." (JLB 371, 8/7/1883.) 

Context:
BVG 301, 7/22/1883: "You say that the effect of the lithographs is somewhat meager. I am not in the least surprised when I think of how a man's physique influences his work, and my life is too cramped and meager. Really, Theo, we ought to have had a little more to eat for the sake of the work, but I could not afford it, and it will remain so as long as I cannot breathe a little more freely."
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "You say that the effect of the autographs is rather meagre. That doesn't surprise me in the least when I consider that someone's physical state influences his work, and my life is too dry and too meagre. Honestly, Theo, for the sake of the work we ought to have eaten a little better, but we couldn't afford it and things will stay like that if I don't get a little more leeway by one means or another."

22. that all beginners suffered BVG 265, 2/8/1883: Vincent also makes the argument -- really more a vague warning -- that he should not try to address this problem directly; that it would be resolved only with time; and that to push for a quick solution might have deleterious consequences: "one feels bad if one works specifically for that breadth and devotes oneself to that. As a result there's sometimes a bottling up of nervous restlessness and stress, and one feels an oppressiveness as on some summer days before a storm." (JLB 310, 2/8/1883.) Vincent returns to the defense of "beginner's awkwardness" in July: "I could show you a similar moment of dryness in the history of many who have completely overcome it. I don't want to give any examples, because you yourself will find several once you give it some thought. But there's one thing -- nearly all the people who got through the Ecole de Rome, and had that period of ceaselessly grinding away at the figure, come up at the end of the course with rather clever, rather meticulously drawn things which, however, aren't pleasing to see ... Now I don't consider myself as clever in my drawings as those fellows; all the same, without being compelled by any particular course, I gave myself the task of studying the figure with perseverance for the sake of raising the level of my drawing. And precisely because of that effort, because of that over-exertion, I ended up in that dryness." (JLB 365, 7/23/1883.)

It is an indication of how much this criticism rankled that Vincent returns to it again in August in an even fuller and more explicit statement of his autobiographical defense against it: "As to the work, what is becoming increasingly clear to me in everything since it caught my attention is the meagreness of the execution. That would worry me if I didn't think it a natural consequence (which I believe I've also seen in the early work of very many people I find sympathetic), a natural consequence of the effort one must make to overcome the very first obstacles. And, looking back on recent years, seeing them full of trouble behind me. That trouble having subsided, there will be another period of working, I hope. This error is so pervasive and its correction so badly needed that we must see to it that we take steps to give us a period of calm. And so work at it; otherwise it will stay like that. I am as my work is." (JLB 375, 8/18/1883.) In a letter to Van Rappard, Vincent defends his images more directly from Theo's attack: "But there's a certain kind of art, perhaps less flowery, more thorny, in which I find more for my heart" (JLB 325, 3/5/1883; emphasis in original). 

Context:
JLB 310, 2/8/1883: "The difficulties one faces in the first phase give the studies a painful quality at times. I don't regard this as something that discourages me, though, because I've noticed it in others as much as in myself, and in them it has increasingly gone away of its own accord."

23. more pleasing imagery BVG R32, 3/21/1883: One can hear Theo's criticisms in this conspiratorial passage to Van Rappard: " Let's keep up each other's enthusiasm, and let's encourage each other, as far as we can, to carry on working. Not in the direction of pleasing dealers or the ordinary art lovers but in the direction of manly strength, truth, loyalty, honesty. ... It seems that everything one makes in this way is doomed to be called 'disagreeable'." (JLB 332, 3/21/1883; emphasis in original.)  24. pushing "a wheelbarrow full" BVG 277, 3/30/1883-4/1/1883. 

Context:
BVG 277, 3/30/1883-4/1/1883: "I have a sower -- a mower -- a woman at the washtub -- a woman miner -- a seamstress -- a digger -- a woman with a spade -- the almshouse man -- a grace before meat -- a fellow with a wheelbarrow full of manure."
JLB 333, 3/29/1883 and 4/1/1883: "I have a sower -- a mower -- a woman at the wash-tub -- a woman miner -- a woman sewing -- a digger -- a woman with a spade -- the orphan man -- Prayer before the meal -- a fellow with a wheelbarrow of manure."

25. "honesty, naïveté, and truth" BVG 251, 12/3/1882-12/5/1882. Vincent also repeatedly put off the day when he would move on to the kind of imagery Theo was calling for ("gradually I'll work more deftly and more elaborately" [JLB 327, 3/11/1883]). We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 251, 12/3/1882-12/5/1882: "How much good it does one to see a beautiful Rousseau on which he has drudged to keep it true and honest. How much good it does to think of people like Van Goyen, Old Crome and Michel. How beautiful an Isaac Ostade or a Ruysdael is. Do I want them back or do I want people to imitate them? No, but I want the honesty, the naïveté, the truth, to remain."
JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882: "How much good it does one to see a beautiful Rousseau on which he has drudged to keep it true and honest. How much good it does to think of people like Van Goyen, Old Crome and Michel. How beautiful an Isaac Ostade or a Ruysdael is. Do I want them back, or do I want them to be imitated? No, but I do want the honesty, the naivety, the faithfulness to remain."

26. his unembellished images BVG R17, 11/1/1882. Vincent puts the same point to Theo in a slightly less direct way: "The appearance of the drawings of the woman with the spade and of this digger is such that people won't think they were done in some complicated way, but won't give any thought, I believe, to how they were done" (JLB 333, 3/29/1883 and 4/1/1883). 

Context:
JLB 279, 11/1/1882: "... and that brings us to what HH means. The old manner of engraving, that solid, honest, uncontrived drawing, is by far the best."

27. from Mauve and Tersteeg BVG 174, 2/13/1882: In the summer of 1881, according to Vincent, Uncle Cent also encouraged him to make smaller works -- using the most powerful incentive of all: "Uncle Cent also told me last summer that if I have a drawing, a little smaller than those of last summer and with more watercolour, I should simply send it and he would take it" (JLB 204, 2/13/1882). Frankly, this is difficult to credit. In 1881, Vincent had not yet grown stiff-necked about his art and was desperate to please Uncle Cent to advance his courtship of Kee Vos. As late as March of 1882, he agreed to do smallish cityscape drawings to please his Uncle Cor, so it is highly unlikely that he would not have tried to make small watercolors to sell Uncle Cent in 1881 -- if, in fact, such an offer was made.  28. large, Bargue-size sheets BVG 250, 12/2/1882-12/3/1882. Perhaps because Vincent knew that he did not have the control to work on a small scale (as his surviving drawings attest), he resisted this demand mightily from the very beginning of his career (JLB 204, 2/13/1882). Without the large format, he feared losing the vigor of his drawing -- one of the few pillars of his artistic claim. In November 1882, he defended the size of his drawings purely in terms of their vigor: "If this format is too big -- but I don't really think it's too big, given that it's rather forcefully drawn -- I could ... reduce the drawings to 1/2 or 1/3 that size without losing accuracy -- namely by using grids." (JLB 281, 11/7/1882.)

Only a month after making this offer to try smaller drawings, he lashes out at Theo in an unusually curt and churlish defense of his preference for the larger format: "You write about the question of making drawings in a smaller format. ... Do you know what I think -- all formats have their pros and cons. In general, for my own study, I definitely need to have the figure in fairly large proportions, so that head, hands, feet aren't too small and one can draw them robustly. ... But most take a smaller format. For my part, from the beginning I've done it like this for myself, sometimes a little smaller, sometimes a little larger, and for my own study I would be going against my convictions if I deviated from that." (JLB 290, 12/3/1882.) He goes on to challenge Theo: "Has someone said something to you like, for instance, if those figures were half the size, sheets of this kind could be used for this or that? And if you know of anything like that, I, for my part, will take the trouble either to reduce figures I already have to half the size, or to draw completely new ones in a smaller format. Without a specific reason I would think it less important than with a specific reason." (ibid.) In other words: if, and only if, Theo has a buyer for smaller drawings, then Vincent will consider doing smaller drawings. This amounts to something like, "Put up or shut up." 

Context:
JLB 290, 12/3/1882: "So for my own study I took as my example the format of [Charles] Bargue's Exercices au fusain, because that size is easy to take in at a glance and yet the details don't become too small. But most take a smaller format. For my part, from the beginning I've done it like this for myself, sometimes a little smaller, sometimes a little larger, and for my own study I would be going against my convictions if I deviated from that."

29. "preposterous" BVG 250, 12/2/1882-12/3/1882. 

Context:
BVG 250, 12/2/1882-12/3/1882: "You write about the question of making drawings in a smaller size. I appreciate your speaking of that matter more calmly than others, who have said the same thing to me in quite a different way, and told me, If you don't work in a smaller size, this and that will happen. I think it preposterous and superficial to talk that way, and I can't believe what they say is true."
JLB 290, 12/3/1882: "You write about the question of making drawings in a smaller format. I think it good of you that you speak about this question in a calmer manner than others, who have sometimes said the same thing to me in a very different way and told me, if you don't work smaller then this will happen and that will happen. Talking about it like that seems to me premature and superficial, and I can't believe that what they say is true."

30. vowing never to change BVG 250, 12/2/1882-12/3/1882. 

Context:
JLB 290, 12/3/1882: "Whether I personally have to work on a large or a small scale is immaterial to me, but what the illustrations demand is only part of what I ask of myself. Of myself I decidedly demand that I can draw the figure of a size such that head, hands and feet do not become too small and the details remain distinct. I cannot do this nearly as well as I have set myself to do it, and for that very reason I must not relax on this point."

31. he rejected Theo's right BVG 276, 3/21/1883-3/28/1883: Vincent's argument is muddled, perhaps intentionally, perhaps because the argument is intrinsically weak. At first he argues the point in the text: that Theo cannot get a meaningful idea of any one of his drawings (and thus cannot offer meaningful criticism) until he has seen all the drawings made at the same time of the same subject. After making this argument, Vincent appears to recognize its wobbliness and immediately backtracks to a very different, much safer position: "I mean, there's a certain difference between making 10 drawings and making 100 drawings or sketches or studies" (JLB 330, 3/18/1883). He continues retreating from the original argument, backing into meaningless generalities: "Not, to be sure, because of the quantity -- leave the quantity aside -- but what I want to say is this: in Black and White there's a certain mildness which enables one to draw one and the same figure that one finds beautiful in perhaps 10 different poses, whereas with watercolour, say, or if one painted it, one would do it in only one pose. Now assume that in this 10 there are 9 bad ones. I sincerely hope the ratio of good to bad won't always be like this, but let's assume for now that it is." (ibid., emphasis in original.) Finally, he arrives at an argument he has made before: "If you yourself were to be at the studio now, I don't think a week would pass without me presenting you with not one but a certain number of studies -- and it would amaze me if you couldn't always pick out from that certain number one or two things in which you found something attractive" (ibid., emphasis in original). This amounts to nothing more than a reassurance that, if Theo doesn't like a particular drawing Vincent sends, he will probably like another one in the same series. 

Context:
JLB 330, 3/18/1883: "If you yourself were to be at the studio now, I don't think a week would pass without me presenting you with not one but a certain number of studies -- and it would amaze me if you couldn't always pick out from that certain number one or two things in which you found something attractive" (emphasis in original).

32. masters of the new rules One of Goupil's principal competitors, Durand-Ruel, had announced plans for a series of one-man shows for the Impressionists in 1883 -- an unprecedented exposure for "unapproved" art -- and exhibitions were scheduled throughout the year in England, Germany, the United States, and Holland.  332 33. To me it seems BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882. 

Context:
BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882: "But I can hardly say that I share your thought which you express in the following words: 'To me it seems quite natural that the desired change will occur.'"
JLB 280, 11/5/1882: "But for my part I can hardly say that I share your idea that you express as follows: 'in my view it's in the nature of things that the desired change will come.'"

34. In his opinion BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882. 

Context:
JLB 280, 11/5/1882: "People will be forced to recognize that much of what's new, in which people at first thought they saw progress, is indeed less sound than the old, and consequently the need will become apparent for strong men to redress the balance. ... But for my part I can hardly say that I share your idea that you express as follows: 'in my view it's in the nature of things that the desired change will come.'"

35. Millet and Breton BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882. It is not clear whether Theo has mentioned Jean-François Millet and Jules Breton, or Vincent has supplied them (see context). Vincent toys with adding one name to this pantheon: "Israels, for example, may equal Millet, but with genius there's no question of surpassing or being inferior. Now, though, the top has been reached in art." (JLB 280, 11/5/1882.) 

Context:
JLB 280, 11/5/1882: "Nonetheless, there was still progress up to Millet and Jules Breton in my view, but as for surpassing these two men, don't talk to me of that. Their genius may be equalled in past, present or later ages, but to surpass them isn't possible. If one reaches that high zone, one is amid an equality of geniuses, but one can't climb higher than the top of the mountain."

36. forces of decadence BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882. 

Context:
JLB 280, 11/5/1882: "In the years to come we'll most certainly see splendid things; something more sublime than what we've already seen -- no. And for my part I fear that in a few years there may be a kind of panic, in this form: since Millet we have sunk very low -- the word decadence, now whispered or pronounced in veiled terms (see Herkomer), will then sound like an alarm bell." (Emphasis in original.)

37. sounded the alarm bell BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882. 

Context:
BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882: "And I for my part am afraid that perhaps in a few years there will be a kind of panic in this regard. Since Millet we have greatly deteriorated; the word decadence, now whispered or pronounced in covert terms, (see Herkomer) will then sound as an alarm bell."JLB 280, 11/5/1882: "And for my part I fear that in a few years there may be a kind of panic, in this form: since Millet we have sunk very low -- the word decadence, now whispered or pronounced in veiled terms (see Herkomer), will then sound like an alarm bell" (emphasis in original).

38. The changes BVG 238, 10/10/1882. A month later, he repeats the same sentiment, still fighting the battle against "newness" that Theo has precipitated with his approval of "modern" artists like the Impressionists: "The phrase 'not needed any more' -- how eagerly people use it and what a stupid and ugly phrase it is. ... I fear, Theo, that it will come about that many who have sacrificed the old for the sake of the new will deeply regret it. Especially in the realm of art." (JLB 286, 11/24/1882.) 

Context:
BVG 238, 10/10/1882: "And the changes which the moderns have made in art are not always for the better; not everything means progress -- neither in the works nor in the artists themselves -- and often it seems to me that many lose sight of the origin and the goal, or in other words, they do not stick to the point."
JLB 272, 10/15/1882: "And the changes introduced in art by the new people aren't improvements in every respect, it isn't all progress, neither in the work nor in the persons of the artists, and it often seems to me that many lose sight of both their starting-point and their target, or in other words don't stand firm."

39. "losing sight" BVG 238, 10/10/1882. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 238, 10/10/1882: "And the changes which the moderns have made in art are not always for the better; not everything means progress -- neither in the works nor in the artists themselves -- and often it seems to me that many lose sight of the origin and the goal, or in other words, they do not stick to the point."
JLB 272, 10/15/1882: "And the changes introduced in art by the new people aren't improvements in every respect, it isn't all progress, neither in the work nor in the persons of the artists, and it often seems to me that many lose sight of both their starting-point and their target, or in other words don't stand firm."

40. "hurry and bustle" BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882. 

Context:
BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882: "There is nowadays a hurry and bustle in everything that doesn't please me, and it seems as if the joy has gone out of most things. I wish your expectation would come true: 'that the desired change will come,' but to me it doesn't seem 'quite natural.'"
JLB 280, 11/5/1882: "The present has something hectic and harried about it for which I do not care, and it's just as if death has touched everything. I'd like your expectation 'that the desired change will come' to prove true, but in my view it isn't 'in the nature of things.'"

41. "taken the joy out" BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882: We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 241, 11/2/1882-11/3/1882: "There is nowadays a hurry and bustle in everything that doesn't please me, and it seems as if the joy has gone out of most things. I wish your expectation would come true: 'that the desired change will come,' but to me it doesn't seem 'quite natural.'"
JLB 280, 11/5/1882: "The present has something hectic and harried about it for which I do not care, and it's just as if death has touched everything. I'd like your expectation 'that the desired change will come' to prove true, but in my view it isn't 'in the nature of things.'"

42. " à peu près" BVG 220, 7/26/1882. 

Context:
BVG 220, 7/26/1882: "It is not sufficient to give an à peu près[approximation]; it was and is my aim to intensify it.” JLB 251, 7/26/1882: “It isn't enough to give an approximation , and my aim has been and still is to make it more intense.”

43. "cleverness" BVG 251, 12/3/1882-12/5/1882. We believe that the "interpreters" Vincent disparages here are the Impressionists and the "artistic combinations" are their stylized, "unrealistic" renderings of light and nature (JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882). 

Context:
BVG 251, 12/3/1882-12/5/1882: "Indeed, in the field of landscape painting enormous gaps are beginning to show themselves, and I should like to apply Herkomer's words to it: the interpreters allow their cleverness to mar the dignity of their calling. And I believe the public will begin to say: deliver us from artistic compositions, give us back the simple field."
JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882: "Truly, huge voids are also beginning to come in the sphere of landscape, and I'd like to apply a remark by Herkomer: the interpreters allow their cleverness to mar the dignity of their calling. And I believe that the public will begin to say, deliver us from artistic combinations, give us back the simple field."

44. would never save art BVG 251, 12/3/1882-12/5/1882: "STALWARTNESS, as people say here, they make great play of this word -- for my part I don't know the true meaning of it, and have heard it applied to very insignificant things -- stalwartness, is that what must save art?" (JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882; emphasis in original). This is, of course, a rhetorical question, as Vincent goes on to equate this so-called "stalwartness" with outright evil. "I would say, loving-kindness is better than mockery, that goes without saying, but many say, no, there's good in that mocking. Well, they must reap as they sow." (ibid.) 

Context:
BVG 251, 12/3/1882-12/5/1882: "Smartness, as they call it here, the word is used so much -- I myself do not know its real meaning, and have heard it applied to very insignificant things -- is smartness what must save art?"
JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882: "STALWARTNESS, as people say here, they make great play of this word -- for my part I don't know the true meaning of it, and have heard it applied to very insignificant things -- stalwartness, is that what must save art?" (emphasis in original).

45. only earnestness could BVG 251, 12/3/1882-12/5/1882: Vincent indicates that he is agreeing with Theo on this point, although whether Theo made the web of connections Vincent did (linking earnestness to the old art and evil to the new, "stalwart" art, is doubtful). 

Context:
BVG 251, 12/3/1882-12/5/1882: "What you say is quite true, ' Earnestness is better than irony, no matter how sharp and witty it is.' In other words, I should say, 'Bonté vaut mieux que malice' [Goodness is worth more than malice], that is self-evident; but many people say, 'No, malice, that is it.' Well, they will have to reap what they sow."
JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882: "What you say is absolutely true, ' Seriousness is better than raillery, however sharp and witty it is.' In other words, I would say, loving-kindness is better than mockery, that goes without saying, but many say, no, there's good in that mocking. Well, they must reap as they sow."

46. "One would like" BVG 248, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882. 

Context:
BVG 248, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882: "Zola, even though his Claude Lantier is real -- there certainly are Claude Lantiers, but, after all, one would like to see another kind of painter depicted by Zola than Lantier, who seems to be drawn from life after somebody who certainly was not the worst example of that school, which I think is called impressionist. And it is not they who form the nucleus of the artistic corps."
JLB 288, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882: "Even Zola might be right in his Claude Lantier -- Claude Lantiers certainly exist -- but still one would like to see Zola doing a kind of painter different from Lantier for once, who it seems to me is drawn from life by Zola after someone or other, and certainly not the worst, from the movement that was known as Impressionists, I believe. And they aren't the ones who make up the core of the body of artists." (Emphasis in original.)

47. Vincent had heard BVG 248, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882: In November, Vincent only hints that he knows the "true" identity of the fictional Lantier, " who it seems to me is drawn from life by Zola after someone or other, and certainly not the worst, from the movement" (JLB 288, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882; emphasis added). The following July (1883), he supplies a name: "[There are] two artist types in Zola's works, Claude Lantier in Le ventre de Paris and one in Thérèse Raquin, are just like pale ghosts of Manet, Impressionists of a sort" (JLB 359, 7/3/1883). The phrasing of the latter passage indicates that Vincent may have pieced out the relationship between Lantier and Manet on his own. If so, it would suggest that he had read Zola's profile of Manet (Ed. Manet: étude biographique et critique [1867]), which had been republished in a new edition of Mes haines that appeared in 1879. That is probably the work Vincent refers to as "Zola's book about Manet" (JLB 354, 6/15/1883) and cites when he writes Van Rappard this fond rebuke of Zola's views on art in July 1883: "I would truly like to begin by saying that I'm not one of those who blame Zola for this book. Through it I'm getting to know Zola, I'm getting to know Zola's weak side -- insufficient understanding of painting -- prejudices instead of correct judgement in this special case. ... I read the articles about the Salon with a most curious feeling. I think it utterly wrong, entirely mistaken, except in part the appreciation of Manet -- I too think Manet is clever -- but very interesting, Zola on art, interesting in the same way as, for instance, a landscape by a figure painter: it isn't his genre, it's superficial, incorrect, but what an approach -- not carried through -- so be it -- not quite clear -- so be it -- but at any rate it makes one think and is original and tingling with life. But it's mistaken and most incorrect, and rests on shifting sands." (JLB 359, 7/3/1883.)  48. "not the worst example" BVG 248, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882. 

Context:
BVG 248, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882: "Zola, even though his Claude Lantier is real -- there certainly are Claude Lantiers, but, after all, one would like to see another kind of painter depicted by Zola than Lantier, who seems to be drawn from life after somebody who certainly was not the worst example of that school, which I think is called impressionist."
JLB 288, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882: "Even Zola might be right in his Claude Lantier -- Claude Lantiers certainly exist -- but still one would like to see Zola doing a kind of painter different from Lantier for once, who it seems to me is drawn from life by Zola after someone or other, and certainly not the worst, from the movement that was known as Impressionists, I believe."

49. Manet was cleverBVG R38, 7/2/1883: Referring to Zola's art criticism, probably in the new edition of Mes haines published in 1879, which also included "Mon Salon" (1866) and "Ed. Manet" (1867), Vincent writes: "I think it utterly wrong, entirely mistaken, except in part the appreciation of Manet -- I too think Manet is clever" (JLB 359, 7/3/1883). The hedging use of "in part" and the negative spin that Vincent elsewhere puts on the word "clever" both suggest that this agreement with Zola's positive view of Manet is less than whole-hearted (JLB 291, 12/4/1882-12/9/1882; see Ch. 19, n. 46). 

Context:
JLB 359, 7/3/1883: "I read the articles about the Salon with a most curious feeling. I think it utterly wrong, entirely mistaken, except in part the appreciation of Manet -- I too think Manet is clever -- but very interesting, Zola on art, interesting in the same way as, for instance, a landscape by a figure painter: it isn't his genre, it's superficial, incorrect, but what an approach -- not carried through -- so be it -- not quite clear -- so be it -- but at any rate it makes one think and is original and tingling with life."

50. "superficial" BVG R38, 7/2/1883. 

Context:
BVG R38, 7/2/1883: "So I read the articles on the Salon with a very peculiar feeling; I thought him enormously mistaken, his ideas entirely wrong, except partly his appreciation of Manet -- I think Manet clever too -- but it is very interesting to read Zola's ideas about art, as interesting, so to speak, as a landscape by a figure painter, for instance. It isn't his genre, it's superficial -- incorrect, but what a conception -- not carried through -- never mind -- not quite clear -- never mind -- it makes one think and is original and at least sparkling with life. But for all that, it's wrong and most inaccurate and unjustified."
JLB 359, 7/3/1883: "So I read the articles about the Salon with a most curious feeling. I think it utterly wrong, entirely mistaken, except in part the appreciation of Manet -- I too think Manet is clever -- but very interesting, Zola on art, interesting in the same way as, for instance, a landscape by a figure painter: it isn't his genre, it's superficial, incorrect, but what an approach -- not carried through -- so be it -- not quite clear -- so be it -- but at any rate it makes one think and is original and tingling with life. But it's mistaken and most incorrect, and rests on shifting sands."

51. "wrong" BVG R38, 7/2/1883. 

Context:
BVG R38, 7/2/1883: "So I read the articles on the Salon with a very peculiar feeling; I thought him enormously mistaken, his ideas entirely wrong, except partly his appreciation of Manet -- I think Manet clever too -- but it is very interesting to read Zola's ideas about art, as interesting, so to speak, as a landscape by a figure painter, for instance. It isn't his genre, it's superficial -- incorrect, but what a conception -- not carried through -- never mind -- not quite clear -- never mind -- it makes one think and is original and at least sparkling with life. But for all that, it's wrong and most inaccurate and unjustified."
JLB 359, 7/3/1883: "So I read the articles about the Salon with a most curious feeling. I think it utterly wrong, entirely mistaken, except in part the appreciation of Manet -- I too think Manet is clever -- but very interesting, Zola on art, interesting in the same way as, for instance, a landscape by a figure painter: it isn't his genre, it's superficial, incorrect, but what an approach -- not carried through -- so be it -- not quite clear -- so be it -- but at any rate it makes one think and is original and tingling with life. But it's mistaken and most incorrect, and rests on shifting sands."

52. "inaccurate and unjustified" BVG R38, 7/2/1883. 

Context:
BVG R38, 7/2/1883: "So I read the articles on the Salon with a very peculiar feeling; I thought him enormously mistaken, his ideas entirely wrong, except partly his appreciation of Manet -- I think Manet clever too -- but it is very interesting to read Zola's ideas about art, as interesting, so to speak, as a landscape by a figure painter, for instance. It isn't his genre, it's superficial -- incorrect, but what a conception -- not carried through -- never mind -- not quite clear -- never mind -- it makes one think and is original and at least sparkling with life. But for all that, it's wrong and most inaccurate and unjustified."
JLB 359, 7/3/1883: "So I read the articles about the Salon with a most curious feeling. I think it utterly wrong, entirely mistaken, except in part the appreciation of Manet -- I too think Manet is clever -- but very interesting, Zola on art, interesting in the same way as, for instance, a landscape by a figure painter: it isn't his genre, it's superficial, incorrect, but what an approach -- not carried through -- so be it -- not quite clear -- so be it -- but at any rate it makes one think and is original and tingling with life. But it's mistaken and most incorrect, and rests on shifting sands."

53. "not part of" BVG 248, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882.: We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 248, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882: "Zola, even though his Claude Lantier is real -- there certainly are Claude Lantiers, but, after all, one would like to see another kind of painter depicted by Zola than Lantier, who seems to be drawn from life after somebody who certainly was not the worst example of that school, which I think is called impressionist. And it is not they who form the nucleus of the artistic corps."
JLB 288, 11/26/1882-11/27/1882: "Even Zola might be right in his Claude Lantier -- Claude Lantiers certainly exist -- but still one would like to see Zola doing a kind of painter different from Lantier for once, who it seems to me is drawn from life by Zola after someone or other, and certainly not the worst, from the movement that was known as Impressionists, I believe. And they aren't the ones who make up the core of the body of artists." (Emphasis in original.)

54. the path of past masters BVG R34, 5/8/1883. 

Context:
JLB 341, 4/9/1883: "If I object to a certain new style, this certainly does not refer to the style of Israëls, Mauve, Maris [Willem, Matthijs, or Jacob] -- no. No! This is the best style, in my opinion, but something has resulted from it recently which -- though there seems to be a resemblance -- is in utter contradiction to the style of these masters, and that is what I disapprove of."

55. "utterly contradicted" BVG R34, 5/8/1883. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG R34, 5/8/1883: "If I object to a certain new style, this certainly does not refer to the style of Israëls, Mauve, Maris -- no. No! This is the best style, in my opinion, but something has resulted from it recently which -- though there seems to be a resemblance -- is in utter contradiction to the style of these masters, and that is what I disapprove of."
JLB 341, 4/9/1883: "If I have something against a new movement, it isn't at all that of Israels, Mauve, and Maris. No, that's simply the best in my view, but something has since arisen from it which, while resembling it, is in fact directly opposed to those masters -- and that's what I'm against."

56. "Have you noticed" BVG R38, 7/2/1883: Vincent wants desperately to believe that "this omission is probably a question of not being familiar with M[illet]'s work" -- a wildly improbable explanation that only someone as rigid as Vincent could have honestly believed (JLB 359, 7/3/1883). Vincent strains openly to reconcile his own taste in art with Zola's very different taste: "should I get irritated with a friend on account of a fault in him?" he asks rhetorically. "On the contrary, he is all the dearer to me because of his fault" (ibid.). In a very forgiving analogy, he compares Zola writing about art to a figure painter doing a landscape and concludes: "it isn't his genre, it's superficial, incorrect" (ibid.). 

Context:
JLB 359, 7/3/1883: "Have you noticed that Zola doesn't even mention Millet?"

57. While airily conceding BVG 221, 8/1/1882: In his reaction to Theo's advocacy of Impressionism, Vincent opens, as he typically does in such situations, by ostentatiously pledging himself to open-mindedness: "But you should know that I'm a long way from having a system or anything like that to keep up and lock myself into" (JLB 252, 7/31/1882). But such pledges are made of air. He will spend large portions of several letters relentlessly rebutting Theo's arguments one by one, conceding nothing, and reasserting his own, very different view of where art should be headed -- i.e., backward. In a later letter, he writes: "To tell you the truth, I wouldn't like to be without either the old-fashioned or the newer attitude. There are too many excellent things in both schools for me to be able to give preference systematically to one or the other." (JLB 247, 7/18/1882.) And, in fact, Vincent's appreciation of the work of other artists is generally not doctrinaire (although he has seen very little of the Impressionists' work at this point). However, where it concerned his own work, he was often adamantine in rejecting outside suggestion, especially his brother's. 

Context:
JLB 252, 7/31/1882: "As regards black in nature, we are of course in complete agreement, as I understand it. Absolute black doesn't in fact occur."

333 58. made up of black and white BVG 221, 8/1/1882. 

Context:
JLB 252, 7/31/1882: "Absolute black doesn't in fact occur. Like white, however, it's present in almost every colour and forms the endless variety of greys -- distinct in tone and strength. So that in nature one in fact sees nothing but these tones or strengths. The 3 fundamental colors are red, yellow, blue, [the 3] composite [colours are] orange, green, purple. From these are obtained the endless variations of grey by adding black and some white -- red-grey, yellow-grey, blue-grey, green-grey, orange-grey, violet-grey. It's impossible to say how many different green-greys there are for example -- the variation is infinite." (Emphasis in original.)

59. "Scarcely any color" BVG 220, 7/26/1882. 

Context:
BVG 220, 7/26/1882: "All those things make me feel brighter and fresher -- you will see that I am not afraid of a bright green or a soft blue, and the thousands of different greys, for there is scarcely any colour that is not grey: red-grey, yellow-grey, green-grey, blue-grey. This is the substance of the whole colour scheme."
JLB 251, 7/26/1882: "All these things make me fresher and fresher inside -- you'll also see that I'm not afraid of a fresh green or a soft blue and the thousand different greys, for there's hardly any colour that isn't a grey: red-grey, yellow-grey, green-grey, blue-grey. This is what all colour mixing comes down to."

60. "In nature one" BVG 221, 8/1/1882. 

Context:
BVG 221, 8/1/1882: "Absolute black does not really exist. But like white, it is present in almost every colour, and forms the endless variety of greys, -- different in tone and strength. So that in nature one really sees nothing else but those tones or shades."
JLB 252, 7/31/1882: "Absolute black doesn't in fact occur. Like white, however, it's present in almost every colour and forms the endless variety of greys -- distinct in tone and strength. So that in nature one in fact sees nothing but these tones or strengths." (Emphasis in original.)

61. "to find the grays" BVG 221, 8/1/1882. 

Context:
BVG 221, 8/1/1882: "The colourist is he who, seeing a colour in nature knows at once how to analyse it. And can say for instance: that green-grey is yellow with black and blue, etc. In other words, someone who knows how to find the greys of nature on his palette."
JLB 252, 7/31/1882: "The colourist is he who on seeing a colour in nature is able to analyze it coolly and say, for example, that green-grey is yellow with black and almost no blue, &c. In short, knowing how to make up the greys of nature on the palette."

62. shades and shadows BVG 228, 9/3/1882: The following is a typical passage in which Vincent is trying to emphasize that, contrary to the Impressionists' vision, the world is filled with subdued tones: "Out of the ground shoot young beech trees that catch the light on one side -- are brilliantly green there -- and the shaded side of those trunks a warm, strong black-green. Beyond these trunks, beyond the brown-red ground, is a sky, a very delicate blue-grey, warm -- almost not blue -- sparkling. And set against this is another hazy edge of greenness and a network of slender trunks and yellowish leaves. A few figures gathering wood move about like dark masses of mysterious shadows. The white cap of a woman who bends over to pick up a dry branch suddenly stands out against the deep red-brown of the ground. A skirt catches the light -- a cast shadow falls -- a dark silhouette of a fellow appears on top of the undergrowth against the brushwood fence. A white cap, bonnet, shoulder, bust of a woman set off against the sky. These figures -- they're large and full of poetry -- appear in the half-light of the deep shadow tone like huge terracottas being made in a studio." (JLB 260, 9/3/1882; emphasis added.)  63. "brown-gray soil" BVG 238, 10/10/1882. 

Context:
BVG 238, 10/10/1882: "It looks very different here today, but beautiful in its own way, for instance, ... the grey or brown-gray soil of spaded potato fields, ... a far-reaching view of the damp green meadows, shut off far away at the horizon by a greyish streak, ... Above it, a somewhat yellowish yet gray sky, very chilly and wintry, hanging low; there are occasional bursts of rain, and many hungry crows are flying around."
JLB 272, 10/15/1882: "Today it looks very different here, but it's beautiful too in its way, the Rijnspoor yards, for example ... the grey or brown-grey earth of dug-over potato fields ... a view of extensive, damp green meadows, cut off at the horizon far away by a grey band ... Over it a slightly yellow but still grey sky, very chilly and wintery, which hangs down low and from which a sort of drizzle comes in waves and in which many hungry crows fly."

64. as early as April 1882 BVG 187, 4/15/1882: This is the first letter in which Vincent talks about his efforts to achieve a blacker black. Only a few weeks later, he goes into even greater detail on his frustrations and his efforts: "I like graphite better in its natural form than cut too fine in those expensive Fabers. And the shininess disappears by fixing it with milk. If one sits outdoors and works with Conté, one can't really tell what one's doing because of the bright light and notices that it's become too black, but graphite is more grey than black, and one can always obtain a couple of extra octaves by working it over with the pen, so that the strongest intensities of graphite actually lighten up through the repoussoir of the pen. Charcoal is best, but if one works with it too long it loses its freshness, and to keep the subtlety one has to fix those spots. ... But if someone invented a good pen to work with outdoors, with accompanying inkwell, perhaps more pen drawings would be made. One can do wonderful things with charcoal that has been soaked in oil, I've seen this from [Jan Hendrik] Weissenbruch. The oil is then the fixative, and the black becomes warmer and deeper." (JLB 222, 5/1/1882.) In April 1883, Vincent confirms this rough dating of the beginning of this obsession when he writes, "A year ago it was a mystery to me how some very deep tones of black could be obtained" (JLB 334, 4/2/1883). 

Context:
JLB 217, 4/14/1882: "If I didn't fix your drawing -- or if I worked on it here and there after fixing it, so that there are some places with an unpleasant sheen -- go ahead and pour a large glass of milk, or water and milk, over it and let it dry, and you'll see that a peculiar dull black is produced, much stronger than one usually sees in a pencil drawing."

65. vigorous modeling and varied tones BVG R33, 4/2/1883-4/4/1883: That Vincent found his pencil sketches wanting for lack of tone is shown by this advice to Van Rappard a year later (April 1883): "What would you think of the following method for drawings in Black and white? Make a drawing in either pencil or charcoal. Work it up -- as far as possible, but without worrying about the weakness and inadequacy of the effect." (JLB 335, 4/3/1883; emphasis added.) Vincent goes on to suggest a variety of additional materials (oil paint mixed with printer's ink). "[Then] one begins to tackle the original drawing again (with the brush, naturally)" (ibid.).  66. coal-dust black of charcoalBVG 195, 5/1/1882. In the same letter, he implies that he has had some success with a technique that he observed on his visit to Weissenbruch's studio in February: "One can do wonderful things with charcoal that has been soaked in oil," he writes. "The oil is then the fixative, and the black becomes warmer and deeper." Apparently, this technique (as employed, e.g., in Baby [F 912 JH 318]); did not entirely solve the problem, however, as Vincent continues to report frustration with charcoal (see Van Heugten, pp. 194-196). In September, he returned Le fusain, the handbook of charcoal drawing by Mathieu Meusnier (Georges Karl Robert), to Van Rappard, saying, "I've read it through more than once and tried, and yet I make no progress with charcoal, and I prefer to work with a carpenter's pencil. I would like to see someone make a charcoal drawing -- with me it so quickly becomes flat, and the cause is something that I believe would go if I saw it being done. If you come sometime, I have a few things to ask you about it. ... Perhaps I'll discover the secret, along with other things that are still unclear to me." (JLB 267, 9/19/1882.)

Vincent continues to use charcoal in combination with other media over the winter, but he never stops complaining about its difficulties. In May the following year (1883), he writes: "The only thing I have against charcoal is that it wipes off so easily; one loses things one has found because of this wiping off unless one works very carefully" (JLB 346, 5/25/1883). In June, his attitude toward charcoal is still torn between fondness and frustration: "the reluctance I felt to work with charcoal is disappearing day by day. One of the reasons is that I've found a way of fixing the charcoal and then going over it with something else, such as printer's ink." (JLB 357, 6/27/1883.) Only a few weeks later, he reports that he has ordered "an instrument that's known as a fixer which enables one to fix a charcoal drawing out of doors while one works," and promises that this will make it possible for him to "work [drawings] up" (JLB 360, 7/7/1883). It is not clear what this instrument was or to what extent it helped, but it does not appear to have solved his difficulties with the medium. As far as is known, Vincent rarely used charcoal except as an auxiliary material after leaving The Hague in September 1883 (Van Heugten, p. 29, n. 35). 

Context:
JLB 222, 5/1/1882: "Charcoal is best, but if one works with it too long it loses its freshness, and to keep the subtlety one has to fix those spots."

67. smeared or overworked BVG R13, 9/18/1882-9/19/1882. 

Context:
JLB 267, 9/19/1882: "I make no progress with charcoal, and I prefer to work with a carpenter's pencil. I would like to see someone make a charcoal drawing -- with me it so quickly becomes flat, and the cause is something that I believe would go if I saw it being done."

68. "[I] just pour" BVG 187, 4/15/1882: This is actually Vincent's advice to Theo on what to do if he receives a drawing from Vincent that has not yet been fixed. That it is an accurate description of Vincent's procedure is confirmed not only by the evidence on his surviving drawings (see Van Heugten, pp. 26-27), but also in a letter the next month: "I like graphite better in its natural form than cut too fine in those expensive Fabers [pencils]. And the shininess disappears by fixing it with milk." (JLB 222, 5/1/1882.) Later that year (1882), after he begins working with lithographic crayon, he is still using the same, high-risk procedure: "Today one that I drew with lithographic crayon. Then I tipped a bucket of water over the drawing and began to model with a brush in the soaking wet. In this way one gets very delicate tones if it works, for it's a dangerous method that can turn out wrong on occasion." (JLB 274, 10/22/1882.) 

Context:
BVG 187, 4/15/1882: "If I have not fixed your drawing, or have worked on it again here and there after having fixed it, so that there are spots with an unpleasant shine, just pour a large glass of milk, or water and milk, over it and let it dry; you will see that it gives a peculiar saturated black, much more effective than is generally seen in a pencil drawing."
JLB 217, 4/14/1882: "If I didn't fix your drawing -- or if I worked on it here and there after fixing it, so that there are some places with an unpleasant sheen -- go ahead and pour a large glass of milk, or water and milk, over it and let it dry, and you'll see that a peculiar dull black is produced, much stronger than one usually sees in a pencil drawing."

69. described his unorthodox procedure Van Heugten, p. 27: Van Heugten proposes that Vincent adopted the technique from Guide pratique pour les différents genres du dessin (1873) by Cassagne, in which Cassagne recommends fixing pencil drawings by spraying on a mixture of milk and water in equal parts. However, it is equally likely that Vincent came upon the process through hearsay, which would explain his unschooled application of it.  70. "continuously sponging" b3025 V/1982, "Kam, J.B." to "Plasschaert, A.", 6/12/1912: The visitor was J. B. Kam, the son of the Leur preacher (Jan Gerrit Kam). Vincent had sketched with Kam and his brother in Etten in 1881 (see Chapter 13).  71. recharged Vincent's obsession BVG 256, 12/31/1882-1/2/1883. Theo arranged for the Paris art supplier Félix Hilaire Buhot to send Vincent some sheets of lithographic transfer paper along with some markings to show the use of the crayon. The effect on Vincent was galvanic (see context). 

Context:
JLB 297, 12/31/1882 and 1/2/1883: "And if it's essential, then I believe that I would sooner get a better effect than a worse one with the same ingredients on the grey paper. When I looked at what Buhot had scratched on the one sample, I saw right away that the black was of a very deep tone, and I can understand that this is really essential for reproduction, where photogravure and galvanoplasty are involved. So I immediately tried to see which black I could use, while still sketching in my normal way."

72. the consistency of soap Van Heugten, p. 29, n. 33: Van Heugten points out helpfully that one of the ingredients of lithographic crayon is soap, which explains Vincent's counterintuitive discovery that the greasy crayon was softened, even dissolved, by the liberal application of water. Van Heugten writes, "Simulations of the technique described by Van Gogh ... showed that the crayon dissolved immediately, particularly the softer types. On the one hand it could be used to apply quite a thin wash, but it could also be spread out in a dark, opaque form. The effect was identical to that of the passages executed in this way in Van Gogh's drawings."  73. he had long sought BVG 256, 12/31/1882-1/2/1883. 

Context:
JLB 297, 12/31/1882 and 1/2/1883: "I saw at once that the black was of a very deep tone, and I can understand that this is a real necessity for the reproduction."

74. also adhered to pencil marks BVG 256, 12/31/1882-1/2/1883. 

Context:
JLB 297, 12/31/1882 and 1/2/1883: "But I had the idea of first doing a drawing in carpenter's pencil and then working in and over it with lithographic crayon, because (owing to the greasiness of the material) it takes on pencil, whereas ordinary crayon does not, or only poorly. Having done the sketch in this way, one can confidently work in the lithographic crayon where necessary without having to search or rub out a lot." (Emphasis in original.)

75. "glorious black" BVG R37, 6/14/1883-6/15/1883. 

Context:
BVG R37, 6/14/1883-6/15/1883: "I want to tell you something besides about a kind of Faber lead pencil that I have discovered. Here is the diameter of the lead; they are soft and of a better quality than the carpenter's pencils; they give a glorious black, and are very pleasant to work with for large studies."
JLB 354, 6/15/1883: "Wanted to tell you about a type of pencil by Faber that I've found. Here you see the thickness of the cross-section. They're soft and better quality than the carpenter's pencils, produce a marvellous black and are very agreeable to work with for large studies."

76. reminded him of English illustrations BVG 257, 1/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 298, 1/3/1883: "While I search for a more powerful process than the one I've worked with up to now, I try to be guided to some extent by the English reproductions made using the process you described -- together with the black scratches Buhot made on the sample paper -- as to the strength of black."

77. "painting in black" BVG 256, 12/31/1882-1/2/1883. Emphasis in original. 

Context:
BVG 256, 12/31/1882-1/2/1883: "What is called Black and White is in fact painting in black, meaning that one gives the same depth of effect, the same richness of tone value in a drawing that ought to be in a painting."
JLB 297, 12/31/1882 and 1/2/1883: "What people call Black and White is actually Painting in black. Painting in the sense that one puts into a drawing the depth of effect and the rich gradations of tone that a painting should have." (Emphasis in original.)

78. "gives the same depth" BVG 256, 12/31/1882-1/2/1883: We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 256, 12/31/1882-1/2/1883: "What is called Black and White is in fact painting in black, meaning that one gives the same depth of effect, the same richness of tone value in a drawing that ought to be in a painting."
JLB 297, 12/31/1882 and 1/2/1883: "What people call Black and White is actually Painting in black. Painting in the sense that one puts into a drawing the depth of effect and the rich gradations of tone that a painting should have." (Emphasis in original.)

79. his cluttered studio Van Gogh, p. 137: Antoine Furnée (a pharmacist in The Hague) described Vincent's Schenkweg studio as "disorderly and untidy."  80. Theo had brought BVG 270, 3/2/1883. 

Context:
JLB 322, 3/2/1883: "Do you remember bringing me pieces of natural chalk last summer? I tried to work with it then but couldn't. So I was left with a few pieces that I took up again these past few days."

334 81. "I was struck" BVG R30, 3/5/1883. Vincent also liked the natural chalk for other reasons: "It has one great advantage -- the firm pieces are much easier to hold while sketching than a thin stick of conté [crayon], which has nothing to grip and breaks all the time" (JLB 322, 3/2/1883). Also, "it's also not as hard as conté, that's to say that it doesn't scratch as much" (JLB 326, 3/6/1883; emphasis in original). About some of his drawings, he writes: "Only I think that if I had done them in ordinary conté, something deathly or iron-like would have entered into them that would have made people say immediately: that isn't life or nature. ... And in my view these little things make it worthwhile to go to the trouble of finding such materials as natural chalk and lithographic crayon." (JLB 333, 3/29/1883 and 4/1/1883.) 

Context:
BVG R30, 3/5/1883: "I found a piece of it the other day, however, and I was struck by its beautiful black colour. ... I've scratched a few strokes here at random in order to let you see the colour of the black. Don't you think it's a beautifully warm tone?"
JLB 325, 3/5/1883: "Now lately I found a piece again and I was struck by how beautiful its colour was, its blackness. ... I scrawl some lines here at random to show you the range of black. Don't you think it's beautifully warm?" (Emphasis in original.)

82. " bergkrijt" BVG R30, 3/5/1883. (See Van Heugten, p. 30, n. 36.) Consciously or unconsciously, Vincent may be loosely connecting his new favorite métier to the giants of the past like Millet and Breton, whose accomplishments he recently characterized as the highest mountain in the history of art. "Their genius may be equalled in past, present or later ages, but to surpass them isn't possible. If one reaches that high zone, one is amid an equality of geniuses, but one can't climb higher than the top of the mountain. ... Now, though, the top has been reached in art." (JLB 280, 11/5/1882.) 

Context:
BVG R30, 3/5/1883: "Now something else. Do you know bergkrijt ['black mountain crayon']? Last year I got some big sticks about this size from my brother."
JLB 325, 3/5/1883: "Now another thing -- do you know bergkrijt [natural chalk]? Last year I was given a few large pieces by my brother, this size, no less." (Emphasis in original.)

83. "There's soul and life" BVG R30, 3/5/1883. To Theo, Vincent writes this paean to his bergkrijt: "you can see from this that if you take the trouble to get me some, I for my part like nothing better than to work with it" (JLB 333, 3/29/1883 and 4/1/1883). 

Context:
BVG R30, 3/5/1883: "I intend to go on using it in combination with lithographic crayon. It's just as if there's soul and life in that stuff, and as if it understood what you mean to express and co-operated."
JLB 325, 3/5/1883: "I intend to use it continually in combination with lithographic crayon. It's just as if there were soul and life in the stuff, and as if it understands what one intends and itself cooperates."

84. "I like nothing better" BVG 277, 3/30/1883-4/1/1883. 

Context:
BVG 277, 3/30/1883-4/1/1883: "I am writing about it because it happened to be the drawing made with that crayon I mentioned, and you can tell that since you took the trouble to procure it for me, I for my part like nothing better than to work with it."
JLB 333, 3/29/1883 and 4/1/1883: "I write to you about it because the drawing was the very one in natural chalk, and you can see from this that if you take the trouble to get me some, I for my part like nothing better than to work with it."

85. this five-inch-long stick BVG R30, 3/5/1883: Vincent included a sketch of a piece of the chalk in his letter. 

Context:
JLB 325, 3/5/1883: "Last year I was given a few large pieces by my brother, this size, no less."

86. black watercolor, and ink BVG R33, 4/2/1883-4/4/1883: In early April, Vincent explained to Van Rappard his latest procedure for producing the blackest black (see context). Around the same time, Vincent informed Theo of his newest technique: "I've been working with printer's ink lately -- it's thinned with turpentine and applied with a brush. Gives very deep tones of black." (JLB 334, 4/2/1883.) About a week later, he added, "I've done some more [drawings] with printer's ink ... Printer's ink has much livelier effects than indian ink." (JLB 336, 4/11/1883.) Van Rappard (and probably Theo) did not respond favorably to Vincent's suggestions. In mid-June, Vincent reports to Theo what might be an argument with his friend in Utrecht: "R[appard] has not drawn with printer's ink, ... As for the English not using printer's ink, he's quite wrong. For they work the drawings up precisely by using tremendous strengths sometimes, which still make the greatest strengths of charcoal very clear. These strengths are obtained through printer's ink or autographic ink or lampblack or neutral tint and other blacks from watercolour." (JLB 355, 6/16/1883; emphasis in original.) 

Context:
JLB 335, 4/3/1883: "When one is ready, put a little ordinary PRINTER'S INK on a palette, a little Cassel earth, for example, and white-oil paint. With this -- mixing the colours and the printer's ink, which is as thick as tar in its natural state, with TURPENTINE (no oil, of course) -- one begins to tackle the original drawing again (with the brush, naturally). This is something I've tried out lately. It goes without saying that the printer's ink -- diluted with more or less turpentine (one can make it so thin that one can do highly transparent washes with it -- at the same time, using it more thickly, one can make the deepest tones of black with it) is the main ingredient one uses. I believe this is a route by which one can do many things. Anyway, more about this later -- I myself am exploring." (Emphasis in original.)

87. grew increasingly shrill BVG 282, 5/2/1883: On the very same day that Vincent receives his May 1 installment of 50 francs, he writes his brother in a state that can only be described as defensive panic: "I'm terribly sorry to have to ask but if it's at all possible send me another 10 francs, say. A week's work depends on it, for I shan't be able to get an immediate answer from Rappard, am already short of cash, and have appointments with models. If Rappard then sends me some, there will again be a phase when everything goes smoothly until there can be a breathing space once more. If you can send some, work will come off the stocks rapidly this week, and otherwise there'll be nasty damage to the vessel. But forgive me, there was a combination of costs (all unavoidable) that I couldn't quite cope with. And if you haven't got it -- well -- we won't starve as a result. The difficulties in small matters about small sums are sometimes truly perplexing, and this is such a case." (JLB 339, 5/7/1883.)  88. "I need it as much"BVG 282, 5/2/1883. (See Ch. 19, n. 89.) 

Context:
BVG 282, 5/2/1883: "I hope Rappard will be able to help me a little, for I need it as much as a meadow needs the rain after a long drought."
JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883: "I hope R. will be able to help me a little, for I'm in need of it, just as the field needs a shower when it has long been dry."

89. he always needed more BVG 274, 3/11/1883: "Now I must tell you about a surprise I've had. I received a letter from Pa, very cordial and cheerful it seemed to me, with 25 guilders [roughly 50 francs] in it. Pa wrote that he'd received some money he hadn't expected and that he wanted to let me share in it. Wasn't that awfully kind? It makes me blush, though." (JLB 327, 3/11/1883.) It may "embarrass" him, but he does not hesitate to spend it. Nor does he suggest that Theo could withhold 50 francs of his regular allowance. Vincent clearly thought that all money sent to him was money that he deserved. Less than two weeks after receiving his father's gift, Vincent announces to Theo, without apparent embarrassment, his purchase of the twenty-one volumes of the Graphic (JLB 331, 3/21/1883).  90. spent with a blitheness BVG 284, 5/9/1883-5/10/1883: "I saw with great interest a publication, Le Salon 1883, a first issue of a series of illustrations, some deuced good. Done with that new way of reproduction. I've subscribed to it, although I have enough expenses." (JLB 342, 5/10/1883.) Vincent announces this subscription to Van Rappard and tells him something he does not mention to Theo: the cost. "The first issue is out at 1 franc and [it] will be complete in 12 monthly instalments" (JLB 341, 4/9/1883).  91. often bought on credit BVG 282, 5/2/1883. 

Context:
JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883: "When the money from you arrived this morning I had no money -- that is, had been absolutely without a single cent for about a week. Furthermore, I had run out of drawing materials. I was in discussions with Smulders [Jos. Smulders & Co.] about a batch of drawing paper and took it, although the expenditure was inconvenient now -- but I had to have it and other materials such as the engravers' printer's ink and lithographic crayon. And had to pay various things and stock up for the housekeeping. And had to pay models whom I had had in the meantime so that I could carry on working."

92. never stopped making improvements BVG 271, 3/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 323, 3/3/1883: "But the road would have fewer obstacles if you could send me something extra soon. Otherwise I foresee that I'll come up against various things, whether drawing materials or taking a model or making some more changes."

93. "household costs" BVG 286, 5/21/1883. 

Context:
BVG 286, 5/21/1883: "But, Theo, the work brings so many expenses: and in many things I haven't the free hand that would be necessary. Of course, the household costs are heavy too."
JLB 344, 5/21/1883: "But Theo, the work involves many outgoings, and in many respects I don't have the freedom of movement I consider advisable. Of course I have to spend something on housekeeping too, don't I?"

94. "heavy cares" BVG 280, 4/21/1883-4/22/1883. 

Context:
BVG 280, 4/21/1883-4/22/1883: "I repeat, I do not say this to complain, nor to force you to greater sacrifices -- you are really burdened beyond your strength too. But I say it for the sake of a better understanding, and to relieve my mind. For you will understand that I am often full of heavy cares."
JLB 337, 4/21/1883: "Again, I don't say this to complain, nor because I want to press you to make greater sacrifices -- you're already overburdened yourself. But in explanation and to open my heart for once. For you'll understand that sometimes I'm burdened with cares."

95. Theo reported in May BVG 288, 6/3/1883: In early June, Vincent responds to Theo's distressing report: "It's disappointing that you write that business isn't going very well" (JLB 348, 6/3/1883). In a letter of July 22, Vincent appears to put this report a month later (i.e., in late June): "As for financial matters, you'll remember writing to me months ago about bad times" (JLB 363, 7/22/1883). This may be an attempt, conscious or unconscious, to lessen the burden of guilt for his demands since being informed of Theo's plight. Apparently, Theo's financial condition became precarious as early as February or March, as Vincent later learned: "now since February or since March, I believe, you yourself have been hard up" (JLB 356, 6/22/1883). 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "It's disappointing that you write that business isn't going very well -- if the position gets more precarious, let's redouble our efforts."

96. Goupil had been slack BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "It's disappointing that you write that business isn't going very well -- if the position gets more precarious, let's redouble our efforts."

97. "rather straightened" BVG 295, 6/22/1883. 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "I am rather hard up. Last year, you remember, every now and then I had something extra from you; now for certain reasons you have been rather straightened yourself since February or March, I think."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "I'm a little worried, last year, as you know, I sometimes had something extra from you and now since February or since March, I believe, you yourself have been hard up."

98. absolutely indispensible BVG 288, 6/3/1883. Even after he learned a month later that Theo had been forced to borrow to make earlier payments (JLB 366, 7/24/1883), he continued to demand extra money ("It would be all the more desirable if you could send me something extra because I would like to do more rather than less in the coming days" [JLB 349, 6/3/1883]) and accelerated disbursements ("I'm absolutely broke, send somewhat earlier if you can" [JLB 355, 6/16/1883]). Vincent wrote this note on a loose leaf enclosed with one of these letters: "you will remember how you thought you would be able to send several times, but it wasn't possible, first you thought in March, but before that you had to withdraw money yourself" (JLB 366, 7/24/1883). Vincent is probably referring to the same financial hardships that Theo wrote about in March, to which Vincent replied at the time: "You say something in your letter that I also feel on occasion -- 'Sometimes I don't know how I'll get through it.' You see, I often feel that, often and in more than one respect, not only financially but in art itself and life in general." (JLB 327, 3/11/1883; emphasis in original.) 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "But once again, as long as I don't find employment the money from you is absolutely indispensable. What I received from you today -- I immediately have to pay out exactly as much as I receive, I still have to pay three models whom I had several times, I have to pay the carpenter, pay rent, still pay the baker and grocer and the cobbler as well, and stock up again."

99. "cutting it down" BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
BVG 288, 6/3/1883: "To me it means models, studio, bread; cutting it down would be something like choking or drowning me. I mean, I can do as little without it now as I can do without air."
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "For me it represents model, studio, bread; reducing it would lead to something like suffocating or drowning, I mean I can no more do without it now than I can do without air."

100. brushed aside Theo's pleas BVG 288, 6/3/1883: Vincent suggests that Theo's letter introduced the possibility, at least, that he might have to stop sending money for a while, or reduce the amount he sent, because of the slowdown in business and other pressures on his purse -- or that Vincent inferred as much, or feared as much. Theo definitely pleaded the difficulty of his financial condition in detail, as Vincent's unsympathetic response makes clear: "The division of your income, directly and indirectly, among no fewer than 6 people is indeed remarkable. But the subdivision of my 150 francs among 4 living beings, while all the expenses for models, drawing materials, painting requisites and rent must be paid from them, also makes one think, don't you agree?" (JLB 366, 7/24/1883.) 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "So, old chap, as for my not needing you one time, I need it more than ever, but I would point out the opportunity we have if we persevere. Because of the money from Rappard, I already have several things such as sketchbooks &c., and everything you send is converted into drawings, and I believe you'll find what I'm working on now more suitable than the previous ones. So let's be of good heart and energetic."

101. calls for more models BVG 288, 6/3/1883: Not even mentioned in the text is this response to Theo's plight (see context). This amounts to "I told you so." Vincent also replays the argument he made when he wanted to marry Sien -- that if Theo withdraws his support, Theo will be condemning Sien to a life of prostitution (JLB 348, 6/3/1883). 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "Well, you say that business isn't flourishing. That's bad enough. But the situation has always been precarious and always will be in life."

102. turned back every demand Even as he demanded more money, Vincent resisted all calls for him to earn it himself. Theo had pressed him again and again to find a job: ideally as a magazine illustrator; if not, as a teacher. For a long time, Vincent dutifully pretended to share this goal with his brother. But he tells a different story to Van Rappard: "Another painter, [George Hendrick] Breitner, with whom at first I occasionally went out drawing in the street, and who was in the hospital at just about the same time as I was, has become a teacher at the secondary school, although I know he wasn't looking forward to it" (JLB 307, 2/4/1883). A few months later, he gives Theo a similar account, with the same message: "I saw Breitner briefly in the street last week. His position in Rotterdam is reassuring for him -- but just this morning [Herman] Van der Weele had had a note from him to say that he was ill again. To tell you the truth, the impression I got when I saw him again wasn't very favourable; in fact I found a je ne sais quoi of disappointment in him, and he talked rather oddly about his work." (JLB 327, 3/11/1883; emphasis in original.) Vincent argues that his drawings will help him find a position with a magazine: "when one presents oneself somewhere to ask for work it's as well to be able to show something of one's work. That saves words and is more practical." (JLB 282, 11/14/1882.)

By March, however, he has retreated from this commitment almost entirely. He tells Theo that he would be willing to take a position at a magazine only if his employer agrees in advance to let him make whatever drawings he wants and to pay him regardless of whether they publish the illustrations -- exactly the arrangement he has with Theo: "Who knows if now, with better light and natural chalk and lithographic crayon, I shan't succeed in doing something for illustrated magazines. Current events -- that's what they wanted. If by that they meant things like illuminations for the king's birthday, say, that would give me precious little enjoyment. But if it pleased the gentlemen to include under current events scenes from the everyday life of the people, I'd have nothing against doing my very best for those." (JLB 324, 3/4/1883; emphasis in original.) Beneath this fog of words, Vincent has, as usual, stepped away from a project that has not borne immediate fruit. He is positioning himself as the shunning, not shunned. If he cannot find a job, it is not the fault of his images or his talent, it is the short-sightedness of the magazine publishers. 

103. pursuit of self-sufficiency BVG 272, 3/4/1883. 

Context:
JLB 324, 3/4/1883: "Lately I read the following in Felix Holt the Radical by Eliot. 'The people I live among have the same follies and vices as the rich -- only they have their own forms of folly and vice -- and they have not what are called the refinements of the rich to make their faults more bearable. It doesn't much matter to me -- I'm not fond of those refinements but some people are and find it difficult to feel at home with such persons as have them not.' I wouldn't have put it in those words myself, but I've sometimes felt the same." (Emphasis in original.)

104. a sharp rebuke from ParisBVG 274, 3/11/1883. Theo's rebuke can be inferred from Vincent's quick back-tracking from the anti-materialist message of the Felix Holt passage: "My mood varies, of course, but nonetheless I have a certain average serenity. I have a certain faith in art, a certain trust that it's a powerful current that drives a person -- although he has to cooperate -- to a haven, and in any case I consider it such a great happiness if a person has found his work that I don't count myself among the unfortunate. I mean, even if I were in certain fairly serious difficulties, and even if there were sombre days in my life, I wouldn't like it and wouldn't consider it right if someone were to count me among the unfortunate." (JLB 327, 3/11/1883; emphasis added.) Theo has apparently responded to Vincent's quotation from Eliot in letter JLB 324 (3/4/1883) about having found a "home" among the unfortunate of the world. Theo's class consciousness comes out, and Vincent responds with a clarification to the effect of, "I said I found a home among the unfortunate, but that doesn't mean I should like to be (or should be) counted among the unfortunate" (ibid.). Like most of Vincent's quick back-trackings, qualifications, quibblings, and prevarications in the face of Theo's challenges, the distinction Vincent describes here does not withstand scrutiny.  105. "nightmare" BVG 303, 7/23/1883: Not surprisingly, Vincent clothes this stinging rebuke in a heavy raiment of rhetoric: "To me, the drawings I'm doing now are a shadow of what I mean, but a shadow that already has a certain shape, and what I seek, what I'm after, isn't something vague but things from full reality that can only be mastered by patient and regular work. Look, imagining how I would have to work in fits and starts is a ghastly prospect for me." (JLB 365, 7/23/1883.) 

Context:
BVG 303, 7/23/1883: "The idea of working in fits and starts is a nightmare to me."
JLB 365, 7/23/1883: "Look, imagining how I would have to work in fits and starts is a ghastly prospect for me."

106. "comfort" BVG 303, 7/23/1883: Vincent conceals this rough message in a pleasantry, but there can be no doubt about who is "weak" and "upset" and whose fault that is (JLB 365, 7/23/1883). 

Context:
BVG 303, 7/23/1883: "So let's not lose courage, but comfort each other, instead of distressing or disheartening each other."
JLB 365, 7/23/1883: "So don't lose courage, and we must try to make each other's heart strong instead of weak or upset."

107. "distress or dishearten"BVG 303, 7/23/1883. (See Ch. 19, n. 108.) We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 303, 7/23/1883: "So let's not lose courage, but comfort each other, instead of distressing or disheartening each other."
JLB 365, 7/23/1883: "So don't lose courage, and we must try to make each other's heart strong instead of weak or upset."

108. "like the beetle" BVG 304, 7/24/1883-7/25/1883: This unexpected, unsettling image, combined with Vincent's known childhood hobby of collecting beetles, leads to the inevitable speculation that he himself may have tried such an act of domestication on one of his specimens. 

Context:
BVG 304, 7/24/1883-7/25/1883: "But what was the result? It was like the beetle which is bound to a thread and can fly a little way, but is inevitably stopped by something. I began things, but after paying the bills, I was hard up for weeks at the end of the month, sometimes almost without a penny."
JLB 366, 7/24/1883: "But what happens? -- like the May bug tied to a string, which can fly a little way but then comes up against something fatal. I started things but as soon as the month ended I had to bend over backwards for weeks to pay the bill, sometimes almost unbearably hard up."

335 109. offered occasional appeasements The relentless vehemence of Vincent's arguments is occasionally interrupted by abject mea culpas, protests of open-mindedness, or pleas for Theo's input. For example: "While for your part you say you sometimes long for us to be able to talk rather more about various things in art, for my part I feel that longing constantly, and on occasion very strongly. I would so often dearly like to know your opinion about this or that -- about some studies &c., for example whether they might be made into something suitable, or whether it was advisable to press on with something for one purpose or another ... Rest assured, dear brother, that the sense of the enormous obligation I have to you for your loyal help is always fresh and vivid inside me." (JLB 327, 3/11/1883.)

One could interpret these as merely meaningless incantations designed to blunt his brother's criticisms, for Vincent almost never listens to Theo's advice -- indeed, he mostly defies it -- and he always returns quickly to his primary mode of self-justification. (At the same time he was writing this lavishly conciliatory passage to Theo, he was venting his spleen against dealers in general [and Theo by implication] in letters to Van Rappard. [JLB 332, 3/21/1883.]) Nevertheless, we prefer to see Vincent as genuinely conflicted about Theo's guidance, just as he was conflicted about almost every aspect of his relationship with Theo. On the one hand, he loves and respects Theo and wants to listen to his advice, but, on the other hand, he resents being in a position of subservience to Theo and therefore is inevitably inclined to resist all of his advice, no matter its merits, as a form of protest -- an acceptable expression of his underlying resentment at Theo's unnatural superior position in the relationship.

The contradictory forces at work can be heard in this unusually elaborate and pitiable (but resolutely self-justifying) request for money: "I have to say that I'm running a little short. This is certainly not your fault -- but it's not my fault either. Whatever calculations I make, I can't economize any further. And to carry out some plans I would need to have more than I can command. ... Yet I don't say this to complain -- I'm grateful that I can make progress, albeit not as forcefully as I would like. ... You will understand what I mean, I would like to be able to spend more, both on models and on painting materials. Even if I don't sell a single one of my studies, I still believe they're worth what they cost in outgoings. The studio is so much better and more practical, but I only have enough steam for 'half speed' and want to go 'full speed'. Again, I don't say this to complain, nor because I want to press you to make greater sacrifices -- you're already overburdened yourself. But in explanation and to open my heart for once. For you'll understand that sometimes I'm burdened with cares. Still, we must make shift with what we have, and undermine with patience the things we can't lift with strength." (JLB 337, 4/21/1883.)

One can see the contest between defiance and deference especially clearly in two letters written a couple of days apart. In one (JLB 331, 3/21/1883), Vincent is militant and angry in defense of his figure drawings and studio expenses. In the other (JLB 330, 3/18/1883), he is compliant and cooperative -- a different person altogether. He encloses a drawing (Man in a Village Inn [F 276 JH 339]) that was clearly created specifically to address Theo's criticisms and concerns. He even provides a lengthy commentary for the drawing which is designed to highlight its elaborateness and charm -- two of the qualities that Theo has lobbied for. "It shows a gentleman who has had to spend the night at a village inn due to the late arrival of a diligence or some such reason. Now he has risen early, and while he orders a glass of brandy for the cold he pays the innkeeper's wife (a woman with a peasant's cap). But it's still very early in the morning, 'the crack of dawn', -- he must catch the mail-coach -- the moon is still shining and the glistening snow can be seen through the window of the taproom -- and the objects cast oddly whimsical shadows." (ibid.; emphasis in original.) Vincent is very explicit about the effort to placate Theo that this drawing represents: "So should it be that the drawings in natural chalk I sent you aren't what you intended, even though I had your tip in mind when I did them, don't let that discourage you, and feel at liberty to come back to that point, the more often the better. And be assured that once I've grasped your intention I'll be prepared, for example, to do as I said above." (ibid.; emphasis added.) 

110. counterattacks grew sharper BVG 250, 12/2/1882-12/3/1882: "What's happened to those drawings that you wrote you had sent through [Goupil]? I haven't yet received them, but I suspect they're still with you, since you wrote shortly afterwards that Buhot had seen them." (JLB 290, 12/3/1882.) The implication is that the drawings in question are, in fact, still sitting in Theo's apartment and he lied about sending them. This accusation is astonishing for a variety of reasons, not least that it comes at a time when Vincent is trying to secure Theo's cooperation and extra financial support for his lithography project. As if recognizing this, Vincent immediately adds mollifiers: "Of course I don't need them in a hurry, and only mention them in case they may be lying around somewhere. And if you consider it advisable to keep them with you in case you want to talk to someone about them, I have nothing against that." (ibid.) But note that even this "pass" contains the seeds of a new charge: that Theo is not trying hard enough to sell Theo's drawings. A rational actor who wanted someone to do him a favor (i.e., try to sell his drawings), would not accuse someone of lying as a prelude to that request.  111. to dress better BVG 315, 8/20/1883-8/21/1883: That this issue preoccupied Vincent even when it was not directly a subject of conversation is revealed in November 1882 when he sends Van Rappard an extensive, albeit indirect, defense of his poor dressing habits in the guise of a conceit about his painting style: "ask yourself whether it isn't equally permissible to send a drawing like this one, just as it is, done from the model, without later retouchings, into the world (though I admit there are drawing mistakes in it), equally permissible as my going onto the street in my working clothes if that suits me, and not being obliged to stand before the mirror before I leave the house" (JLB 284, 11/18/1882). The subject was a major point of contention when Theo visited in August 1883 (JLB 377, 8/20/1883) -- as it had been for almost a decade between Vincent and his parents. 

Context:
JLB 377, 8/20/1883: "If you won't mention that my dress occasionally leaves something to be desired, I'll be content with what I have and even grateful for it."

112. his art would suffer BVG 312, 8/17/1883. 

Context:
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "I know I make a disagreeable impression. Attempts to change that may well come up against the difficulty that the work would suffer if one lived differently."

113. Vincent blamed Theo's inattention BVG 301, 7/22/1883. 

Context:
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "You say that the effect of the autographs is rather meagre. That doesn't surprise me in the least when I consider that someone's physical state influences his work, and my life is too dry and too meagre. Honestly, Theo, for the sake of the work we ought to have eaten a little better, but we couldn't afford it and things will stay like that if I don't get a little more leeway by one means or another."

114. conspiratorial rants to Rappard BVG R32, 3/21/1883. 

Context:
JLB 332, 3/21/1883: "Anyway, be that as it may, let's keep up each other's enthusiasm, and let's encourage each other, as far as we can, to carry on working. Not in the direction of pleasing dealers or the ordinary art lovers but in the direction of manly strength, truth, loyalty, honesty. Which are all directly connected, in my view, with working with models. It seems that everything one makes in this way is doomed to be called 'disagreeable', but I believe this far from imaginary but definitely existing prejudice ought to give way all the same before the attempts of the painters against it, provided the painters are agreed on this between themselves and support and help each other, and don't allow the dealers to be the only ones who speak to the public, but put a word in for themselves now and again. For while I'm prepared to accept that what a painter says about his own work won't always be understood, I still believe that in this way better seed would be scattered in the field of public opinion than the seeds the dealers and their associates are in the habit of sowing according to a conventional formula that's always the same."

115. directly to Theo BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883: This is a not-too-subtle way of telling his dealer-brother that his ideas about making art are impractical and worthless and therefore he should butt out of Vincent's art. 

Context:
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "I tell you plainly that few of the ideas about art with which I became familiar during my time with Goupil -- in so far as they had to do with practice -- have been borne out, although I've kept the same taste. Creating things doesn't take place as one imagines if one is a dealer, and the life of a painter is different, the study is different."

116. he tried to end the argument BVG 312, 8/17/1883. Vincent's elaborate "abdication" of his non-existent commercial interests to Theo is a masterpiece of rhetoric and is therefore worth quoting at length (see context). As usual Vincent is trying to have his cake and eat it, too. While he wants Theo to stop pressuring him to make saleable works, he doesn't want to give the impression that he no longer intends to be commercially successful -- thus the pointed reference and strained parallels to Mesdag, icon of commercial success. The same complicated, even contradictory, agenda can be seen in the cautious, two-sided statement: "I would definitely say, you be the man who takes care of business, I don't want to have anything to do with selling, and live entirely outside those circles. Unfortunately, though, I can't yet say that now." (JLB 375, 8/18/1883.) This is an effort to abdicate responsibility for selling without actually appearing to do so -- to telegraph his true desires to Theo without being held accountable for them -- another typical Vincent strategy in these situations. The ultimate purpose of all these stratagems is revealed in the last phrase ("I ask you for patience in both our interests and for the sake of peace" [ibid.]). Basically, Vincent is trying to devise a way, through rhetoric alone, to stop the pressure from Theo to make saleable art. 

Context:
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "If only I had got a bit further so that it would be easier to sell, I would definitely say, you be the man who takes care of business, I don't want to have anything to do with selling, and live entirely outside those circles. Unfortunately, though, I can't yet say that now, and you aren't to blame for that, but I ask you for patience in both our interests and for the sake of peace. ... It's so painful for me to talk to most people, I'm not afraid to, but I know I make a disagreeable impression. Attempts to change that may well come up against the difficulty that the work would suffer if one lived differently. And provided one perseveres with the work, it will turn out all right later. Take Mesdag, a veritable mastodon or hippopotamus, all the same he sells his paintings. I haven't got as far as that yet, but the person I mention also began late and worked his way up by an honest, manly route, whatever else he may be. It's not in the least because of laziness that I don't do this or that; rather it's to be able to work more and to leave aside anything not directly part of the work."

117. "If you should insist" BVG 315, 8/20/1883-8/21/1883. Emphasis in original. 

Context:
BVG 315, 8/20/1883-8/21/1883: "For I think if you consider things seriously, you will not doubt my working hard, and besides, if you should insist on my going to ask people to buy from me, I would do so, but in that case I should perhaps get melancholy. If possible, let me go on as I have up to now. If not, and if you want me to take my work around to different people, I shall not refuse to do so if you think it better. But, brother dear, human brains cannot bear everything; there is a limit. Look at Rappard, who got brain fever, and had to travel as far as Germany to recover. Trying to go and speak to people about my work makes me more nervous than is good for me."
JLB 377, 8/20/1883: "For I believe that if you think about it carefully you won't doubt that I'm industrious, and if, moreover, you were to demand that I asked people to buy from me, I would do it, but I might then become melancholic. If possible, allow me to go on as before. If not, and if you want me to call on people with my work, I shan't refuse if you advise that. Yet, dear brother, human brains can't withstand everything. Take Rappard, who got brain fever and has now gone all the way to Germany to get rid of it. I become more agitated than is good for me when I take steps like going to people to talk about the work." (Emphasis in original.)

118. Theo made plans to visit Theo's visit in August had been largely assumed between the brothers since his visit the previous year. As early as the first of the year (1883), Vincent mentions it in his letters, but only in a plaintive, speculative way: "Should you see progress in my work when you come again" (JLB 297, 12/31/1882 and 1/2/1883). As of March, the plans are, apparently, still not firm: "I long for you to come, specifically so that I can show you the studies and talk about the work" (JLB 322, 3/2/1883). "I'd give a great deal for us to be able to speak to each other again, and I also long for you to see how much more suitable the studio now is" (JLB 327, 3/11/1883). "When you come to the studio sometime, I believe you'll see that I have a certain level of activity, and I hope you'll continue to see me in that way, won't you?" (JLB 330, 3/18/1883). "I don't suppose you can say roughly when you'll be coming to Holland, can you?" (JLB 334, 4/2/1883). "Do you think it will be about the same time as last year that you come -- or will it be postponed because you think it undesirable, perhaps, to leave your patient alone? Anyway, if you can say anything about your arrival, write to me." (JLB 338, 4/30/1883) In fact, it is not until Vincent's father visits in May that he hears something like confirmation of the August visit: "Pa did say that you'd written to them about coming this summer. I can hardly tell you how I long for that." (JLB 343, 5/20/1883) And it is not until July, only a month before the visit, that Vincent gets final confirmation: "It's good news for me that you're planning to come to Holland at the beginning of August, for I've said often enough that I dearly long to see you" (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). Later still, Theo's plans must have changed again as he did not arrive in The Hague until mid-August (c. August 17-18).  119. shadowed all their argumentsBVG 252, 12/11/1882: "I begin to feel in myself that if, for example, I went to England and tried right and left, I would indeed have a chance of finding a place [job]" (JLB 293, 12/11/1882). Vincent clings to this idea throughout the winter, even after he has otherwise renounced the ambition to find regular employment. After learning in May that the American magazine Harper's had sent the illustrators George Henry Boughton and Edwin Austin Abbey to the Netherlands to do a series of images called "Artist strolls in Holland," Vincent imagines that he might reverse the process. "Now I think to myself that if The Graphic and Harper send their draughtsmen to Holland, they wouldn't be unwilling to take on a Dutch draughtsman if he could supply them with something good for not too much money" (JLB 348, 6/3/1883).

This leads to a truly delusional scheme: "I'd like to work towards being PERMANENTLY employed for a monthly wage rather than selling a drawing now and again for a relatively higher sum. And commit myself to a series of compositions following on, for example, from these two that are on the easel or from others that I'll add. I would think it advisable to go to London myself with studies and drawings and to look up the managers of the various organizations, or preferably the draughtsmen Herkomer, Green [Charles Green or Henry Towneley Green], Boughton (some, however, are in America at present) or others, if they're in London. And would be able to get information about processes better there than elsewhere. Who knows, perhaps Rappard would also like to come along and bring drawings as well? Something like that needs to be done, I believe, with or without changes to the plan. I would dare, I believe, to undertake to supply about 1 large drawing each month for a double-page engraving, and shall apply myself to the other formats too, the whole page and the half page." (ibid.; emphasis added.)

The true delusion of this plan lies in its specificity. Vincent imagines it at a time when he has yet to sell anything to anybody at any price (except to his Uncle Cor, who was hardly an arms-length buyer and, anyway, did not like the drawings he bought and refused afterward to speak to his nephew [JLB 363, 7/22/1883]). This dream of England as a perfect refuge (which, we would argue, recapitulates a similar fantasy that overtook Vincent in the depths of the Borinage [see Chapter 12]) lingers throughout the summer of 1883. "I sometimes think of going to England. ... Perhaps there may be work and a salary there." (JLB 358, 7/2/1883.) "As for going to London sooner or later for a while, long or short, I too believe that there would be more chance of doing something with my work over there; I also think that I could learn a great deal if I could make the acquaintance of some people there. And there I wouldn't be short of subjects to do, I assure you. There would be beautiful things to do on the wharves beside the Thames." (JLB 361, 7/11/1883.) "I believe it's still always possible that on looking through the work we may decide on another plan for the future -- I don't know what as yet -- but somewhere there must be work that has to be done and that I can do as well as someone else. If London were a little closer, I for one wouldn't leave it to others." (JLB 368, 7/27/1883.) "Then I would certainly go to London right away to look for no matter what, even carrying bales, and leave art for better times, at least having a studio and painting" (JLB 375, 8/18/1883).

This last offer, to work as a delivery boy, is clearly meant for rhetorical purposes only, for in a letter the very next day, Vincent dismisses the idea of London in a tortured knot of rationalization. He says it is because of "the woman," but the real reason is clearly another attack of insecurity about his work: "When I think of London, it's a stimulating thought, I assure you, but the question is: is it practicable now, is now the right moment? Wouldn't it be better if I said plainly to myself: 'Consider your work not yet mature enough, because what you want and intend doesn't yet seem to be sufficiently comprehensible to those who see it, since they're more or less startled by it, so to speak -- carry on -- work faithfully and forcefully from nature -- look again deep in the country on the heath or in the dunes, and for the time being let it be enough that those who have seen it don't yet see much in it now, so don't go on showing it, don't count on support in London right away, it must be better?'" (JLB 376, 8/19/1883; emphasis in original.) 

Context:
JLB 293, 12/11/1882: "I begin to feel in myself that if, for example, I went to England and tried right and left, I would indeed have a chance of finding a place. To achieve that was my ideal, was and is, despite everything, still what spurred me on to overcome the enormous initial difficulties. -- -- -- But my heart becomes heavy at times when I think of what's going on -- my pleasure vanishes. I really want to do my best in my drawings, but all those editors and having to present oneself there -- bah! I shudder at the thought."

120. anxiety for the future BVG 257, 1/3/1883. Another comment in the same letter could be an indirect defense of Sien's permanent place in his life: "I believe I'll always work with a model a lot -- always and always" (JLB 298, 1/3/1883). Although Vincent expresses eagerness to see Theo, his anxiety is evident in the way he always directs that eagerness away from the contentious issues between them, especially Sien: "I have so much work now that I can vary it as I please. I long for you to come, specifically so that I can show you the studies and talk about the work." (JLB 322, 3/2/1883.) "I would so often dearly like to know your opinion about this or that -- about some studies &c. ... I'd give a great deal for us to be able to speak to each other again, and I also long for you to see how much more suitable the studio now is." (JLB 327, 3/11/1883.) "Anyway, when you come to the studio sometime, I believe you'll see that I have a certain level of activity, and I hope you'll continue to see me in that way, won't you?" (JLB 330, 3/18/1883.) 

Context:
JLB 298, 1/3/1883: " I'll show you more when you come, sooner or later -- and then we can talk about the future. You know well enough how little suited I am to approaching either dealers or art lovers, and moreover how it goes against the grain for me. ... I'm too fond of my very simple life to want to change it, but later on we'll have to incur greater expenses to do greater things." (Emphasis in original.)

121. "Father used to ponder" BVG 338, 11/11/1883. Not surprisingly, Vincent backs away from the full implications of this comparison: "... although happily there's less enmity, to mention just one difference, and in the Bible itself there are examples aplenty of better relations between brothers than existed between the aforementioned venerable patriarchs" (JLB 405, 11/11/1883). But it is interesting that one of the few times Vincent reports visiting the Pulchri in 1882 was to see a tableau vivant of Isaac Blessing Jacob by Rembrandt -- "with a superb Rebecca who watches to see if her ruse will succeed" (JLB 211, 3/11/1882). 

Context:
BVG 338, 11/11/1883: " Father used to ponder over the story of Jacob and Esau with regard to you and me -- not quite wrongly -- but fortunately there is less discord, to mention only one point of difference, and in the Bible itself there are plenty of examples of better relations between brothers than existed between the venerable patriarchs mentioned above."
JLB 405, 11/11/1883: " Pa sometimes mulled over the story of Jacob and Esau with regard to you and me -- not entirely mistakenly -- although happily there's less enmity, to mention just one difference, and in the Bible itself there are examples aplenty of better relations between brothers than existed between the aforementioned venerable patriarchs."

336 122. a girl from Brittany BVG 264, 2/5/1883. Marie's last name and life dates are unknown. 

Context:
JLB 308, 2/5/1883: "That je ne sais quoi, as with the heath, or that recalls her native country, the old coast of Brittany, is something that will become stronger rather than weaker with time, I believe, when you've been with her longer."

123. missing from the record BVG 261, 1/21/1883: A good example is this letter, which JLB has identified as a postscript to JLB 301, 1/13/1883 (BVG 260, 1/13/1883). See JLB 301, 1/13/1883: "Arrangement." The missing material almost certainly related to Marie and the circumstances of Theo's meeting her. Elsewhere in the same letter, there are glancing, inchoate passages relating to Theo's expressed intention to marry Marie, passages that suggest this very momentous topic may have been taken up at greater length elsewhere. In a letter ten days later, Vincent responds at length to an account from Theo about Marie, even though Theo has not written him since letter JLB 301 (1/13/1883): "How is your patient getting along? In what you write I see things that touch me deeply (such as that she paid the debt of the man who had deceived her)." (JLB 306, 2/3/1883; emphasis in original.)  124. "dramatic circumstances" BVG 279, 4/11/1883. 

Context:
BVG 279, 4/11/1883: "And further, your particular case is different from the more commonplace ones like mine [i.e., Sien], for instance, because the person in question possesses a special charm and, as I see it, sympathy of feeling; as a consequence, the possibility of an inner struggle about the problem you mention would also have emerged, even if the meeting had taken place under quite different and less dramatic circumstances."
JLB 336, 4/11/1883: "And now, your particular case differs from the more everyday -- such as mine, for instance -- because of the singular circumstance that the person in question has a special charm and that there is, I believe, a sympathy of feeling, so that even if the meeting had taken place under entirely different and less dramatic circumstances, you might have been in two minds over the question at issue."

125. abandoned by a feckless lover BVG 263, 2/3/1883: Vincent refers to Marie's previous lover only as "the man who had deceived her" (JLB 306, 2/3/1883). 

Context:
JLB 306, 2/3/1883: "How is your patient getting along? In what you write I see things that touch me deeply (such as that she paid the debt of the man who had deceived her)." (Emphasis in original.)

126. from paying his debts BVG 263, 2/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 306, 2/3/1883: "In what you write I see things that touch me deeply (such as that she paid the debt of the man who had deceived her)" (emphasis in original).

127. found her charming BVG 279, 4/11/1883. 

Context:
JLB 336, 4/11/1883: "And now, your particular case differs from the more everyday -- such as mine, for instance -- because of the singular circumstance that the person in question has a special charm and that there is, I believe, a sympathy of feeling, so that even if the meeting had taken place under entirely different and less dramatic circumstances, you might have been in two minds over the question at issue."

128. and attractive BVG 286, 5/21/1883: "Le Paradou -- must have been real" (JLB 344, 5/21/1883). Vincent's precise meaning is unclear. "Le paradou" (Paradise) was the name of the verdant, secluded garden in Zola's La faute de l'abbé Mouret (The Sins of Father Mouret) (1875) in which the hero, Serge Mouret, finds sexual bliss with a beautiful young girl named Albine. 

Context:
JLB 344, 5/21/1883: "Am glad you're enjoying yourself these days. Le Paradou -- must have been real. Yes, I would have nothing against giving something like that a try sometime. And you would be good models, I don't doubt that."

129. The childless daughter BVG 260, 1/13/1883. 

Context:
JLB 301, 1/13/1883: "I think it rather a pity that she has no child."

130. a Catholic family BVG 291, 6/5/1883-6/6/1883. 

Context:
BVG 291, 6/5/1883-6/6/1883: "And perhaps in your case, 'That poor Catholic girl must not be forsaken,' or something like that; so don't worry, keep good courage and try to reassure them."
JLB 351, 6/7/1883: "Now, probably the same in your case: 'that poor papist woman shouldn't be alone even so', or something like that. So don't be concerned, be of good heart, and put their minds at ease."

131. decent BVG 267, 2/15/1883. 

Context:
BVG 267, 2/15/1883: "From what you say about her reading, for instance, I see she has a sentiment which many other women completely lack."
JLB 316, 2/15/1883: "From what you say about reading, for example, I can see that she has a feeling that many other women certainly do not have."

132. middle class BVG 267, 2/15/1883. 

Context:
BVG 267, 2/15/1883: "... she has known other things beside poverty and narrow-mindedness, so that I suppose she can fully appreciate you with regard to culture and broad-mindedness too, more than a woman who has been crushed by misery from childhood on and knows no better."
JLB 316, 2/15/1883: "... she has known not only misery and straitened circumstances, but also other things, so I believe that she'll appreciate you fully, also as regards civilization and broader views, much more so than a woman who has been hurt by misery from an early age and knows no better than to think that normal."

133. "not without culture" BVG 290, 6/3/1883: Perhaps for defensive reasons related to Sien, Vincent takes a cautious view of Marie's "advantages": "If she adds contentment to intellectual development and is modest in her needs, then I see no reason to fear the above" (JLB 349, 6/3/1883). As appalling as Vincent's views of women seem to modern sensibilities, they were quite common, even progressive, at the time. 

Context:
BVG 290, 6/3/1883: "But as there are qualities in your woman which indicate that there is something intellectual about her, and as she is not without culture, I think that for this reason she doubly deserves your confidence."
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "Yet because your woman is likely to prove to have an intellectual side and isn't uncultured, I believe that for that reason she deserves to be doubly trusted."

134. "je ne sais quoi" BVG 264, 2/5/1883: It is likely, but not certain, that Vincent is quoting Theo when he writes, "That je ne sais quoi, as with the heath, or that recalls her native country, the old coast of Brittany, is something that will become stronger rather than weaker with time, I believe, when you've been with her longer" (JLB 308, 2/5/1883; emphasis in original). 

Context:
BVG 264, 2/5/1883: "That je ne sais quoi coming from the heath, or whatever it is that reminds you of her native country, that old coast of Brittany, is something which I think will become stronger rather than weaker the longer you are with her."
JLB 308, 2/5/1883: "That je ne sais quoi, as with the heath, or that recalls her native country, the old coast of Brittany, is something that will become stronger rather than weaker with time, I believe, when you've been with her longer" (emphasis in original).

135. over her naiveté BVG 264, 2/5/1883: Vincent quotes directly from Theo's letter: "I thought your expression: 'Will she later be like the dog with the shepherd, or something better?' quite typical" (JLB 308, 2/5/1883). The most generous interpretation of this unsettling quotation is that Theo is worried that Marie will not be an engaging, stimulating partner in a long-term relationship, marital or otherwise. He does not want a mistress or wife who merely acts as a dog to his shepherd. 

Context:
JLB 308, 2/5/1883: "I thought your expression: 'Will she later be like the dog with the shepherd, or something better?' quite typical -- don't you think it likely that it will vary considerably from time to time? In one and the same love there are so many different states or metamorphoses -- precisely because of the loyalty to one and the same love -- that it's constantly changing." (Emphasis in original.)

136. salt air of the Brittany coastBVG 264, 2/5/1883. (See Ch. 19, n. 136.) 

Context:
JLB 308, 2/5/1883: "That je ne sais quoi, as with the heath, or that recalls her native country, the old coast of Brittany, is something that will become stronger rather than weaker with time, I believe, when you've been with her longer" (emphasis in original).

137. He lobbied bureaucrats BVG 263, 2/3/1883: Something, apparently a trip to see a bureaucrat on Marie's behalf, prompts an inappropriately light-hearted response from Vincent (see context). The nature of Theo's intervention has been lost to subsequent editings. It may have had something to do with the debts of the previous man in Marie's life. 

Context:
JLB 306, 2/3/1883: "That not finding that member of parliament 'at home' reminded me of the name that Punch gives to the secretary of home affairs (the Home Secretary is his title). In Punch this personage is never called anything but the Seldom at Home Secretary. What a lot of these Seldom-at-home people there are! And Dickens calls all of them together the circumlocution office." (Emphasis in original.)

138. put her up in a hotel room BVG 260, 1/13/1883: Eager to justify his decision to take Sien into his house, Vincent is not at all happy with Theo's decision to put Marie in a hotel room (see context). 

Context:
JLB 301, 1/13/1883: "It seems to me that you should pay special attention to the surroundings of the woman you write about if you want to see some benefit. It would be desirable for her to be somewhere other than in an empty room in a hotel or something like that, and for her to be in more domestic surroundings."

139. find her employment BVG 268a, 2/12/1883. A week earlier, Vincent advised Theo not to press Marie on this subject, citing her uncertain medical prognosis: "if I were you I shouldn't talk to her too much about looking for a job later -- given that, especially in relation to her foot, the future is so uncertain -- better leave it uncertain" (JLB 308, 2/5/1883). It is not clear from this exactly how far Theo went in pushing employment on Marie -- or how responsive she was to the idea. The passage from JLB 313 (2/12/1883) can be read to suggest that she responded to Theo's businesslike notion that a mistress should have a job with a Camille-like display of melancholy as a way of discouraging such notions -- proving Vincent's advice correct. 

Context:
JLB 313, 2/12/1883: "I took the view in a previous letter that there were objections to your having mentioned a job? -- I had already glimpsed something dimly in my mind -- now you write about the beginnings of melancholy -- well, I was afraid of that."

140. he considered marrying her BVG 261, 1/21/1883. Over the first half of 1883, Theo goes back and forth on the question of whether to marry Marie. But from Vincent's earliest letters on the subject, it is clear that by the time Theo informs Vincent about the relationship, he has already considered marriage and, for whatever reason, decided to wait (a decision he will later retract). Vincent agrees with this decision (advice he will later change), and reminds Theo of the advice that he, Theo, gave Vincent when he wanted to marry Sien: "And precisely because I can't say that you were wrong when you said 'don't marry her', I ask you to consider these words of yours, and indeed believe that you've thought about them, for it isn't I who says this but you yourself. And I remind you of this only because I believe that it was indeed good that it didn't happen immediately." (JLB 301, 1/13/1883; emphasis in original.) 

Context:
JLB 301, 1/13/1883: "So don't let go of this thought, for it's good for love to ripen so that marrying becomes very much a secondary matter. That is safer, and no one suffers harm as a result."

141. "To save a life" BVG 260, 1/13/1883. 

Context:
BVG 260, 1/13/1883: " To save a life is a great and beautiful thing, but it is also very difficult and requires great care."
JLB 301, 1/13/1883: " Maintaining a life above water is a great and fine thing, but it's also very difficult and requires a lot of care."

142. "Do not deprive her" BVG 260, 1/13/1883. Emphasis in original. The generosity of this offer is somewhat undercut by the fact that Vincent literally bookends it with emphatic re-statements of his undiminished need. 

Context:
BVG 260, 1/13/1883: "As to what I wrote you about sending me a little more money -- yes, I am rather hard up and wish it were possible, but do not deprive her for my sake, and know well that because of what you wrote, I will try twice as hard to make progress, so that the burden may become somewhat lighter for you."
JLB 301, 1/13/1883: "As for my writing to ask whether you could send me a little more, well, I'm a little worried and wish it was possible, but don't let her go short for my sake. And be assured that because of what you write I'll gladly redouble my efforts to make progress, so that the burden on you is lightened." (Emphasis in original.)

143. brooding over the future BVG 268a, 2/12/1883. 

Context:
JLB 313, 2/12/1883: "I find some expressions in your letters from which I see, or at least believe I see, that as regards the future you're in doubt as to the question of whether or not she will love you now and for ever."

144. his superior knowledge BVG 193, 5/14/1882. 

Context:
JLB 228, 5/16/1882: "... there are aspects of life that are less developed in you than your understanding of business, about which I freely grant that you're far better informed than I, and shan't lightly dare to say to you this or that isn't so. On the contrary, especially when you explain a little to me, I often feel that your grasp of things is better than mine. But on the other hand, when it comes to love -- I'm sometimes astonished by your views."

145. "It would be desirable" BVG 260, 1/13/1883. 

Context:
BVG 260, 1/13/1883: " It would be desirable for her to be elsewhere than in a dreary hotel room -- she ought to have more home-like surroundings."
JLB 301, 1/13/1883: " It would be desirable for her to be somewhere other than in an empty room in a hotel or something like that, and for her to be in more domestic surroundings."

146. "Show her unmistakably" BVG 268a, 2/12/1883. (We have slightly altered the translation and removed the emphasis in original.) When Marie is hospitalized in February, Theo reports that she is suffering from "melancholy." This report triggers all of Vincent's Michelet-induced delusions about mind-body-heart connections. He conflates her physical recovery and the health of their love -- exactly the synthesis he made during Sien's hospitalization the previous year. "The patient is so weak and stressful and exhausted -- though outwardly calm -- that she's now going through a crisis of the mind, much more serious in my view than any effect on the body ... So if that small cloud of melancholy persists, ... if it turns out that she's thinking of something that she doesn't say aloud -- then in my view there's no doubt, precisely because of her weak and stressful condition, that she's in mortal fear, I repeat mortal fear, over the question of whether you love her or not. Has deep inside her a sea of love that seethes and is agitated and doesn't express that precisely because she doubts whether you love her unless you tell her so, freely and frankly. This inner turmoil can be so strong (even though the cloud of outward melancholy is terribly small and scarcely apparent to you, and even less so to strangers) -- this turmoil can be so strong that recovery isn't possible." (JLB 313, 2/12/1883; emphasis in original.) Vincent's advice -- stretched out even further in a long melodramatic letter -- boils down to this: "Marie is sick because she doubts your love. You can cure her by telling her you love her." 

Context:
BVG 268a, 2/12/1883: "I repeat, if I am mistaken in thinking that in your patient's case there is also confusion or an inner struggle (of course, unjustified), so much the better; but if the signs of melancholy persist -- let her promise once more she will get well, and show her unmistakably that you insist on her getting well, and that you cannot live without her."
JLB 313, 2/12/1883: "Again, if I'm mistaken in thinking that there's a kind of delirium or inner conflict (unfounded naturally) in your patient too, so much the better. But should symptoms of melancholia persist, have her promise again that she'll get better, and show her plainly that you want her to get better and that you simply can't do without her." (Emphasis in original.)

147. He sent listsIn addition to Jules Michelet (1798-1874; French writer), Vincent recommends Madame Thérèse by Émile Erckmann and Charles-Alexandre Chatrian ("It's a modest book, but deep at the same time" [JLB 312, 2/11/1883]) and, more improbably, Imitatio Christi by Thomas à Kempis ("the reading MICHELET himself regards as desirable for a woman" [JLB 316, 2/15/1883]). He also mentions Hugo in passing and appears to make an unattributed reference to the preface of Cherie by Edmond de Goncourt and Jules Huot de Goncourt: "Love is sometimes blessed, although the world seems to believe it should doubt this. But the blessing lies in the fact that one can do more by working with love than otherwise, and one fears less. Thus in the end can have more serenity. In short, one learns to grit one’s teeth." (JLB 349, 6/3/1883; emphasis in original.) 148. especially Michelet BVG 267, 2/15/1883. 

Context:
JLB 316, 2/15/1883: "As for reading, the work of Michelet seems to me to be something that would give her spirit and tone."

149. the inevitable Mater Dolorosa BVG 262, 1/25/1883-1/29/1883. 

Context:
JLB 305, 1/27/1883: "Below an English figure of a woman (by [Helen] Paterson [Allingham]) is the name Dolorosa, which pretty well expresses it. I'm thinking of the two women now, and at the same time I thought of a drawing by [George John] Pinwell, The sisters, in which I find that 'Dolorosa'. That drawing shows two women in black in a dark room. One has just come home and is hanging her coat on the hatstand. The other briefly smells a primrose on the table while picking up a white piece of needlework."

150. "We both stopped" BVG 262, 1/25/1883-1/29/1883. The parallels were only underscored by Theo's reluctance to tell his parents about Marie for fear they would find her unworthy of their "crown and joy." 

Context:
BVG 262, 1/25/1883-1/29/1883: "Generally speaking (apart from the difference between the two persons in question), to you and me there appeared on the cold cruel pavement a sad pitiful woman's figure, and neither you nor I passed it by -- we both stopped and followed the human impulse of our hearts."
JLB 305, 1/27/1883: "In broad outline (leaving aside the difference between the two people in question), on a cold, merciless pavement a sombre, sorrowful figure of a woman appeared before you and before me, and neither you nor I passed her by, but both of us stopped and followed the promptings of our human heart."

151. hospitalized for an operation BVG 264, 2/5/1883: Vincent provides one additional detail about this operation, which was apparently already contemplated when Theo informed his brother about the affair at the beginning of 1883: "especially in relation to her foot, the future is so uncertain" (JLB 308, 2/5/1883). Bonger adds a note to this passage in which she claims that Marie "had to be operated on for a tumor on the foot," but she does not give any source for this information and it is unlikely that she and Theo talked about it in his lifetime (BVG 264).

As Hulsker notes, these accounts do not seem to justify the outpouring of anxiety that Vincent lavishes on Marie's medical situation over the next two months (Hulsker, Vincent and Theo, p. 127-128). "I congratulate you especially on the operation being behind you. Things such as you describe make one shudder. May it now be overcome -- and at least the crisis over. Poor woman!" (JLB 310, 2/8/1883.) "What a difficult operation that is, at least I was shocked when I read the description" (ibid.). "I'm longing to know whether any unusual effects of the operation have appeared in your patient" (JLB 312, 2/11/1883). "[T]he symptom of 'rather depressed' in your patient worries me" (JLB 313, 2/12/1883). "I'm glad your patient is making progress, if only slowly"(JLB 297, 12/31/1882 and 1/2/1883). Vincent also refers to her "anaemia" at one point (JLB 322, 3/2/1883), but that could be just a post-operative problem; and, in April, two months after the operation, he asks about the recovery, "Is she up already?" (JLB 334, 4/2/1883.) This could be a specific reference to the aforementioned foot problem or it could just be a general expression of encouragement.

While the two-month recovery period does support the scenario of foot surgery, the deep concern of both Vincent and Theo points to a more serious illness -- or at least a major surgical intervention on the foot, such as correction of a clubfoot or amputation. (Whether Charles Bovary's famous operation on Hippolyte's clubfoot in Madame Bovary had any influence on Vincent's account is impossible to tell.) Given Marie's past, Theo's past, and their present situation, one cannot entirely discount the possibility that the "operation" related to the termination of a pregnancy. The length of "recovery" may relate to an extended period of isolation to prevent her condition showing in public (both of her parents enter the picture around the time of her reappearance in April) (JLB 334, 4/2/1883). Such a scenario, entirely conjectural, would have to account for Vincent's "foot" reference and frequent subsequent references to a discreet operation dating to early February. It is possible either that Theo did not tell Vincent the truth or, less likely, that Vincent and Theo are talking in an agreed-upon code. Vincent's advice in June that "I consider it DESIRABLE that there be a child," would argue against an earlier pregnancy, although not dispositively because the aborted child would probably have been the previous lover's (JLB 313, 2/12/1883; emphasis in original). 

Context:
JLB 308, 2/5/1883: "It's still a difficult phase, that operation -- if I were you I shouldn't talk to her too much about looking for a job later -- given that, especially in relation to her foot, the future is so uncertain -- better leave it uncertain."

152. in FebruaryBVG 264, 2/5/1883. The operation apparently took place sometime after February 5 and before February 7, when Vincent writes: "I congratulate you especially on the operation being behind you" (JLB 310, 2/8/1883).  153. Sien's medical crisis BVG 268a, 2/12/1883. 

Context:
JLB 313, 2/12/1883: "... for days I've pictured your patient in my imagination (perhaps mistakenly, though -- I don't know for sure of course, and these are the kinds of thing one can't help linking together) as being in the same sort of condition as my woman in the days after her confinement was over."

337 154. reclaim old prerogatives BVG 262, 1/25/1883-1/29/1883: Vincent used his brother's romantic dilemma to reclaim the role of wise older brother. He recast all the previous year's defenses of Sien in a new, more appropriate form: as the hard-won wisdom of an older brother. "You will rediscover yourself in her, a part of your life that you had almost forgotten," he mused (JLB 305, 1/27/1883). "Love is a spider's web at first and grows to be as strong as a cable" (JLB 312, 2/11/1883). Vincent attributes this wisdom to Michelet.  155. in numbered paragraphs BVG 268a, 2/12/1883. 

Context:
JLB 313, 2/12/1883: "I see this resemblance between your patient and mine then: 1) both have undergone a difficult operation and weren't entirely calm throughout that operation, despite the chloroform;
2) shortly before the operation both had huge shocks to the mind through anxiety and tension and unrest, and their morale suffered almost more than a nervous system can bear;
3) for both, rest for the soul and body is absolutely necessary for recovery and recuperation" (emphasis in original).

156. "love and loyalty" BVG 268a, 2/12/1883. 

Context:
BVG 268a, 2/12/1883: "I hope quite unnecessarily -- but if the melancholy persists, and the restlessness too, and the je ne sais quoi which is interfering with her recovery -- then my opinion is that a renewed assurance of your love and loyalty will ease her mind and enable her to get well again -- yes, I truly think her life may depend on it."
JLB 313, 2/12/1883: "I hope quite wrongly, but if the melancholy persists and the unrest and the je ne sais quoi that blocks recovery, then in my view it's a new assurance of your love and faithfulness that will reassure her and prepare her for recovery. Yes, in my view her life may depend on it." (Emphasis in original.)

157. In May BVG 282, 5/2/1883: In early May, Vincent responds to news from Theo that he was planning to tell their parents about Marie. However, there is no confirmation that Theo actually did so until a month later when Vincent first writes of his parents' objections (JLB 348, 6/3/1883), presumably as learned in a recent letter from Theo. The long gap suggests that Theo's decision to ask his parents was a difficult and agonizing one, probably because he knew what they would say. 

Context:
JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883: "What you write concerning your patient is to some extent new and to some extent not. That you've written home about it, or rather will write, is something that will give you peace and is right."

158. "There is something" BVG 290, 6/3/1883: Using quotation marks, Vincent quotes Dorus saying this during his visit to The Hague in May 1883. It is not clear if Dorus intended it to relate to Sien or Marie, or both, but Vincent apparently took in to apply equally. In his report to Theo, Vincent follows it immediately with a rebuttal: "I don't think this is true, since I see no connection between class and morality. Class is a matter for the world, morality is a matter for God)." (JLB 349, 6/3/1883; emphasis in original.) 

Context:
BVG 290, 6/3/1883: "Well, it is not superfluous to say so, taking into account that Father, for instance, said to me at the time, 'There is something immoral in a liaison with a woman of a lower station in life' (which I do not think true, as I do not see any connection between the station in life and morality: the station in life concerns the world, morality concerns God) ..."
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "Anyway, it isn't superfluous to say this when one takes into account that, for example, Pa once said to me, 'There's something immoral in a relationship with a woman of a lower class' (I don't think this is true, since I see no connection between class and morality" (emphasis in original).

159. "unutterably pretentious" BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
BVG 288, 6/3/1883: "But, Theo, now that in your case -- knowing that you have a permanent position and a good salary (nota bene, considerably more than their own) -- they raise the same objection, I can only say that I think it unutterably pretentious and downright ungodly."
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "But now that they're raising this same objection in your case, Theo, you who have a permanent position and a good income (more substantial than their own, mark you), I find that unspeakably pretentious and utterly wicked" (emphasis in original).

160. he urged his brother BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "You've fulfilled your duty to inform Pa and Ma, but now that they talk like this they give you the right, it seems to me, to exclude them from further confidences and to consult them less than you would if they were more reasonable."

161. join him in open rebellion BVG 288, 6/3/1883. Vincent beckoned his brother into a conspiracy to subvert their parents' will (see context). In his call for open rebellion, Vincent waved away all reservations. Only after his parents rejected the marriage did Vincent become its tenacious advocate. He even argued against Marie's reservations about the marriage (at least as relayed or anticipated by Theo): "You have to deal not only with yourself as regards your attitude to things, but also with the attitude of the woman you're with. And while you're firm and unfaltering in the face of outside influences, it may be that in some cases the woman is upset by some people's opposition. And is herself opposed, like those people, and says, it isn't working anyway, it's impossible, and just when victory was in sight, so to speak. In short, because of the shocks that she encounters with you and must withstand, the woman can change greatly: she can turn out good or bad depending on how she takes things, gain or lose in character as a result of rowing against the current. Well, it lies in a woman's nature to regress." (JLB 349, 6/3/1883.) Essentially, the argument is that Theo should proceed with the marriage even if he thinks that Marie does not want it because women are changeable and cannot be trusted to see the best way forward and stick with it. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "So it grieves and offends me, it again disappoints me terribly, that Pa and Ma said that. I would do I don't know what if I could get this undone somehow."

162. After months of wavering At first, Vincent merely followed Theo's lead on the relationship with Marie: one minute encouraging his ardor, the next consoling his doubts). In January, Theo apparently expresses his intention to marry Marie and Vincent lends his support: "So if you continue to think that this person is the woman for whom you want to live, I regard it as a happy thing for you" (JLB 301, 1/13/1883). In his next letter, however, Vincent takes a much more equivocal stand, presumably reflecting Theo's own second thoughts: "One asks oneself, should I help this woman and otherwise see only a friend in her, or should I definitely choose this woman as my wife with whom I want to live always? Is she the one? Or is she not? You see, I believe that you haven't avoided this conflict, or perhaps you're still in it. For were it to be otherwise, it would seem to me rather unnatural. At any rate I felt that conflict, and it was so difficult that for my part I couldn't entirely answer those questions when circumstances forced me to make a decision. Because I thought, I don't have the means to maintain two separate households, but perhaps I have enough for one, and so I must tell her how things stand: what I might be able to do and what I certainly couldn't do. Perhaps we'll be able to get by together, but if we don't live together I won't have enough. With you it may take a different form while still being the same conflict, and I remember a remark of yours last year that I thought very right and true: 'marrying is such a funny thing'. Yes, by Jove, it certainly is. You said to me then, don't marry her, and I conceded to you that the circumstances were such that there was good reason not to speak of that for the time being. And now you know that I haven't spoken further of that, but also that she and I have remained true to each other. And precisely because I can't say that you were wrong when you said 'don't marry her', I ask you to consider these words of yours, and indeed believe that you've thought about them, for it isn't I who says this but you yourself. And I remind you of this only because I believe that it was indeed good that it didn't happen immediately. So don't let go of this thought, for it's good for love to ripen so that marrying becomes very much a secondary matter. That is safer, and no one suffers harm as a result." (JLB 301, 1/13/1883; emphasis in original.)

This passage, convoluted even by Vincent's standards, constitutes nothing more than a warm bath of noncommittal supportiveness while Vincent waits to see which way the winds of love blow. He is saying that Theo's earlier advice that Vincent should not marry Sien was correct given Vincent's circumstances at the time (i.e., not having the financial option of setting Sien up separately, as a mistress). Although he reminds Theo of his advice ("don't marry her") he is tendentiously reluctant to come down on whether it is good advice for Theo given Theo's circumstances. He seems to suggest that Theo could wait to marry her (allowing "love to ripen"), but carefully avoids advocating doing so. Elsewhere in the letter, he speaks vaguely of a positive result ("a good outcome," "happiness for you and for her") that certainly invokes marriage (ibid.).

In February, when Marie is recovering from her "operation," Theo's love-sympathy surges, and so does Vincent's support for a formal union: "Social standing and her vicissitudes help to shape her character and, it seems to me, make her suitable for you. Yes, if she gets better, you'll be doubly happy. And I wish from my heart that she becomes your wife." (JLB 316, 2/15/1883.) In the same letter, Vincent wishes for his brother "an unending inner happiness for both her and you" (ibid.). At the end of the month, Marie apparently expresses some reservations ("I think it's only half a good sign that she wants to go back to her country" [JLB 319, 2/23/1883]), which, of course, only inflames Theo's passion more, so that by mid-March, Vincent has notched up his support for marriage: " Two good people -- man and woman united -- wanting and intending the same, steeped in the same earnestness, what couldn't they achieve!" (JLB 331, 3/21/1883; emphasis in original).

After another month passes, however, Vincent returns to equivocation, suggesting in the very same letter that (1) Theo should marry Marie even if he doesn't love her ("At least it seems to me that one must make it a principle to continue with this protection once offered until rescue is complete, and to protect with one's own breast if necessary. Even without a particular love? Perhaps, yes -- in that case it's a marriage of convenience, so be it -- but not in the sense of a marriage that one enters into for gain." [JLB 336, 4/11/1883]); and (2) Theo should not marry Marie because then he could then not have sex with other women ("While still emphasizing that staying loyal comes first and foremost in all love, I remind you of your own words that 'marrying' (i.e. civil marriage) 'is such an odd thing.' These words of yours express exactly how it is, and on that point I declare I don't know which is better or worse, to meddle or not. It's what they call 'puzzling'. It puzzles me too -- and I for my part wish so much that one had nothing to do with that." [ibid.; emphasis in original.]), and because she might have a frightful family ("I believe it's well said that 'when one marries, one marries not only the woman herself but the family too', which is sometimes more or less fatal and wretched if they're nasty people" [ibid.]).

Only a few weeks later, Vincent is wishing his brother well on what appear to be nuptial plans for October: "Well, I sincerely hope that everything happens as you have planned towards October, and am glad the time has come, sincerely glad both for you and for her. I think this is for the best -- especially because I know details -- when one meets each other like that one should never again part." (JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883; emphasis in original.) As to whether October is, in fact, a prospective wedding date, the phrase "the time has come" as well as the subsequent sentence ("when one meets each other like that one should never again part") both point to a marriage, especially given the distinction Vincent draws elsewhere between "permanent relationships" (i.e., marriage) and "relationships with no obligations" (mistress). In the same letter, Vincent also suggests that Theo bring Marie with him when he visits Holland in August ("I sincerely hope that this summer it will be possible for you to come to Holland with her" [ibid.]), an unthinkable suggestion if she is still merely his mistress at that time. 

163. "lobbying clamorously" BVG 288, 6/3/1883: Driven to extremes, as usual, by his parents' opposition, Vincent takes the position that any opposition to a marriage is opposition to "rescuing" Marie -- exactly the same position he took with Theo when Theo argued that Vincent could support Sien without marrying her. Earlier in the year, Vincent himself took this position with regard to Marie, but such practical compromises quickly evaporate in the heat of Vincent's righteous anger on his brother's behalf. To bolster his brother's resolve, Vincent draws an elaborate parable from a recent excursion: "This morning I was in an almshouse, old chap, to see an old woman (with whom I had to negotiate about posing), and up to now she has brought up the two illegitimate children of her daughter, who is a so-called kept woman. Several things struck me -- first of all how neglected the poor lambs were -- although the granny does her best and there are many far worse -- I was also deeply struck by the granny's loyalty, and it struck me that if an old woman reaches out her wrinkled hands in such a case, we men cannot hold back ours. I saw the true mother, who came to have a look in slovenly, worn-out clothes with tangled hair left undone. And, old chap, I thought that after all there's a difference between the woman with whom I live as she is now and as she was a year ago when I found her. And between the children there and here." (JLB 349, 6/3/1883.)

The point, of course, is that women who become mistresses (instead of marrying) not only neglect their children, they also let their looks go to seed. Vincent's urging Theo to have a child by Marie is also just another way of urging him to marry (ibid.). It is very telling on this subject that when Dorus visits The Hague in May, Vincent reports the following exchange: "When Pa was here he spoke disapprovingly about my being with the woman. I said then that I didn't refuse to marry her" (JLB 348, 6/3/1883). In Vincent's defiant, Manichean argument, there are only two alternatives: either abandon a woman or marry her. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "From a moral standpoint one might perhaps be entitled to object to marriage in certain cases where destitution in the absolute sense is to be expected, but in my view this objection is at once completely invalid morally as soon as there's no question of destitution in the literal sense. And in your case it would be ridiculous to expect immediate destitution." (Emphasis in original)

164. "even if one" BVG 290, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
BVG 290, 6/3/1883: "... petites misères of various kinds have befallen me, and the 'precariousness' of such situations is so clear to me that, seeing it is only the beginning for you, I wanted to tell you once and for all that in my opinion it is right to try to save the life of such an unknown woman, even if one does not know beforehand how this woman will turn out later, nor what she will prove to be."
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "I too suffered petty vexations of various kinds, and the 'precarious' nature of such matters has become so evident to me that I wanted to give you my opinion once and for all, while you're at the beginning, that I think it good that someone tries to save the life of a woman like that who isn't known to him, even though he doesn't know in advance how the woman will turn out later or what she'll prove to be like" (emphasis in original).

165. the ultimate commitment BVG 290, 6/3/1883: When Theo proposed keeping Marie as a mistress -- Vincent dismissed that as a "relationship with no obligations" -- a miserable "compromise" (JLB 349, 6/3/1883). "I am for her life, and in order to save a human life," he intoned, "I scorn compromise" (ibid.). A permanent relationship (i.e., marriage), on the other hand, "is often a source of renewed energy and capacity for work," he argued (ibid.). 

Context:
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "I believe that it's a thing not to be repented of to aim for a permanent relationship, in contrast to many who in principle only enter into relationships with no obligations. With a permanent relationship one finds great inner calm and is in harmony with nature in my view, whereas one goes against the eternal moral laws if one tries to evade the consequences of a relationship with a woman. ... A permanent relationship is often a source of renewed energy and capacity for work. One loses patronage but gains in capacity for work, and holds one's own in the end."

166. "I think it desirable" BVG 290, 6/3/1883: This astonishing advice comes in the middle of a reverie about the child in Vincent's life: Sien's year-old son, Willem Hoornik: "And here in my case, for instance, on occasion during those days I was especially glad that there were children, so that the path of duty could be more clearly discerned" (JLB 349, 6/3/1883; emphasis in original). Thus, this counsel can be seen as another flailing bid for fraternal solidarity, as well as a shameless encouragement to defy and mortify their parents. It could also be inferred from this "advice" that Theo has revealed that Marie is already pregnant, and Vincent is assuring him that a child would not be "a problem, [but] the opposite in fact" (ibid.; emphasis in original). This reading might explain the very next sentence: "And I believe everything can be so arranged that you don't compromise yourself in the eyes of the world" (ibid.). Of course, this could refer to "arranging" to conceal either an illegitimate child or the affair in general. 

Context:
BVG 290, 6/3/1883: "Further, this letter is meant to tell you that I think it desirable that there be a child, for you will see that most people consider this a difficulty, which I do not see, just the reverse."
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "At the same time this letter is also to add that I consider it DESIRABLE that there be a child. For there, too, you'll see that most people consider that a problem, which I do not, the opposite in fact." (Emphasis in original.)

167. railed against the inhumanity BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "Not to do this is a great fault in Pa, and it's inhuman of whoever does this, and doubly inhuman if a minister does it."

168. and wickedness BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "Suppose someone like old Mr Goupil had an objection concerning money -- one expects no less from his standpoint, that of a rich dealer. But with Pa and Ma, who are supposed to be humble and content with simplicity, I think it very nasty of them to speak like that, and I'm ashamed."

169. "Thwarting the interests" BVG 288, 6/3/1883. Emphasis added to the word "monstrous." 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "And to stand in the way of such a woman, to obstruct her rescue and salvation, is monstrous" (emphasis in original).

170. "You and I also" BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "You and I likewise, we occasionally do something that's perhaps a sin, but after all we're not merciless and we do feel compassion ..."

171. "a crisis that may" BVG 290, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
BVG 290, 6/3/1883: "Look, this is a crisis nobody can escape, and it is a crisis which may cause some to become more firmly attached to each other, whereas on the other hand, it may cause others to become estranged by it, which is always a very deplorable thing to have happen once one has started. In short, sticking it out is not always an easy thing to do."
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "You see this is a crisis no one can avoid, and a crisis through which some become more strongly attached to each other and, on the other hand, many also become separated, which is always most lamentable after one has once started. In short, persevering isn't always easy." (Emphasis in original.)

172. Dorus traveled to The Hague BVG 285, 5/20/1883. The visit undoubtedly came on a trip to Utrecht that Dorus reported to Theo in a letter in late April: "On May 10 I have a meeting in Breda and on the 22nd and 23rd of May one in Utrecht" (b2243 V/1982, ''Gogh, Theodorus van'' to ''Gogh, Theo van'', 4/29/1883). 

Context:
JLB 343, 5/20/1883: "In addition, I was surprised by a very brief visit from Pa."

173. the most amicable visitBVG 291, 6/5/1883-6/6/1883: In addition to the lack of description of any argument, even on the subject of Sien (see Ch. 19, n. 176), we take Dorus's subsequent package, and Vincent's reception of it (see context), as an indication that the trip was amicable. Two letters from Dorus bracket his trip to The Hague in May, both of which show the resilience of his sympathy for his eldest son and suggest that Vincent has given no new reason for provocation. In April, Dorus writes, "How would Vincent be doing? Oh, I think of him so often, but it is good that his work keeps him so busy." (b2243 V/1982, ''Gogh, Theodorus van'' to ''Gogh, Theo van'', 4/29/1883.) In August, Dorus writes, "Oh, we think so often of [Vincent], and in my heart I can pity him so much. He has chosen such a difficult life." (b2244 V/1982, ''Gogh, Theodorus van'' to ''Gogh, Theo van'', 8/2/1883.) This is interesting because it indicates that none of the incendiary rhetoric filling Vincent's letters to Theo during this time (much of it directed at their parents), found its way to Dorus. 

Context:
JLB 351, 6/7/1883: "The letter in question is Pa's first since his visit and is very amiable and cordial and was accompanied by a package containing a coat, a hat, a packet of cigars, a cake, a money order. In the letter was the outline of a sermon, by far the best part of which I thought was the biblical text, and which made less of an impression on me than a few words about the funeral of a farm labourer later on."

174. "a glorious day" BVG 87a, 3/8/1877. 

Context:
BVG 87a, 3/8/1877: "It was a glorious day when Pa was here recently; we took a walk together, and also went to the museum to see the pictures by [Ary] Scheffer."
JLB 107, 3/8/1877: "It was a wonderful day when Pa was here recently; we took a walk together and also went to the museum to see the paintings by Scheffer."

175. spoke only briefly about Sien BVG 288, 6/3/1883: Given Vincent and Dorus's history of acrimony, Vincent's report of their discussion of Sien is stunningly matter-of-fact (see context). In a later letter written soon after he arrived in Drenthe in September, Vincent again recalls this conversation: "Pa answered me in generalities in which, however, there was no hint of consent" (JLB 390, 9/26/1883). We believe this terse exchange constitutes a significant reconciliation between father and son, especially coming at a time when Vincent is vigorously stirring the pot of Theo's resentment against his father. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "When Pa was here he spoke disapprovingly about my being with the woman. I said then that I didn't refuse to marry her. Then Pa AVOIDED that and talked around the subject. He didn't want to come out with it and say that I should abandon her, but regretted that I had relations with her. I've hardly talked this over with Pa at all, as a matter of fact, precisely because I fail to see that he's exactly the person who has anything to do with this." (Emphasis in original.)

176. not at all about Marie BVG 291, 6/5/1883-6/6/1883: Vincent writes about Dorus's visit in May and uses his father's silence to support his surprisingly solicitous view of his father's state of mind: "It seems to me that Pa's a little melancholy, though, and is perhaps fretting a little about you and imagining gloomy things" (JLB 351, 6/7/1883). 

Context:
JLB 351, 6/7/1883: "Pa writes not a syllable about it directly, and said not a word about it at the time of his visit. But not talking about it is in fact also rather abnormal." (Emphasis in original.)

177. his father's portrait

BVG 299, 7/11/1883: Vincent waxes eloquent on this conciliatory image (see context), and one can hear in that eloquence the old, irresistible pull of reconciliation: "Leaving aside irrelevant differences in religious views, to me the figure of a poor village pastor is one of the most sympathetic in type and character that there is, and I wouldn't be myself if I didn't attack it sometime" (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). Once this image of reconciliation resurfaces, as it does when Theo's troubles bring Vincent temporarily closer to his father, it will be only a matter of time before Vincent goes home and tries yet again to realize it. We believe it is likely that a few drawings (Sower [F 1035 JH 374], Weed Burner [F none JH 376], Gardener [F none JH 380]), lithographs (Weed Burner [1660 JH 377], and Gardener [F 1659, JH 379]) and one watercolor (Weed Burner [F 1035a JH 375]), from around the same time (July 1883), come out of the same new wave of nostalgia for home that will ultimately draw Vincent to Nuenen in time for Christmas, and are related to Vincent's fantasy of doing a portrait of his father (JLB 362, 7/13/1883). Vincent's insistence that it would be a "type," not a portrait, is undoubtedly a defensive posture to ensure that no one expects the drawing to actually resemble his father -- always a point of sensitivity for Vincent. 

Context:
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "Something I'd like to have terribly much, and which I feel I can do, given certain conditions of patient posing, is the figure of Pa on a path on the heath, the figure severely drawn with character and, as I say, a stretch of brown heath with a narrow, white, sandy path running across it, and a sky applied with some passion and evenly expressed. Then, for instance, Pa and Ma arm in arm -- in an autumn setting -- or with a beech hedge with dry leaves. I'd also like to have the figure of Pa when I do a country funeral, which I'm definitely planning, although it would be a great deal of trouble."

178. warm, forgiving terms BVG 291, 6/5/1883-6/6/1883: Vincent urged on his distraught brother the benign view of their father that he himself had always violently rejected: "For perhaps, perhaps Pa himself is conscious of having gone a little too far. ... [Pa] deserves to have people cheer him up. ... Don't blame Pa if he's mistaken. ... Don't even refer to the fact that he's mistaken unless he keeps going on, perhaps he'll retract of his own accord." (JLB 351, 6/7/1883.) He gently reminded Theo that "Pa is an old man" and described him generously as "a little melancholy, though, and is perhaps fretting a little about you and imagining gloomy things" (ibid.). He issued detailed instructions on how Theo could repair the rendered family fabric and still marry Marie: "If you want to help him, write quite lightly and cheerfully, and write about your visit this summer as though it's certain you'll see them again soon (even though you may not know yourself yet how you'll fit your visit in as regards the time)" (ibid.). 

Context:
JLB 351, 6/7/1883: "For perhaps, perhaps Pa himself is conscious of having gone a little too far, or worried about how you'll take it, or afraid that you won't come. Of course I don't know how matters stand and am only guessing, but I do think this, Pa is an old man and deserves to have people cheer him up if they can. You know well enough that in my view you ought to be loyal to the woman; there's no question of my saying anything less about that than I did, but do what's right and don't blame Pa if he's mistaken. That's what I wanted to say. Don't even refer to the fact that he's mistaken unless he keeps going on, perhaps he'll retract of his own accord."

179. "I should be glad" BVG 291, 6/5/1883-6/6/1883. 

Context:
BVG 291, 6/5/1883-6/6/1883: "I suppose you will take Father's words in the same way of your own accord, so that I'm not telling you anything new, but I should be glad if, with a little good will, peace might be preserved."
JLB 351, 6/7/1883: "I believe you'll have your own, similar view of Pa's words, and so I'm not telling you anything new, but because I spoke so sharply about it I wanted you to know at the same time that I don't do such a thing with pleasure but with regret, and would be glad if peace could be kept with a little geniality."

180. making discreet arrangements Not surprisingly, Vincent's negotiations with Marie's parents, to the extent they ever appeared in the record, have been almost completely removed. Marie's mother makes an early appearance in April 1883 when Vincent (who is having his own problems with Sien's mother) warns Theo of the potential dangers of mothers-in-law: "Through the influence of the mother and mixing with girlfriends -- perhaps more than through anything else -- something called a retrograde gets into women sometimes and prevents reforms in their thinking and actions, which are sometimes needed, and urgently needed. I'm glad that you rightly foresee what may lie in store for you from that quarter." (JLB 337, 4/21/1883; emphasis in original.)

Vincent implies that Marie's mother will probably encourage her daughter either to leave Theo or to demand money from him, but not to marry him: "if the woman had left her family completely, you could expect fewer problems in the future, I believe" (ibid.; emphasis in original). Vincent also suggests that the mother will fear damage to the family reputation if Marie continues as Theo's mistress. (He quotes Zola: "Yet these women are not bad, the impossibility of living a straight life in the midst of the gossip and calumny of the suburbs is the cause of their faults and their fall" [ibid.].) Theo's attitude toward Marie's mother does, apparently, take a turn for the worse, as Vincent issues a much stronger warning in his next letter: "keep an eye on the relations between your patient and her mother. ... It would surprise me if she doesn't share in the general foolishness. And your patient the general female tendency to make a mistake when deciding what they'll be guided by." (JLB 338, 4/30/1883.)

Marie's father is an even more shadowy figure in the record, but there is a strong suggestion that he entered the picture later and threatened to cause trouble, perhaps unhappy with the financial terms Theo offered Marie. In a letter from October, Dorus writes Theo this opaque expression of concern: "Did you hear anything more from that father? Prepare yourself for those difficulties and be wise and courageous." (b2245 V/1982, ''Gogh, Theodorus en Anna C. van'' to ''Gogh, Theo van'', 10/1/1883.) Two weeks later, he inquired again: "Also, about the other subject. What is the father doing?" (b2246 V/1982, ''Gogh, Theodorus van'' to ''Gogh, Theo van'', 10/15/1883.) The timing, the lack of context, and the furtiveness all suggest that these are both references to Marie's opportunistic father. 

181. regained his parent's favor b2244 V/1982, ''Gogh, Theodorus van'' to ''Gogh, Theo van'', 8/2/1883: In July 1883, Dorus attached this cheerful message to a letter to Theo: "Give our greetings to Marie." In October 1883, Theo's mother wrote, "We long for you to write us how things are with Marie" (b2245 V/1982, ''Gogh, Theodorus en Anna C. van'' to ''Gogh, Theo van'', 10/1/1883).  338 182. "false position" BVG 332, 10/12/1883. Vincent first uses this term in October 1883, in a letter from Drenthe, and he uses it to refer to the entire family's dependence on Theo, not just his. A few months later, he narrows its application to his and Theo's relationship specifically, but he acknowledges it only as a hypothetical possibility: "should we not know each other in our private lives any more, there would be something false about our position. And that I decline." (JLB 418, 12/28/1883.) By March 1884, however, Vincent drops the pretense of prognosis and uses the term to describe the current -- and very frustrating -- state of his dependent relationship on his younger brother: "I can't accept it as it is now. ... It's very wretched for me always being in a false position. Come on -- things can't stay the same as they are now. Why not? Because they can't. ... I have good reason to dislike our present false position." (JLB 432, 3/2/1884.) 

Context:
BVG 332, 10/12/1883: "What is the purpose -- your own purpose and Father's, Mother's, Wil's, Marie's and mine? What do we all want? We want to pull through, acting righteously; we all want to arrive at a clear position, not a false position, don't we?"
JLB 394, 10/12/1883: "What is your goal and Pa's, Ma's, Wil's, Marie's and mine? What do we all want? We want, acting decently, to keep our heads above water, we all want to arrive at a clear position, not a false position, don't we?"

183. evidence of his dedication In fact, the drawings had not been inspired by Theo's importunings. As early as November 1882, Vincent's friend Van der Weele had encouraged him to make more elaborate compositions based on his studies. At that time, Vincent demurred: "He wanted me to compose something from my numerous studies of orphan men, but I don't feel ready yet" (JLB 285, 11/22/1882). In March 1883, on a visit to Van der Weele's studio, Vincent " saw the STUDIES for his big painting" which he called "outstanding" and "conscientious" (JLB 331, 3/21/1883; emphasis in original). He immediately announced his ambition "to do drawings that are slightly more complicated" (ibid.). (The "big painting" Vincent mentions may have been A Misty Morning, for which, Vincent later noted, Van der Weele won the "silver medal" in Amsterdam [JLB 370, 8/3/1883; see JLB 327, n. 1].)

By May 1993, when he went to Van Rappard's studio in Utrecht, Vincent had already conceived of these large-scale figural works: "Now at the moment I have many studies and 2 or 3 more important compositions are dawning in my mind for which I probably have most of the material in my studies" (JLB 341, 4/9/1883; emphasis in original). On his visit to Van Rappard's studio, Vincent found images similar to the ones Van der Weele was doing. As a result, he returned with redoubled determination to attempt a large, finished composition consisting of multiple figures drawn from his studies. He wrote Van Rappard, "I need to tell you again that the visit to you raised my spirits enormously. I intend to make a start on some larger compositions too, and I've already started on one of them. That is peat diggers in the dunes [Peat Diggers in the Dunes (F 1031 JH 363)]." (JLB 346, 5/25/1889; emphasis in original.) He wrote Theo, too: "I've come back from Rappard full of plans and full of hope, precisely because with him I already see the fruits of the studies, namely combinations of several figures in more important compositions" (JLB 344, 5/21/1883; emphasis in original).

Van Rappard's encouragement of Vincent's new ambition ("When I talked to Rappard, he said 'those very first drawings of yours were good after all, you should do something in that genre again'" [JLB 347, 5/30/1883]) was no doubt given additional weight by the simultaneous exhibition of his painting Tile Painters in Amsterdam starting May 1 -- notwithstanding Vincent's vociferous denunciation of his friend for taking part in an exhibition (see Chapter 17). By June, Vincent was overwhelming in his praise of Van Rappard's work ("Do you know what Rappard's drawing is like? It's as if one were reading a description of a factory by Zola or [Alphonse] Daudet or [Camille] Lemonnier" [JLB 355, 6/16/1883]) and there is good reason to suspect that his example had overtaken Van der Weele's in Vincent's adhesive artistic ambitions.

Moreover, these works were hardly the step forward that Theo was pressing for, but rather the latest in a series of failed efforts to do the group scenes that would justify his years of "studies" and secure an unending supply of models. As such they represented the fulfillment of an artistic ambition expressed in one of Vincent's earliest letters from The Hague: "I have around 12 figures of diggers and people working in the potato field, and I'm wondering if I couldn't make something of them" (JLB 199, 1/8/1882 or 1/9/1882). This ambition echoes all the way back to the birth of his career in the Borinage. In August 1880, Vincent attempted two elaborate group drawings: one "of miners, male and female thrutchers, going to the pit in the morning, in the snow, on a path beside a thorn-hedge: passing shadows, dimly visible in the dusk. In the background, the large mine buildings and the slag heap are becoming indistinct against the sky" [JLB identify this drawing as Miners (F 831 JH Juv. 11)]; the other ("the pendant") "is of the miners' return ... an effect of brown silhouettes encircled by light against a streaky sunset sky." (This second drawing remains unidentified [JLB 156, 8/20/1880.)

Vincent was clearly not happy with the product in either case: of the first, he writes, "I'd very much like to execute the drawing in question better than I have done"; and of the second, "it's less successful as it stands" (ibid.). These early efforts, or related ones that Vincent did a few months later in Brussels, may be the drawings Van Rappard refers to when he tells Vincent in May 1883, "those very first drawings of yours were good after all, you should do something in that genre again" (JLB 347, 5/30/1883). Exactly which drawings Vincent is referring to is not clear. He refers to two ("Winter Tale," "Shadows passing") that apparently have not survived, unless they are the two sketches that Vincent sent to Theo along with letter JLB 162 (January 1881): En Route (F none JH Juv. 15) and Before the Hearth (F none JH Juv. 16) (JLB 347, n. 3).

Somewhat surprisingly, he admits to Theo that these new compositions represent a return and fulfillment of previous ambitions, not a step forward. "For a few years now I've been toiling solely on the figure in order to get some action and also some structure into it. And precisely because of that toil, I had rather lost my enthusiasm for composing and for making my imagination work once more." (JLB 347, 5/30/1883.) Of course, this may be Vincent's effort to get credit for achieving Theo's goal of more elaboration while at the same time vindicating his previous efforts. Perhaps recognizing the recherché nature of the new (1883) compositions, Vincent tried to frame them to Theo as fulfillments of these much earlier ambitions and therefore signs of pronounced progress. He cast the new drawings as a direct response to Theo's criticisms of the previous ones: " You said at the time that you thought the action of the figures was insufficiently expressed -- do you remember? ... I believe you'll find something of the earliest time in [the new work], but just with more action." (ibid.; emphasis in original.)

But the diggers and haulers that Theo saw in the finished drawings -- awkward caricatures crowded into unnatural tableaux -- all bore a striking resemblance to the single-figure studies that his brother had been turning out for as long as he could remember. Vincent revised at least one of the drawings in response to Theo's criticism of a letter sketch: "I can inform you that my first composition, of which I sent you a croquis, has progressed to a level where it's nearly finished. I did the drawing in charcoal first, then I worked it over with the brush and printer's ink. So there's quite some force in it, and I believe that the second time one looks at it one will be able to find more than one saw the first time." (JLB 348, 6/3/1883.) 

184. Theo urged on him In an effort to vindicate these backward-looking images, Vincent made insistent claims that they were based on extensive new studies in situ (e.g., "The figures have been drawn after painstaking studies" [JLB 348, 6/3/1883]). Here is Vincent's journalistic account that accompanies his group-drawing of scavengers at the town garbage dump ("a splendid sight") in early June: "I did several drawings at a very early hour. One in which one has a view through to a very small, glittering spot of green freshness is likely to be the ultimate one, I think. It's something like the above scratch; everything, including the women in the foreground and the white horse in the background, must be in chiaroscuro against the green patch with a chink of sky above. So that one gets the opposition of all those sombre sheds overlapping each other in perspective, and all that rubbish and those grey figures against something clean and fresh. The group of women and the horse create lighter passages in the tone of the chiaroscuro, and the rag-pickers and the dung-heaps darker areas. In the foreground all kinds of broken and discarded objects, bits of old baskets, a rusty street-light, broken pots &c." (JLB 350, 6/5/1883.)

Shortly thereafter, Vincent reports progress: "I've got as far with the sketch of the dung-heap as more or less getting into it that sheep-shed effect of inside against outside -- the light under the dark sheds -- and the group of women emptying their dustbins is beginning to develop and take shape" (JLB 351, 6/7/1883). "Well, since I last wrote I've slaved away at that drawing of the dung-heap. It's a splendid sight. ... [I] am now working again on that. I have to get up early in the morning, for that's when I see the effects I want. If only I could get it as I have it in my mind." (JLB 352, 6/11/1883.) Vincent did two versions of this image, the second of which was apparently the last of the large, group compositions he made at this time (JLB 355, 6/16/1883). The related surviving drawings are Garbage Dump (F none JH 369) and Garbage Dump (F none JH 370).

We would suggest that there are many other examples. In addition to the ones Hulsker cites, we see direct quotation in Peat Diggers from the following previous studies: Sand Diggers (F 922 JH 114), Digger (F 906 JH 260], Digger (F 907 JH 261), Digger (F 1656 JH 262), Man Carrying Peat (F 964 JH 273), and Scheveningen Woman with Wheeelbarrow (F 1021 JH 362). This suggests that there were many studies in his studio at the time, beyond those that have survived, on which some of the figures in these drawings were surely based. In addition, his sketchbooks were filled with related images, mostly of diggers, going back at least as far as Etten (e.g., Digger [F 859 JH 29], Digger [F 150 JH 30], Digger [F 860 JH 38], Digger and Figure of a Woman [F 150 JH 39], Digger [F 860a JH 42], Digger [F 855 JH 43], Digger [F 866 JH 54], Digger [F 151 JH 55], Torn-Up Street with Diggers [F 930a JH 131], Diggers in Torn-Up Street [F None JH 132], Man Stooping with Stick or Spade [F 12 JH 185], and Woman Digging [F 275 JH 337]). Although these surviving images do not exactly match the figures in the large group scenes from 1883, they suggest the existence of many related drawings, presumably lost, that Vincent may have used in piecing together these artificial aggregations. There is no indication that Vincent did not recreate these same poses, yet again, in his studio in May and June, but the existence of so many precedents does suggest that he may not have undertaken extensive new observation at the worksites sufficient to produce any significant new vocabulary of poses. 

185. These big scenes The only one of the original drawings that survived, Peat Diggers in the Dunes (F 1031 JH 363, May, 1883, charcoal, black mountain chalk, printing ink, 19.7 x 39.4 in., 50 x 100 cm., location unknown) is, for a drawing, huge. The other images described in the text survive mostly as letter sketches (if at all), but Vincent clearly intended all of them to have a similar large scale.  186. digging potatoes BVG 293, 6/13/1883-6/14/1883: Vincent describes the drawing he envisions in astonishing detail: "I would like the landscape to be a flat area and a small line of dunes. The figures just about one foot high, the composition breadthways, 1 to 2. In a corner in the foreground kneeling figures of women gathering up the potatoes as a repoussoir. A row of diggers, men and women, in the background. ... The row of diggers should be just a row of dark shapes at first sight or from a distance, but highly finished and varied in movement and type. For instance, a young, plain fellow opposite one of those really typical old Scheveningers in a white and brown patched suit with an old top hat, one of those matt black ones that they wear low in the neck. For instance, a short, stocky figure of a woman in sober black with a white cap opposite a tall grass-mower in white trousers, light blue smock and straw hat -- a bald crown next to a young woman." (JLB 353, 6/15/1883; emphasis in original.)

The drawing Vincent describes does not survive, apparently because he was waiting until the potato harvest began later, "towards the autumn," to finish it (JLB 353, 6/15/1883). However, he did do some related studies: "I've studied it from close up and have a man who is sticking one of these forks in the ground (the first movement), another who is pulling out the potato plant (the second movement), then a female figure in the same action and a third male figure who is throwing the potatoes into the basket" (JLB 356, 6/22/1883; emphasis in original). In late June, he did a preliminary drawing on a much-reduced scale: "looking for something ... namely the potato grubbers on their knees and working with short forks, about whom I recently wrote to you that I was doing studies for them. I now have a sketch of them on the easel with 4 figures, 3 men and 1 woman" (JLB 357, 6/27/1883). This apparently refers to Potato Grubbers, Four Figures (F 1034 JH 372, June 1883, medium unknown, size unknown, location unknown) and a letter sketch with the same title (Potato Grubbers, Four Figures, F 296 JH 373, June 1883, Van Gogh Museum). 

Context:
JLB 353, 6/15/1883: "Just while I'm doing these studies, a plan for an even larger drawing, namely of the potato-digging, begins to take root in me."

187. hauling coal BVG 293, 6/13/1883-6/14/1883: Vincent reports that "at the place itself I had a fellow who scrambled up the heaps and stood here and there so that I could see the proportion of the figure at various places" (JLB 353, 6/15/1883). No related drawings survive, but there are what seem to be related figures -- oddly placed in the far distance -- in the surviving Peat Diggers in the Dunes (F 1031 JH 363; far left) and Sand Diggers in Dekkersduin near The Hague (F 1029 JH 366; center and right). 

Context:
JLB 353, 6/15/1883: "It's to be a coal-yard on the Rijnspoor site as I see it from the window of the studio. There are heaps of coal and fellows working in them, and people come with small wheelbarrows to buy a sack of coal; trade is very busy some days, and especially in the winter, with the snow it was a charming scene."

188. cutting peat BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "I can inform you that my first composition [Peat Diggers in the Dunes (F 1031 JH 364)], of which I sent you a croquis [JLB 347, 5/30/1883], has progressed to a level where it's nearly finished. I did the drawing in charcoal first, then I worked it over with the brush and printer's ink. So there's quite some force in it, and I believe that the second time one looks at it one will be able to find more than one saw the first time."

189. moving sand BVG 287, 5/30/1883: In late May, Vincent reports: "I went into the dunes with Van der Weele recently. There we found a place where the dunes are being levelled for sand, a fine sight with fellows and wheelbarrows." (JLB 347, 5/30/1883.) He elaborates the story somewhat for Van Rappard: "sometimes there really are a great many fellows toiling away in those sandpits, for example in the winter and the autumn they provide work there in the name of the city for those who have no work. And then it's wonderfully pleasing there." (JLB 354, 6/15/1883.) Apparently within a few days, Vincent has gone to the place in the dunes where the sand diggers are working ("Dekkersduin") and "had plenty of models day in, day out" and finished two drawings of "fellows with wheelbarrows and diggers" (JLB 348, 6/3/1883). Although very little time has elapsed, Vincent claims that "The figures are drawn from extensive studies" (ibid.). Months later, Vincent describes the scene in more detail for Theo after taking this image to show Tersteeg and making a photograph of it: "Long rows of diggers -- poor fellows set to work by the city -- in front of a piece of dune land that's to be dug over" (JLB 363, 7/22/1883). The relevant surviving drawings, both titled Sand Diggers in Dekkersduin near The Hague, are F 1029 (JH 366) and F 1028 (JH 367). 

Context:
JLB 347, 5/30/1883: "I went into the dunes with Van der Weele recently. There we found a place where the dunes are being levelled for sand, a fine sight with fellows and wheelbarrows."

190. about the complication BVG 289, 6/4/1883 or 6/5/1883: "The scene at the dung-heap is splendid but very complicated and difficult, and will be a hard struggle" (JLB 350, 6/5/1883). The thrust of this and many similar descriptions is clearly the "elaborateness" that Theo has repeatedly asked for. In other letters, Vincent is more explicit. Earlier, Vincent wrote, "When you come you must see how those studies for the figures in the foreground of the croquis are solidly worked" (JLB 348, 6/3/1883). And later, "The row of diggers should be just a row of dark shapes at first sight or from a distance, but highly finished and varied in movement and type" (JLB 353, 6/15/1883). He also wrote proudly of the improvement these drawings represent: "I'm certainly starting to feel at home here compared with the beginning, and find what I did here in the beginning very superficial. And the very hope of expressing it more and more powerfully and elaborately means that it seems to me a good time." (JLB 356, 6/22/1883.)

In July, Vincent reiterates that his goal is to make elaborate drawings when he sends Theo a letter sketch of one such drawing with the following note: "I'm also considering having today's gardener done as well, for that figure is much, much more detailed than in this scratch" (JLB 362, 7/13/1883). Vincent also telegraphs to Theo his dedication to elaborateness in the way he decribes the drawings: "The row of diggers should be just a row of dark shapes at first sight or from a distance, but highly finished and varied in movement and type. For instance, a young, plain fellow opposite one of those really typical old Scheveningers in a white and brown patched suit with an old top hat, one of those matt black ones that they wear low in the neck. For instance, a short, stocky figure of a woman in sober black with a white cap opposite a tall grass-mower in white trousers, light blue smock and straw hat -- a bald crown next to a young woman." (JLB 353, 6/15/1883.)

Whether Vincent has genuinely dedicated himself to greater elaboration or is just attempting to accommodate Theo is a difficult question. The following passage from a letter to Van Rappard suggests that Vincent's concessions on the issue may have arisen more from appeasement than from conviction: "I even do my best not to give any details THEN -- because then the reverie goes out of it. If Tersteeg and my brother &c. then say: so what's that, grass or cabbages? -- I say: glad YOU can't make it out." (JLB 437, 3/13/1884; emphasis in original.) In an earlier letter to Van Rappard, Vincent wrote, "Now I want to continue with those [large group drawings] I'm working on to get them to the same level, if possible, by the time my brother comes" (JLB 354, 6/15/1883). 

Context:
JLB 350, 6/5/1883: "The scene at the dung-heap is splendid but very complicated and difficult, and will be a hard struggle."

191. variety of these images BVG 293, 6/13/1883-6/14/1883: Vincent is referring to variety within the image, not between images. 

Context:
JLB 353, 6/15/1883: "The row of diggers should be just a row of dark shapes at first sight or from a distance, but highly finished and varied in movement and type."

192. "[They] will please you" BVG 287, 5/30/1883. 

Context:
BVG 287, 5/30/1883: "I hope that when this is finished, you will not mind taking it with you some day to show to the illustration people, and that such a thing will please you more than those single studies."
JLB 347, 5/30/1883: "I believe you may not be opposed to taking this one when it's finished to show to the people at the illustrated magazines. And will take greater pleasure from something like this than from separate studies."

193. "probably before your arrival" BVG 290, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
BVG 290, 6/3/1883: "And also, I should like so very much to wash on Torchon again, probably before your arrival too. For you must not suppose that I have dismissed the idea of doing watercolours or painting."
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "I should like so very much to wash on Torchon again, probably before your arrival too. For you must not suppose that I have dismissed the idea of doing watercolors or painting."

194. his rarely used paint box Vincent's relationship with watercolor during this period is a saga of disappointment, delay, and dissembling. After the failed effort to make watercolors of group scenes in September 1882, Vincent tried the medium only rarely, as in Women Miners (F 994 JH 253) in November (JLB 280, 11/5/1882). On those few occasions when he bent to the wishes of Theo and others and attempted a watercolor, the results were inevitably disappointing. About Meadows near Rijswijk (F 927 JH 161), "a watercolour sketch ... of diggers, or rather road-menders, here in Schenkweg," he wrote bluntly, "it's no good" (JLB 306, 2/3/1883). Obviously to placate Theo, he continued to express enthusiasm for the medium. "I wanted to get something from my studies for watercolours," he wrote after the February failure, "but that's not working at all well at the moment" (JLB 308, 2/5/1883).

In March, under pressure to justify the expenses of the changes in the studio, Vincent argued that the more modulated light provided by the new shutters would be ideal for watercolor ("the studio is now infinitely more suitable for colour" [JLB 324, 3/4/1883]). At the same time, in response to a specific prompting from Theo ("I didn't want to answer your question about watercolour in words alone" [JLB 322, 3/2/1883]), Vincent sent his brother a watercolor accompanied by a torrent of explanation and excuse. Although it was an old one, not one recently done, Vincent claimed that it proved that "I see things in strong colours" (ibid.). (He dismissed his more recent efforts as "various failures" [ibid.; emphasis in original].) He boldly re-pledged himself to his brother's preferred medium: "I like watercolour enough never to abandon it completely, I mess about with it constantly," but used the weather as an excuse for yet another delay: "Spring is coming and I'd like to do some painting again. So that is in part why I'm not watercolouring at the moment." (ibid.)

He explained his on-again, off-again watercolor efforts as a deliberate strategy. "When I've been drawing for a month I do a few watercolours, for instance, by way of throwing out the sounding lead" (ibid.). Yet, in the same letter, he couldn't resist lobbying his brother against the intractable medium: "It's not pleasant to do sketches like the enclosed ... I hate this so much myself that I do them very rarely, purely to see whether I've found this or that and how far I've got." (ibid.) Still, in the very next letter, he offered a "plan for a new watercolour," arguing again that the improved light in the studio inspired him to express himself in color and mustering yet another facsimile of enthusiasm: "I hope to reach a higher standard with this one than in the one I sent. Shall I succeed??? I can't tell in advance." (JLB 323, 3/3/1883.) The next day, he did, indeed, begin a watercolor of three figures (a boy, a girl, and a woman) in his studio "soup distribution" (JLB 324, 3/4/1883). But the effort ended in failure as the "watercolour became too unclear" (ibid.).

He attributed this latest failure to unsuitable paper, but could not avoid the larger implications: "This drawing therefore leaves the question of watercolour where it was" (ibid.). The next day, he confided to Van Rappard, "I'll concentrate more and more on Black and White" (JLB 325, 3/5/1883), claiming the reason was the expenses, not the failures. To Theo, however, he continued to express enthusiasm, assuring him that he, Vincent, intended to use some extra money "to get everything back in order for watercolours" (JLB 327, 3/11/1883). But his very next effort, in mid-March, again ended in disappointment. "I don't think it lively or vigorous enough," he told Theo, substituting a letter sketch for the image itself (JLB 330, 3/18/1883). He does not try watercolor again until mid-May after a visit to Van Rappard's studio where he sees many successful examples ("outstanding in sentiment, highly original" [JLB 344, 5/21/1883]). But the effort once again leaves him pleading: "Ah, Theo. I'll get the hang of watercolour one day or another" (JLB 343, 5/20/1883). 

195. "a few watercolors" BVG 299, 7/11/1883. (We have slightly altered the translation.) Almost at the same time he is dutifully re-pledging his interest in watercolor in letters to Theo, Vincent is scorning the medium in letters to Van Rappard: "And so it is that these days watercolour is the order of the day and considered to be the most expressive medium, and in my view too little effort goes into Black and White, to the point even that there's a certain antipathy to it" (JLB 354, 6/15/1883). 

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: " By way of a change did a few watercolours again in the countryside recently, a little cornfield and a bit of a potato field."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: " Of late I've done a few watercolours outdoors again for a change, a cornfield and a bit of a potato field."

196. "when we shall decide" BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "Though, after our last letters, I think less about the future than about the present, and I still hope that when you come we shall decide that I shall make a number of small watercolours for you, and perhaps some small oil paintings, just as an experiment."
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "When, since our recent letters, I reflect less on the future than on the more or less present, I still have hopes that when you come we'll take the decision that I should do a number of small watercolours for you just to try it out, and perhaps smaller paintings."

197. splendid things to paint BVG 292, 6/10/1883. 

Context:
BVG 292, 6/10/1883: "But that light effect is really there because the light falls from overhead between the sheds on the figures in the pathways. It would be a splendid thing to paint."
JLB 352, 6/11/1883: "Yet that light effect really is there, since the light falls from above between the sheds onto the figures that are on the paths. It would be a splendid sight to paint."

198. "just in the mood" BVG 299, 7/11/1883. 

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "I must earn a bit of money so that I can start something new and also do some painting, as I am just in the mood for it now."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "I must try to earn a little so that I can make a start on something new and do some painting too, for I'm just in the mood for that."

199. doing some landscapes BVG 308, 8/2/1883. 

Context:
JLB 370, 8/3/1883: "But otherwise, as I've already written to you briefly, I'm outdoors a great deal, looking and doing landscape studies or seascape studies to have a distraction from the figure for once, and feel fine doing that."

200. sketching trips to the country BVG 299, 7/11/1883. 

Context:
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "Of late I've done a few watercolours outdoors again for a change, a cornfield and a bit of a potato field."

201. to the beach at Scheveningen BVG 308, 8/2/1883: We assume Vincent's reference to "seascape studies" means he has painted the sea from the dunes at Scheveningen or nearby (JLB 370, 8/3/1883). 

Context:
JLB 370, 8/3/1883: "I'm outdoors a great deal, looking and doing landscape studies or seascape studies to have a distraction from the figure for once, and feel fine doing that."

202. he painted a potato field

BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883: Vincent writes in early July: "this week I did a few landscape studies as well, one yesterday at De Bock's [Théophile Emile Achille de Bock, 1851-1904; Dutch artist], a potato field in the dunes" (JLB 360, 7/7/1883). We believe this is Potato Field in the Dunes (F 1037 JH 390, July-August, 1883, brush, ink, heightened with white, 10.8 x 16.5 in., 27.5 x 42 cm., Otterlo, Kröller-Müller Museum). For unknown reasons, Hulsker (The New Complete Van Gogh, p. 92) dates this work to "August 1883?" in the caption, but in the text (p. 88) links it to the reference in letter JLB 360 from early July. 

Context:
JLB 360, 7/7/1883: "To give an example, this week I did a few landscape studies as well, one yesterday at De Bock's, a potato field in the dunes; the day before a spot under the chestnut trees; another, a yard with heaps of coal."

203. a hasty sketch Path to the Beach, F none JH 382, July 1883, sketch in letter JLB 369, Van Gogh Museum.  204. "tangled by the sea wind" BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883. 

Context:
BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "Between the village and the beach are bushes of a deep bronzed green, tangled by the sea wind, and so striking that more than once one thinks, oh, now that's the 'Buisson' by Ruysdael."
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "Well, there between the village and the sea stand bushes of a deep, bronze-like green blown about by the sea wind, and so real that more than one makes one think: Oh, now this is Ruisdael's Bush."

205. "scratch" BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: Vincent uses the Dutch word krabbel ("scratch") when referring to his letter sketches. 

Context:
BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "This is a scratch of the path to the beach."
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "See, this is a scratch of the path to the sea."

206. plans to stockpile paint BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: Vincent starts by trying to get Theo to buy him paints more cheaply in Paris with this elaborate scheme: "Wouldn't it be possible for you to get hold of paint from Paillard [Jacques Michel Paillard, seller of artists' supplies in Paris] or someone like that in a certain quantity at the net price first hand, thus from the maker himself? That would certainly be a step closer to having no lack of paint. And I'd be very glad if we could make an arrangement whereby you held back, say, 10 francs each time you sent. That makes 30 francs a month, 90 every three months, and I wouldn't bother you for a few tubes each time but, if I had the net price list, say what was needed for 3 months." (JLB 366, 7/24/1883; emphasis in original.) Of course, Theo never deducted any of the money he spent on the paper he sent Vincent from his allowance, so one can only assume that Vincent expects his brother to be equally generous with paint supplies, especially since he has been pushing Vincent to do more painting. In that light, this plan can be seen as a backhanded way of using Theo's advocacy of painting to leverage more money out of him.

When Theo does not respond to this scheme, Vincent proposes a different one, equally elaborate: "You know that I give lessons to a surveyor [Antoine Philippe Furnée. Well, his father [Hendrik Jan Furnée] is a chemist and deals in paints; he's a stockist for Paillard, and supplies Mauve among others. I've never had anything for teaching the son, but the father has often expressed his readiness to help. I took him up on this and said the following to him. That I had no doubt that there must be a fair number of tubes in his stock that were no longer in demand. That I could use them even so, and that I would take them from him for Paillard's net price, on condition that in future he also supplied me with the saleable tubes on the same terms. At first he raised objections, but then he took another look at his stock and I reached an agreement with him along the above lines. I'm taking nearly 300 tubes from him, including several carmine and ultramarine, for instance, for less (10 guilders off the whole lot, which would cost over 50 guilders at Paillard's net price) than Paillard's NET price, so the 300 tubes will cost me 40 guilders. For which I also gain the right to order all the paint I need in future for Paillard's net price, thus saving 33 1/3 %. And I get that discount of 33 1/3 not only on oil paints but on watercolours too." (JLB 369, 7/29/1883 - 7/30/1883; emphasis in original.) As it turns out, most of this paint was bought on credit and Vincent never did pay the bill before leaving The Hague. Furnée continues to dun him for it in Drenthe and Nuenen. 

Context:
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "I would take them from him for Paillard's net price, on condition that in future he also supplied me with the saleable tubes on the same terms. At first he raised objections, but then he took another look at his stock and I reached an agreement with him along the above lines. I'm taking nearly 300 tubes from him."

207. rehung his studio BVG 301, 7/22/1883: It appears that, as of July 22, Vincent had not done any painted studies since the previous summer: "Painting [the previous summer] helped me indirectly with my drawing during the winter months and the spring, and I worked that up right until these recent drawings. Now, though, I feel it would be good to paint again for a while, and I need that to become richer in tone, in the drawings too." (JLB 363, 7/22/1883; emphasis added.) 

Context:
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "Now that I was doing it again I took more pleasure in things from last year, and have hung painted things in the studio again. ... As you know, last summer I painted -- now I've hung up several studies again, because when I was doing new ones I saw that there was something in them after all."

208. "It struck me there" BVG 301, 7/22/1883. 

Context:
BVG 301, 7/22/1883: "You know I painted last summer -- I have hung several of these studies on the walls again, because while making new ones, it struck me there was something in them after all."
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "As you know, last summer I painted -- now I've hung up several studies again, because when I was doing new ones I saw that there was something in them after all."

209. from one a week JLB 334 (4/2/1883) to JLB 338 (4/30/1883), inclusive except for one letter to Van Rappard. We are not counting JLB 333 (on or about 3/29/1883 and 4/1/1883), which Vincent wrote at the end of March, but held over to add a postscript on April 1. Counting JLB 333, Vincent his brother wrote eight letters in March, four of them in the first week of the month as he tried frantically to persuade Theo of the advantages of his costly changes to the studio. By July, he was writing about three letters a week (JLB 358 to JLB 369, inclusive except for a letter to Van Rappard). Many of the letters are not precisely dated. Nevertheless, it appears that they did not spread out evenly over the month, but rather came in spurts, as in the beginning of July, when six letters seem to have been written in a single week.  210. to one a day JLB 363 (7/22/1883) to JLB 369 (7/29/1883-7/30/1883), inclusive.  211. frame his meager images BVG 306, 7/27/1883: This is Vincent's own characterization (see context). It is another of Vincent's strategies for controlling Theo's expectations and muting his criticism: to denigrate his own art so harshly and unmitigatedly that he pre-empts his brother's negativism and forces Theo to adopt a more moderate (and thus, by comparison, positive) position. 

Context:
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "For it's a fact that at present ALL my work is TOO MEAGRE AND TOO DRY" (emphasis in original).

212. in gilded rhetoric BVG 306, 7/27/1883: Vincent compared his figure drawing to the fiery work of the smithy ("it's the same as with iron -- one works on a model and carries on working on it, it's difficult in the beginning but eventually it becomes more pliant, and one finds the figure just as iron becomes malleable when it's red-hot" [JLB 348, 6/3/1883]), as well as to the patient labor of the coal miner ("We mustn't doubt but avoir la foi de charbonnier [have collier's faith]" [JLB 368, 7/27/1883]). The expression la foi de charbonnier was (and is) an expression used to describe any simple faith, not just among colliers (coal miners). 

Context:
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "For it's a fact that at present ALL my work is TOO MEAGRE AND TOO DRY. That has become crystal clear to me recently, and I don't doubt for a moment that a general, thorough change is needed. I plan to consult you again, when you've seen this year's work, as to whether you agree with me about a few measures, and if you do then I think we'll succeed in getting back on our feet. We mustn't doubt but have collier's faith." (Emphasis in original.)

213. "A revolution has taken place" BVG 293, 6/13/1883-6/14/1883. 

Context:
BVG 293, 6/13/1883-6/14/1883: "As you know, I had repressed my desire to make compositions for a long time, and in that respect a revolution has taken place in me now because the time was ripe for it, and I breathe more freely now that I have loosened the reins which I had put on myself."
JLB 353, 6/15/1883: "I had long restrained myself from composing, as you know, and in that respect a revolution has now come about in me because it was time it came, and I breathe more freely now that I've slightly slackened the rein I had imposed on myself."

339 214. a few models BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "If I could take a model more often, I could do them far, far better. So, old chap, as for my not needing you one time, I need it more than ever, but I would point out the opportunity we have if we persevere."

215. a few sketches BVG 290, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "I have hopes of making good progress because I'm getting some results with the lithographic crayon &c. that are stronger and better than the earlier drawings. Just a little further and I believe they'll be able and willing to use me for illustration work of one kind or another."

216. "something broad and audacious" BVG 296, 6/23/1883-6/28/1883. 

Context:
BVG 296, 6/23/1883-6/28/1883: "I want something broad and audacious, with silhouette and relief in it. That is what I am seeking more and more."
JLB 357, 6/27/1883: "I wanted to have something broad and bold in silhouette and delineation in it. I'm searching for that more and more."

217. something comforting BVG 287, 5/30/1883. 

Context:
BVG 287, 5/30/1883: "I want so much to make something comforting, something that makes one think."
JLB 347, 5/30/1883: "I feel such a need to make something pleasing, something that makes one think."

218. "the moment" BVG 308, 8/2/1883. 

Context:
BVG 308, 8/2/1883: "You are right in saying that what I wrote you about the finances weighs on your mind, but on the other hand, we cannot now be far from the moment when I shall make something that is saleable, even if it be for a small price."
JLB 370, 8/3/1883: "You rightly say that what I wrote to you about financial matters is worrying, but on the other hand we can't be far from making a thing or two that can be sold, even if for relatively little."

219. close at hand BVG 290, 6/3/1883: Saying "one can't help having 'visions of the future,'" he laid plans for the success that would inevitably follow (JLB 349, 6/3/1883). He argued that only a double-page spread in a magazine could do justice to his art: "I would dare, I believe, to undertake to supply about 1 large drawing each month for a double-page engraving, ... I know that they can reproduce large and small, but the double page lends itself better to what is done broadly." (JLB 348, 6/3/1883.) Elsewhere in the same letter, Vincent mulls the relative merits of salaried work and piece work: "I'd like to work towards being PERMANENTLY employed for a monthly wage rather than selling a drawing now and again for a relatively higher sum. And commit myself to a series of compositions." (ibid.; emphasis in original.) He tells Theo that he thinks it "advisable" that he go to London "to look up the managers of the various organizations, or preferably the draughtsmen Herkomer, Green, Boughton," and imagines that they will be suitably impressed with him: "Now I believe that it isn't every day that the managers of illustrated magazines find someone who regards those magazines as his special goal" (ibid.). At a time when he has yet to sell anything to anybody at any price (except, arguably, to his Uncle Cor), he rejects certain London dealers because they did not pay enough. "I also thought that these drawings might perhaps be something for Cottier. ... But you know how it is with Cottier: if there's a certain degree of style in a drawing, he'll be enthusiastic all right, but alas he usually pays little." (JLB 350, 6/5/1883.) The reference is to Daniel Cottier, a Scottish art dealer, whose principal gallery was the one at 8 Pall Mall in London that Vincent had visited in October 1876 (JLB 93, 10/7/1876-10/8/1876). By this time, Cottier also had galleries in New York and Sydney (Fowle, p. 15).

Later in the same passage, Vincent suggests that Theo show his drawings to "friend Wisselingh sometime, ... For supposing he thought they were suitable for this purpose, it might be possible to come to an arrangement with him for more." (ibid.) Elbert Jan van Wisselingh, son of a prominent Amsterdam dealer, had worked with Vincent at Goupil in Paris before joining Cottier's gallery in London, where Vincent visited him also in 1876. In February 1882, Wisselingh had sent Vincent "regards" from London (JLB 206, 2/25/1882). Later that year, he returned to Paris and opened a gallery at 52, rue Laffitte, not far from Theo's gallery on the boulevard Montmartre (Nonne, p. 41). The move came as a surprise to Vincent when Theo wrote that he had seen Wisselingh in March 1883: "I'm pleased that you've spoken to friend Wisselingh -- so he's come back to Paris -- still in Cottier's firm?" (JLB 331, 3/21/1883). Finally, citing his latest group drawings as evidence of his "ability and energy" for illustration (JLB 327, 3/11/1883), he revived the grand plan for a book of lithographs: "although I no longer talk so much about that plan of figures of workmen for lithography, I've borne it in mind all the time" (JLB 333, 3/29/1883 and 4/1/1883). Actually, Vincent revives this plan twice in 1883: first in March and again in May, suggesting that, in his mind, it never died.

In March, he reports a chance encounter with an unidentified printer at Jos. Smulders & Co and puts his ambitions in the printer's mouth: "he asked me on the street whether I was going to do some more [lithographs]. ... It often seems to me that something that would have a raison d'être could be made from figures of workmen." (ibid.; emphasis in original.) Apparently reluctant to renew a direct campaign so soon after the recent failure, he waxes poetic to Theo about the lithographic process: "I've always thought printing a miracle, the kind of miracle by which a grain of wheat becomes an ear. An everyday miracle -- all the greater because it's everyday. One sows a single drawing on the stone or in the etching plate and one reaps a multitude." (ibid.) But his ultimate purpose is unmistakable: "Can you understand that it's something I think about a great deal while at work, and that I have a great love of it?" (ibid.). He explicitly disavows any current intention to pursue the plan, however, saying that he wants to work on improving "the quality of the seed (namely the drawings themselves). ... I haven't got any further with making a final plan, since I find the execution of it more interesting." (ibid.)

In early May, however, the plan re-emerges, again indirectly: "I saw with great interest a publication, Le Salon 1883, a first issue of a series of illustrations, some deuced good. Done with that new way of reproduction. I've subscribed to it, although I have enough expenses, with a view to what I'm doing myself at present with the printer's ink and lithographic crayon. Listen, I definitely believe that some of my things would do well if reproduced in that way." (JLB 342, 5/10/1883.) In the same letter, he asks Theo to convey some questions about the reproductive method to the Paris printer Buhot: "perhaps I'll write down a detailed statement of several matters about which I need information, and you could take some of my studies together with that to show to Buhot, for instance, who would then probably shed light on a few things for me" (ibid). The large group drawings of the summer give Vincent the confidence to push openly to revive the project. Referring to the studies (e.g., Sand Diggers in Dekkersduin near The Hague [F 1029 JH 366] and Sand Diggers in Dekkersduin near The Hague [F 1028 JH 367]) he did for the second of the studies in this series (an unknown drawing Vincent describes as "similar" to Peat Diggers in the Dunes [F 1031 JH 363]), Vincent writes, "I would very much like them to be reproduced" (JLB 348, 6/3/1883). 

Context:
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "One can't help having 'visions of the future.' Even if one is convinced that nothing can be foreseen with certainty or sufficient accuracy. Yet what you wrote to me today could have a great influence on my future."

220. "people will alter" BVG 308, 8/2/1883: We use the word "confidently" because Vincent prefaces his prediction: "It would greatly surprise me if ..." (JLB 370, 8/3/1883). We have slightly altered the translation to conform to the construction in the text. 

Context:
BVG 308, 8/2/1883: "I should be very astonished if, in the long run, some people did not alter their opinion about my doing or planning absurd things."
JLB 370, 8/3/1883: "It would greatly surprise me if some didn't finally begin to give up the idea that I intend or am doing something absurd."

221. "I don't care" BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
BVG 288, 6/3/1883: "The work is an absolute necessity for me. I can't put it off, I don't care for anything but the work; that is to say, the pleasure in something else ceases at once and I become melancholy when I can't go on with my work."
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "For me work is an absolute necessity, indeed I can't really drag it out, I take no more pleasure in anything than in work, that's to say, pleasure in other things stops immediately and I become melancholy if I can't get on with the work."

222. "makes me sorry" BVG 302, 7/22/1883: In July, Vincent reports a severe attack of melancholy over his prospects as the result of a discouraging letter from Theo (see context; we have slightly altered the translation to fit the construction in the text.) It is impossible to know to what extent Vincent is feeling the anguish expressed here and to what extent he is trying to insulate himself from the harsh judgment that he fears from Theo's visit (and thereby to ensure the continued flow of money). The rest of the paragraph suggests the latter: "For I'm just a burden to you and I can't help it, for one must go through many periods to become good, and in the meantime what one produces isn't bad because of that if one does one's best, but there ought to be people who viewed it in its context and direction and aim, and didn't make demands" (JLB 364, 7/22/1883).

This passage contains familiar themes of self-justification ("I can't help it") as well as pleas for patience ("one must go through many periods") and for lowered demands ("didn't make demands"). Yet beneath the manipulative hyperbole, the passage also rings with genuine pathos ("I'm just a burden to you"). In fact, both readings are probably correct. Moreover, the inquiry may be misguided in that it implies that Vincent's mixed motivations somehow dilute the pain and pity of his dilemma. We think the reverse is true. Vincent surely recognized that his dependence on Theo rendered his pleas suspect, and he probably suspected them himself. What more agonizing fate could there be for a man with only one friend in the world than to doubt the authenticity of that friendship? 

Context:
BVG 302, 7/22/1883: "And now I thought, I am sorry that I didn't fall ill and die in the Borinage that time, instead of taking up painting, for I am only a burden to you."
JLB 364, 7/22/1883: "Now I thought that I was sorry that I didn't get ill and give up the ghost somewhere in the Borinage years ago instead of painting. For I'm just a burden to you ..."

223. socializing BVG 314, 8/19/1883: Speaking of success, Vincent writes in August, "Perhaps sooner when one works on quietly than when one goes and asks him or visits him, which with me has less chance of success because of one or two eccentricities that you feel I have more than I do. For I do see something of that, but not that it's so bad that I ought not to be surprised at times at the long duration of difficulties in finding some trust among people." (JLB 376, 8/19/1883; emphasis in original.)  224. friendly encounters with dealersBVG 295, 6/22/1883: Vincent had an extended encounter with his old friend and former co-worker, Teunis van Iterson, in The Hague (see Ch. 5, n. 133). Because Vincent relates some comments of Itersons's about Vincent's work, either Iterson visited Vincent's studio or, more likely, Iterson was present in June when Vincent brought some of his art to show Tersteeg at Goupil's (JLB 356, 6/22/1883). Vincent's opinion of Iterson appears to have soured since they worked together: "There's one thing that gives me hope that there was some character in [my] large sketch [probably a drawing related to Peat Diggers in the Dunes (F 1031 JH 363)], namely that Iterson commented that various things 'bothered' him and that he thought them 'unfortunate.' You can just imagine Iterson, with a friendly-looking, wise-like face, with his head a little to one side and expressing his feeling gently and sweetly with a certain undulating weightiness. I was rather entertained by his observations." (ibid.) As in his pursuit of Kee Vos, Vincent finds contrarian cause for hope in the negative reactions of people he disdains. 

Context:
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "You can just imagine Iterson, with a friendly-looking, wise-like face, with his head a little to one side and expressing his feeling gently and sweetly with a certain undulating weightiness. I was rather entertained by his observations."

225. and other artists BVG 295, 6/22/1883: Vincent mentions seeing "Eerelman, the painter" at the same time he saw Iterson, presumably at Goupil when he visited Tersteeg (JLB 356, 6/22/1883). The reference is to Otto Eerelman, a modestly successful painter, draftsman, and watercolorist of history scenes and genre pictures. Vincent is as defensively dismissive of Eerelman's negative opinion of his sketch as he is of Iterson's: "Eerelman ... was more or less in agreement with Iterson, which seemed to me entirely understandable." Vincent also mentions Willem Nicolaas Lantsheer at this time as someone he considered showing his work to. "Do you still remember people from your time in The Hague to whom you think I could show something? For my part I can't remember any except for one, and that is Lantsheer, but for him it must be very, very beautiful, and because I hope to sell something to him later I would rather not present anything now." (ibid.; emphasis in original.) 

Context:
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "Eerelman, the painter, was also there and was more or less in agreement with Iterson, which seemed to me entirely understandable."

340 226. called on Bernard BlommersBVG 299, 7/11/1883: The nature and circumstances of Vincent's encounters with Johannes Blommers in Scheveningen are unclear. He may have seen the thirty-eight-year-old Blommers for the first time that summer when he visited De Bock's in early July (JLB 360, 7/7/1883). Blommers's house, the Villa Johanna, was very close to De Bock's. Less than a week after that visit, De Bock visited Vincent's studio and Vincent writes, "I also hope to go and see Blommers again soon" (JLB 361, 7/11/1883; emphasis added). This could, however, be a reference all the way back to April 1882 when Vincent last reported a visit to Blommers's studio (JLB 217, 4/14/1882). Vincent is obviously aware of the proximity of Blommers to De Bock, as he writes Vincent in July, "I've confirmed with De Bock that I'll have a pied-à-terre at his place. I may also drop in on Blommers now and again." (JLB 362, 7/13/1883.) By July 22, Vincent reports that "I've seen and spoken to Blommers twice already in Scheveningen." Yet the phrasing appears to indicate that he has not yet been to Blommers's house: "he saw a few things of mine and asked me to call on him sometime" (JLB 363, 7/22/1883). The nature of the references and the fact that Vincent says Blommers "saw a few things of mine," suggests that their interactions were more than chance encounters in the dunes or on the streets of Scheveningen.

Context:
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: “I also hope to go and see Blommers again soon.”
227. "He wants me" BVG 303, 7/23/1883. 

Context:
BVG303, 7/23/1883: "Now I have spoken to Blommers about my painting -- he wants me to keep it up; personally I also feel that having finished those last ten or twelve large drawings, I have reached a point where I must change my course instead of making more in the same way."
JLB 365, 7/23/1883: "I've talked to Blommers about painting. He wants me to carry on; I myself also feel that after having done these 10 or 12 large drawings I'm now at a point where I must change my manner rather than do more in the same vein."

228. He also paid a visit BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883: Vincent explains the visit to De Bock in this vague and evasive way: "If you're like me you sometimes have a sudden desire to look up someone you haven't seen in a long time" (JLB 360, 7/7/1883). The real motivation for the visit becomes apparent in Vincent's report afterward: "I hope that, taking a turn now with Bock, I'll be able to get on with him; it could do both of us no harm, and perhaps we can learn from each other" (JLB 360, 7/7/1883). He went to assuage Theo's concerns (family concerns) about Vincent's tendency to isolation and his chronic reluctance to mingle in appropriate social circles. "He [De Bock] asked after you warmly, and I said you'd probably visit him this summer" (ibid.). Yet, for all the glowing reports and earnest promises, Vincent's only regular companion on his frequent beach walks that summer was a young peasant boy that he paid to pose for him: "A superb grass-mower, a splendid country lad, exactly like one of Millet's figures" (JLB 354, 6/15/1883). We believe this is the same "country lad" that Vincent describes to Theo a few weeks later: "I have a model -- a country lad -- who lives here in the neighbourhood" (JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883). Vincent took his young model "off into the country with me, ... into the dunes" (ibid.) ... "in the early morning or in the evening towards dusk" (JLB 370, 8/3/1883), no doubt replaying past adventures with his real frère cadet -- and rehearsing their imminent reunion as he wished it would be. 

Context:
JLB 360, 7/7/1883: "If you're like me you sometimes have a sudden desire to look up someone you haven't seen in a long time. This is what happened to me with De Bock, and I wanted to write to you about what I saw at his place."

229. just off the road Van der Mast and Dumas, p. 59: According to Van der Mast and Dumas, De Bock's house was at 9 Kanaalweg, which would put it very near the corner of Kanaalweg and Scheveningseweg, less than two kilometers from the ocean. De Bock's studio, however, was not in his house but nearby in "a neo-gothic little building ... in the garden of Villa Germania," which was at 20 Van Stolkweg (now 22). We are assuming that Vincent's "pied-à-terre" was in the house on Kanaalweg. [Eugène] Fromentin's description of the road to Scheveningen is too good not to quote at length: "The road [Scheveningsweg] is a long narrow shaded avenue, leading in a straight line through the heart of the woods. It is cool and dark, whatever may be the warmth of the sky and the blue of the atmosphere. The sun leaves you at the beginning and meets you at the end. The exit is upon the rear of the downs -- a vast wavy desert, sparsely sown with thin grass and sand, such as are found at the edge of great beaches. ... The sea is on the right; the terraced downs grow dark upon the left, taper, grow small, and softly melt into the pallid horizon. The grass is dry, the downs are pale, the beach colorless, the sea milky, the sky silky, cloudy, wonderfully aerial, well drawn, well modelled, and well painted, as they used to paint it in old times." (Fromentin, pp. 119-120.) 230. from The Hague to Scheveningen Fromentin, pp. 119-120.  231. "pretty" BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883. 

Context:
BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883: "Then there were some pictures more 'blondly' brushed, several pretty studies."
JLB 360, 7/7/1883: "There were also a few paintings with blonder accents, various pleasing studies."

232. "blondly brushed" BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883. 

Context:
BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883: "Then there were some pictures more 'blondly' brushed, several pretty studies."
JLB 360, 7/7/1883: "There were also a few paintings with blonder accents, various pleasing studies."

233. retreated somewhat In typical fashion, Vincent makes concessions with one hand and takes them back with the other. After writing that he finds De Bock's work "energetically tackled, and there was a fine, forceful effect ... something that one always sees with pleasure," he offers this further, qualifying thought: "I thought some sketches maturer and more correct in tone and colour than last year, and the grounds firmer. But in my view too much of the relative proportions of the planes and masses is still left vague" (JLB 306, 2/3/1883). He then cites the usual nostalgic litany of giants ("Corot, and Rousseau and Diaz, Daubigny, Dupré") to support his reservations and cannot resist framing his compliments of De Bock in this larger, unchanged critique: "There are very spirited things in De Bock's work, though, and one would view it with more pleasure if the way things stand in their place was less visionary. He ought to be rather more of a realist and then his work would be more brilliant." (ibid.) In summary, the best Vincent can offer is this determinedly neutral assessment: "Anyway, you know all about that, again my impression of him is that he has most certainly not gone downhill" (ibid.).  234. "I don't mind" BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883: "The first thing I saw in the hall was a large sketch -- an enormous windmill covered with snow, near a kind of ditch or canal. Half romantic, half realistic -- a combination of styles which I don't dislike. But far from finished -- though energetically put down with a fine, strong effect in it. In short, a thing one would always look at with pleasure, and I don't mind it's being unfinished. I should like that thing of his just as it is, in my studio, because it is so impressive."
JLB 360, 7/7/1883: "The first thing I saw there in the hall was a large sketch -- an enormous windmill, entirely covered in snow, beside a kind of canal or waterway. Half romantic, half realistic -- a combination of styles I find not unsympathetic. But it was far from finished -- but energetically tackled, and there was a fine, forceful effect in it. Anyway, something that one always sees with pleasure, and it doesn't bother me that it isn't finished -- I'd like to have that piece by him hanging in my studio just as it is, because it's so expressive."

235. house as a pied-à-terre BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883: Despite his financial plight, Vincent had already openly discussed taking a studio in Scheveningen only to be dismayed by the high price of rentals. "If it was a question of going to live by the sea, Scheveningen wouldn't be possible and one would have to go further away, Hook of Holland, say, or Marken" (JLB 360, 7/7/1883). The arrangement with De Bock presented a cheaper alternative. The idea was apparently triggered when De Bock told Vincent that he was thinking of moving but had rented the house "until May" (presumably May 1884). (ibid.) About a week after Vincent related the plan to Theo, De Bock visited Vincent's studio and Vincent secured his agreement. "Well, I've spoken to De Bock again and I can leave my stuff with him when I go to do studies in Scheveningen" (JLB 361, 7/11/1883).

The question arises as to why De Bock, who had often been the butt of Vincent's defensive criticisms and no doubt joined other Hague artists in shunning Vincent for his dress and behavior, should suddenly be so solicitous of Vincent. We do not accept the explanation often inferred from Vincent's rosy account that the two men shared common artistic ground. Their lifestyles, their interests, their ambitions, and their work could not have been more different (as Vincent makes clear). We think it more likely that De Bock's generosity to Vincent was designed to curry Theo's favor. De Bock's submission to the 1883 Paris Salon (A Ferryboat in Holland) had received mixed reviews and failed to sell (JLB 360, 7/7/1883). Probably unconsciously, Vincent seems to acknowledge this connection when he writes Theo, "[De Bock] asked after you warmly, and I said you'd probably visit him this summer. His big painting in the Salon not sold of course." (ibid.; emphasis in original.) 


Context:
BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883: "But now I think I will ask De Bock to let me have a corner of his garret as a pied-à-terre, and to keep my drawing material there, so that I needn't drag it along every time.”
JLB 360, 7/7/1883: "I'm thinking of asking De Bock to let me have a corner of his attic as a pied-à-terre and then leaving my equipment there so that I don't need to lug it around."

236. trips to the beach BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883. 


Context:
JLB 360, 7/7/1883: "I'm thinking of asking De Bock to let me have a corner of his attic as a pied-à-terre and then leaving my equipment there so that I don't need to lug it around. If one arrives tired (if one didn't need to work immediately that slight fatigue wouldn't matter, of course), the work is sometimes weak and the hand is none too steady. One is just hot and tired enough to be bothered by it."

237. a virtual guarantee BVG 298, 7/6/1883-7/8/1883. As if to prove the point, Vincent reports in the very same letter that he found "splendid potato fields in the dunes behind the lighthouse" near De Bock's house (JLB 360, 7/7/1883). 


Context:
JLB 360, 7/7/1883: "So that pied-à-terre at De Bock's and taking the tram more often might perhaps be enough to be able to do something with the sea and Scheveningen after all, more seriously than I've done so far. ... I think it will work out, to be at Scheveningen often this autumn with a pied-à-terre at his place. We'll see -- but I yearn very much to do something with the beach."

238. He sent Uncle Cor BVG 290, 6/3/1883: This about-face was not done without complaint. Vincent made no secret of his resentment at having to go hat-in-hand, yet again, to his uncle. 


Context:
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "And for my part, to lighten your burden, I wrote to C.M. (although I took no pleasure in that, I assure you) and wanted to ask you, could you perhaps write a word to Tersteeg telling him that I'm working on those large drawings."

239. two of his group drawings

BVG 289, 6/4/1883-6/5/1883: Vincent sent sketches of Peat Diggers in the Dunes [F 1031 JH 363] and a second, unknown composition that Vincent describes elsewhere as "a similar scene, but just the team of workmen labouring" (JLB 348, 6/3/1883). The first sketch (after Peat Diggers in the Dunes) is unknown. The second, according to JLB, is likely Sand Diggers in Dekkersduin near The Hague (F 1029 JH 366) (JLB 350, 6/5/1883; n. 1). 


Context:
JLB 350, 6/5/1883: "I've sent small sketches of the two compositions to C.M. My hope is that this will perhaps result in his being ready to help carry out the whole of the plan I have, namely to do a series of drawings of work in the dunes."

240. "they might be" BVG 290, 6/3/1883: Vincent does not say, nor do we mean to imply, that he included these exact words in his letter to Uncle Cor, which does not survive. This was, however, the spirit in which he sent them, as expressed to Theo. 

Context:
BVG 290, 6/3/1883: "And even if we don't sell these, I think they might become the means of finding new connections, and perhaps of re-establishing relations with C. M. or Tersteeg or Mauve."
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "And even if we don't sell these, I think it could be a way of finding new contacts and perhaps of putting things right with C.M. or Tersteeg, say, or Mauve."

241. "very anxious to be" BVG 295, 6/22/1883: This reassurance takes the indirect form of relaying to Theo something that Vincent said to Tersteeg when Vincent went to visit him at Goupil in mid-June. Under the circumstances, the gérant's silence is perfectly understandable. 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "I told Tersteeg that I was very anxious to be on good terms with Mauve again, but he did not answer a word."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "I told Tersteeg that I very much wished to be on good terms with Mauve once more, but he didn't give me so much as a word in reply."

242. "a helping hand" BVG 290, 6/3/1883: Vincent's plaintive repetition of "perhaps" (see context) suggests that Vincent knew the hopelessness of this proposal even as he wrote it. 

Context:
BVG 290, 6/3/1883: "Look here, boy, if Mauve gave a helping hand now, for instance, perhaps, perhaps they might be turned into paintings. I think the studies and compositions are worked out enough to serve as a foundation for a painted picture."
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "You see, old chap, if Mauve, say, was to come around now, perhaps, perhaps paintings might be made of them. The studies and composition are sufficiently worked up, I believe, to serve as the basis for a painting if need be." (Emphasis in original.)

243. the little back office BVG 295, 6/22/1883: Vincent complains that the drawing he showed Tersteeg "wasn't seen at its best in his small office" (JLB 356, 6/22/1883). (He refers to it the same way in JLB 212, 3/16/1882-3/20/1882.) The reference may suggest that Tersteeg's office was windowless. 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "The drawing which I showed Tersteeg showed up very poorly in his little room; one must see it surrounded by other drawings: then it has quite a different effect."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "The drawing in question that I took to Tersteeg wasn't seen at its best in his small office in my view; it needs to be seen in the company of other drawings, then it looks very different."

244. laid all the tribulations BVG 282, 5/2/1883: The triggering event was the opening of the Salon in Paris, which Vincent knew Tersteeg would attend. Anticipating that he would also be seeing Theo while there, and deeply resentful of the friendship between the two gérants, Vincent launched into a long, preemptive attack: "And so the Salon has opened. No doubt Messrs H.G.T. and C.M. will be paying you a visit one of these days. ... It seems to me, should H.G.T. say anything to you about me, that you should cut him off more or less in this manner: Has V. obstructed you since then or bothered you? -- given that he hasn't, you shouldn't make things difficult for him. It's rather disagreeable to me that I always have to avoid the house of G.&C. out of discretion, on account of that difficulty with H.G.T. You know what H.G.T. wrote about me to Pa that time, for example -- well, so far he hasn't retracted his view that I'd made it impossible for him to have anything further to do with me. It goes without saying that as long as he holds that opinion of me I won't set foot inside the premises on the Plaats. ... If I count from last May, Theo, this year hasn't been exactly easy or free of care, eh. But that's nothing; convenience or being without cares isn't my ideal and goal either. Still, rather a lot has happened. ... the woman and I have the devil's own job to keep going and to make progress with the work and with housekeeping. Now it's sometimes very unpleasant for me if relations are so strained that, for example, I must avoid the very people that one ought to meet in connection with the work, directly or indirectly." (JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883.) 

Context:
JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883: "It's now almost a year since I had the unpleasantness with him (i.e. with HGT) ... If I count from last May, Theo, this year hasn't been exactly easy or free of care, eh."

245. "I will not cross" BVG 282, 5/2/1883. 

Context:
BVG 282, 5/2/1883: "It is now almost a year since I had differences with him, that is to say, with Tersteeg. I will not cross his path again; he must have noticed that, I think; and he may be sure that I hardly ever think of what has happened."
JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883: "It's now almost a year since I had the unpleasantness with him (i.e. with HGT). I shan't cross his path again, I believe he realizes that too, and he can rest assured that I hardly ever think of what occurred."

246. "write a little word" BVG 290, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
BVG 290, 6/3/1883: "And for my part, in order to lighten the burden for you, though apart from that I assure you I did not like it at all, I wrote to C. M., and I want to ask you: could you perhaps write a little word to Tersteeg, telling him that I am working on those large drawings?"
JLB 349, 6/3/1883: "And for my part, to lighten your burden, I wrote to C.M. (although I took no pleasure in that, I assure you) and wanted to ask you, could you perhaps write a word to Tersteeg telling him that I'm working on those large drawings" (emphasis in original).

247. "make some arrangement" BVG 289, 6/4/1883-6/5/1883. 

Context:
BVG 289, 6/4/1883-6/5/1883: "If only you were here, you might perhaps make some arrangement with him."
JLB 350, 6/5/1883: "If only you were here. Perhaps something could be arranged with him."

248. He proposed BVG 282, 5/2/1883: In order to appear conciliatory to Theo, Vincent makes an uncharacteristic concession: "From a certain point of view H.G.T. isn't wrong -- nonetheless, things could be viewed from another angle. It could have been taken differently from the way in which His Hon. took it then. But that's up to him." (JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883.) But that is only a prelude to the truly delusional "deal" he is proposing: "For my part I gave my opinion of His Hon. to you then, but not as far as I remember to others, influenced by various circumstances that were most disagreeable for me (displeasure with Mauve &c.). I freely admit that as a result my judgement of him wasn't correct either and, on condition that H.G.T. takes back what he wrote about me to Pa (that I had made it impossible for him to have anything further to do with me), I will take back my opinion that H.G.T. was to blame for disagreeable things that happened to me." (ibid.)

In addition to the overwhelming unlikeliness that Tersteeg would agree to such an exchange of retractions, what makes this deal delusional is Vincent's bizarre calculation of the benefits and sacrifices that it constitutes. Vincent is offering to take back an opinion that he says he has not expressed to anybody else -- and, even if he had, nobody would have listened to. Nobody, least of all Tersteeg, cares what Vincent says or thinks about Tersteeg -- except Vincent. The only person for whom Vincent could retract his opinion of Tersteeg is Theo. In addition, how would the deal work? Does Vincent expect Tersteeg to write a letter to Dorus officially retracting his opinion of Vincent? Why would Tersteeg do such a thing? So Vincent will think better of him? Indeed, Tersteeg has probably barely thought about Vincent since their last altercation -- whereas Vincent has been harboring a bitter grudge that only grows with each new slight or indignity, all of which Vincent blames, ultimately, on Tersteeg. In his delusional state, Vincent imagines exactly the reverse to be true: "I shan't cross [Tersteeg's] path again, I believe he realizes that too, and he can rest assured that I hardly ever think of what occurred" (ibid.). 

Context:
JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883: "I freely admit that as a result my judgement of him wasn't correct either and, on condition that H.G.T. takes back what he wrote about me to Pa (that I had made it impossible for him to have anything further to do with me), I will take back my opinion that H.G.T. was to blame for disagreeable things that happened to me."

249. his brother broker BVG 282, 5/2/1883: That is the implication of the sentence, which follows Vincent's detailed proposal of the terms of the rapprochement with Tersteeg (see context). He adds this urgent plea: "Now it's sometimes very unpleasant for me if relations are so strained that, for example, I must avoid the very people that one ought to meet in connection with the work, directly or indirectly. And I wish it was all cleared up." (JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883.) 

Context:
JLB 339, 5/2/1883 or 5/3/1883: "If I express myself clearly enough, you may find in these thoughts something that could lead to more peace or better mutual understanding, which would be far from a matter of indifference to me."

250. emboldened by his new drawings BVG 289, 6/4/1883-6/5/1883: In another of Vincent's delusions of reconciliation, he imagines that Tersteeg would approve of his new drawings and implies that he, Vincent, would be willing to make concessions on scale and medium that he has bitterly resisted in the past. He does not, however, go so far as to suggest making the drawings into watercolors, the medium Tersteeg (and Theo) had urged on him repeatedly (JLB 356, 6/22/1883). 

Context:
JLB 350, 6/5/1883: "It also occurred to me that, were he not prejudiced against having anything to do with me, perhaps Tersteeg could make use of these compositions in a smaller format, with sepia for example."

251. desperate BVG 295, 6/22/1883. 

Context:
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "Then I reached the point, in desperation, of going to Tersteeg. I thought, I have nothing to lose, perhaps it will be a way of stirring things back into life."

252. "thaw the ice" BVG 299, 7/11/1883: This is Vincent's after-the-fact characterization of his visit to Tersteeg: "I'd made an attempt to break the ice" (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). 

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "Nor do I think it nice of H. G. T., now that I, for my part, have tried to thaw the ice between us, not to come to see me."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "Nor do I think it nice of H.G.T. that he didn't pay a call after I'd made an attempt to break the ice."

253. Tersteeg received him formally BVG 295, 6/22/1883. 

Context:
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "The overall impression I bring back from my visit to Tersteeg is that I would have thought it kinder if, given that such an awfully long time has since passed, he had suddenly referred to it lightly, but there remained an element of gloominess and of 'Have you come to pester me again? Keep away from me.' He didn't say that, for he spoke in very measured terms, but in the light of what he might have done -- namely say something like, I think it's right that we should make up and I'll come round and have a look sometime, or something like that -- in my view the above was implied to some extent." (Emphasis in original.)

254. Quick to take offence BVG 295, 6/22/1883: Vincent's account of the conversation is suffused with defensiveness, even discounting for the fact that he would have inevitably taken a defensive posture in his retelling to Theo. 

Context:
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "I would have thought it kinder if, given that such an awfully long time has since passed, he had suddenly referred to it lightly, but there remained an element of gloominess and of 'Have you come to pester me again? Keep away from me.' He didn't say that, for he spoke in very measured terms, but in the light of what he might have done -- namely say something like, I think it's right that we should make up and I'll come round and have a look sometime, or something like that." (Emphasis in original.)

255. "Here you are" BVG 295, 6/22/1883: The quotation marks are Vincent's, although this is clearly just an imputed comment (see context). We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "My total impression of the visit to Tersteeg is that it would have been nicer if he had taken things somewhat lightly, as such a long time had passed; but there was a ponderousness in the air, and something of, 'There you are, bothering me again -- do leave me alone.'"
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "The overall impression I bring back from my visit to Tersteeg is that I would have thought it kinder if, given that such an awfully long time has since passed, he had suddenly referred to it lightly, but there remained an element of gloominess and of 'Have you come to pester me again? Keep away from me.'"

256. a row of diggers BVG 295, 6/22/1883: Vincent described the drawing, which was related to Peat Diggers in the Dunes (F 1031 JH 363, late May, 1883, charcoal, black mountain chalk, printing ink, 19.7 x 39.4 in., 50 x 100 cm., location unknown), as "a row of Diggers, men and women, with a foreground of clods of earth and a view of some roofs in a village in the background" (JLB 356, 6/22/1883; emphasis in original). 

Context:
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "And so I went there with the large sketch which I wrote to you about lately. It has become a row of Diggers, men and women, with a foreground of clods of earth and a view of some roofs in a village in the background." (Emphasis in original.)

257. to Tersteeg as a gift BVG 295, 6/22/1883. 

Context:
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "I also told him how it was on my mind that I still had Bargue's drawing examples, that I would have returned them long ago if what happened last year had not been an impediment to speaking about them, but that I had come now to clear the matter up. That -- since a few were damaged, although only slightly, through use, and I had also had a few other things at that time that were still outstanding -- I hoped he would be willing either now or later to accept a few of my drawings to settle up for everything, and I believed that he would appreciate my coming to him to settle the matter. Well, he thought that was very good and now fortunately the Bargues are back."

258. "I understand perfectly well" BVG 295, 6/22/1883: Vincent does not put this in quotations marks. Pronouns and verb tenses have been altered accordingly. 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "I told Tersteeg that I understood perfectly well this sketch could not be anything for him, but that I came to show it to him because it was so long since he had seen any of my work and because I for one wanted to prove that I did not feel any ill will about what had happened last year."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "I said to Tersteeg that I understood very well that this sketch wasn't something he could use, but that I'd come to see him partly because he'd seen nothing of my work for so long, and because for my part I wanted to give him proof that I didn't wish for there to be continuing rancour about what had happened last year."

259. out on Tersteeg's desk BVG 295, 6/22/1883: Afterward, Vincent appears to blame the poor lighting in the room for Tersteeg's lack of enthusiasm for the drawing (see context). 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "The drawing which I showed Tersteeg showed up very poorly in his little room; one must see it surrounded by other drawings: then it has quite a different effect."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "The drawing in question that I took to Tersteeg wasn't seen at its best in his small office in my view; it needs to be seen in the company of other drawings, then it looks very different."

341 260. "I do not hold" BVG 295, 6/22/1883: Vincent does not put this in quotations marks. Pronouns and verb tenses have been altered accordingly. 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "Well, he said that he did not hold a grudge, either; as to the drawing, he had told me last year that I ought to make watercolours, and he did not want to repeat himself by talking about it again."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "Well, he said that he didn't feel any rancour either, that as to the drawing he'd told me last year that I should do watercolours, and that he didn't want to discuss it any further now because he didn't want to end up repeating himself."

261. Tersteeg said wearily BVG 295, 6/22/1883: We take weariness to be suggested by Vincent's comment that there was an "element of gloominess" (JLB 356, 6/22/1883). Vincent and Tersteeg have, in fact, had this conversation many times before, always with the same result. 

Context:
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "The overall impression I bring back from my visit to Tersteeg is that I would have thought it kinder if, given that such an awfully long time has since passed, he had suddenly referred to it lightly, but there remained an element of gloominess and of 'Have you come to pester me again? Keep away from me.' He didn't say that, for he spoke in very measured terms, but in the light of what he might have done -- namely say something like, I think it's right that we should make up and I'll come round and have a look sometime, or something like that -- in my view the above was implied to some extent." (Emphasis in original.)

262. "This is not saleable" BVG 297, 7/2/1883: Vincent does not put this comment in quotation marks [although Bonger added them], and whether or not it was said at this particular encounter is unclear. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 297, 7/2/1883: "Tersteeg would not be satisfied with them. He would always say, 'It is not saleable and saleability must come first now.'"
JLB 358, 7/2/1883: "Tersteeg would still not be content with it. Keep on saying, it isn't saleable and the saleable must be your no. 1. "

263. "You are a mediocrity" BVG 297, 7/2/1883: Vincent admits this reading of Tersteeg's statement ("it isn't saleable and the saleable must be your no. 1") about two weeks later (JLB 358, 7/2/1883). 

Context:
BVG 297, 7/2/1883: "Personally I think he means in plainer terms, ' You are a mediocrity and you are arrogant because you don't give in and you make mediocre little things: you are making yourself ridiculous with your so-called seeking, and you do not work.' That is the real meaning of what Tersteeg said to me the year before last, and last year; and he still means it.
JLB 358, 7/2/1883: "For my part I see in that in plainer terms ' you're a mediocrity and you're pretentious in not submitting yourself and not making small mediocre things; you make yourself ridiculous with your so-called seeking, and don't work.' This is implied in what Tersteeg said to me the year before last and last year, and I'm still faced with it."

264. "to finish the figures better" BVG 295, 6/22/1883: The exact dating of Vincent's visit to Tersteeg's office, and thus the time elapsed before the letter in which he relates the story of his visit, is elusive. The letter is dated "Friday, 22 June" and, from this passage in the letter it appears that at least two days have elapsed since the meeting: Speaking of the drawing that he took to show Tersteeg, Vincent writes: "Well, yesterday I worked on it again for the whole day to get the figures more finished" (JLB 356, 6/22/1883). The implication seems to be that Vincent saw Tersteeg on Wednesday, June 20 and then spent all of the rest of that day, and all of June 21 ("yesterday") revising the drawing. But all of that is dependent on the accuracy of the dating of the letter. It is worth noting that JLB consulted meteorological records from the Koninklijk Nederlands Meteorologisch Instituut, which confirm that "thunder was heard on Thursday, 21 June and was followed by heavy rain" (JLB 356, "Date"). This support's the dating of JLB 356, in which Vincent reported that "yesterday evening there was thunder and last night it rained." 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "Well, yesterday I worked at it all day again to finish the figures better."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "Well, yesterday I worked on it again for the whole day to get the figures more finished."

265. "Sometimes one" BVG 297, 7/2/1883. 

Context:
JLB 358, 7/2/1883: "Sometimes one is burdened by it and feels wretched and, so to speak, overwhelmed."

266. "Life sometimes becomes" BVG 297, 7/2/1883. 

Context:
BVG 297, 7/2/1883: "But for all that, life sometimes becomes gloomy, and the future, dark, because the work costs money, so the harder one works, the deeper one gets into debt, instead of the work helping one on, so that difficulties and expense may be surmounted by working harder."
JLB 358, 7/2/1883: "It is so, however, that life sometimes becomes sombre and the future dark when working costs money and one feels oneself going ever deeper into the ground the harder one works, instead of work helping one to stay above water and one being able to overcome the difficulties and costs by making a greater effort."

267. "the fatuous-minded" BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883; emphasis added. Vincent attributes this outcry of lonely indignation to Zola. See JLB 367, n. 9: "The quotation is a compilation of several sentences from Zola's foreword in Mes Haines: 'If at present I am worth something, it is because I am alone and because I hate. I hate people who are insignificant and incapable; they annoy me ... I hate the nasty scoffers, the little youngsters who sneer, being unable to imitate their papas' weighty seriousness ... I hate fools who put on a haughty front, the incapable ones who declare that our art and literature are dying a peaceful death.'" 


Context:
BVG305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883: "After all, I don't feel discouraged at heart. On the contrary, I agree with what I recently read in Zola: 'Si à présent je vaux quelque chose c'est que je suis seul et que je hais les niais, les impuissants, les cyniques, les railleurs idiots et bêtes’ [If at present I am worth something, it is because I am alone, and I hate the fatuous-minded, the impotent, the cynics, the idiotic and stupid scoffers].”
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: “Despite everything, at heart I don’t have a feeling of dejection, and on the contrary I can agree with what I read recently in Zola, ‘If at present I’m worth something, it’s because I am alone and because I hate the ninnies, the incapable, the cynics, the idiotic and foolish mockers.’”

268. "He persists in thinking" BVG 295, 6/22/1883. 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "But I will leave it to time, and if he persists in thinking everything I do is wrong, well, I will take it in my stride and go my own way as if he did not exist."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "But I'll leave that largely to time, and if he continues to find all I do wrong, well, I'll take that very coolly and quietly go my own way as if he didn't exist."

269. "I should not be" BVG 295, 6/22/1883. 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: " I should not be in the least surprised if he considered it crazy work, or absolutely absurd, because he said he would rather not have anything to do with it."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "And as for Tersteeg himself, it wouldn't surprise me in the least if he considered it sheer madness or something absurd, precisely because he said he would rather stay out of it completely."

270. work on steadily BVG 295, 6/22/1883: This letter is filled with Carlylean expressions of re-dedication to work, such as this: "I've been working with an extraordinary amount of pleasure lately, ... Yes, old chap, if one perseveres and does it without being distracted by what already exists." (JLB 356, 6/22/1883.) The belief in salvation through labor is so much on Vincent's mind that at one point he mentions its chief exponent by name: "A truly English remark is the one by Carlyle, 'The result of an idea must not be a feeling but an action.' This approach to life, which forces a man to concentrate in the first place not on seeking his material happiness but on his work before all else in order to do something good, is something of which one finds many examples in England, and may perhaps be a national trait. Carlyle also says, 'Knowest thou that Worship of sorrow -- the temple thereof founded some eighteen hundred years ago now lies in ruins, yet its sacred lamp is still burning.'" (ibid.; emphasis in original.) The second quotation is from Sartor Resartus. In a letter soon after, Vincent reveals that he "often comes to mind" an etching of Carlyle by Alphonse Legros, "Carlyle in his study" (JLB 358, 7/2/1883). Apparently, he either possessed a copy of the etching or he remembered it vividly and frequently. JLB identify two portraits of Carlyle by Legros: Petit Portrait de Thomas Carlyle (Small Portrait of Thomas Carlyle) and Grand Portrait de Thomas Carlyle (Large Portrait of Thomas Carlyle). However, Carlyle appears in his study in neither etching. (JLB 358, n. 2.) 

Context:
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "Otherwise, the work is going well, I've been working with an extraordinary amount of pleasure lately, and with a firm feeling that I'm 'on a road', as R. says of himself in the letter I sent you."

271. "take it in stride" BVG 295, 6/22/1883. (490)

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "But I will leave it to time, and if he persists in thinking everything I do is wrong, well, I will take it in my stride and go my own way as if he did not exist."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "But I'll leave that largely to time, and if he continues to find all I do wrong, well, I'll take that very coolly and quietly go my own way as if he didn't exist."

272. "everlasting no" BVG 297, 7/2/1883. 

Context:
BVG 297, 7/2/1883: "I am afraid Tersteeg will always be for me 'the everlasting no.' That is what not only I, but almost everyone who seeks his own way, has behind or beside him as an everlasting discourager."
JLB 358, 7/2/1883: "To me Tersteeg will I think remain 'the everlasting no.' Not only I but almost all who seek their own way have something like this behind or beside them as a perpetual discourager." (Emphasis in original.)

273. falling to pieces BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883. 

Context:
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "Circumstances have been a little too much for me recently, and my plan to win back old friends by working constantly and sensibly has been shattered."

274. His debts continued BVG 301, 7/22/1883. 

Context:
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "The weeks passed, many, many weeks and months of late, when each time the expenses were slightly more than I could keep up with, even with all the fretting and worrying and economizing."

275. "skirmish" BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883. 

Context:
BVG305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883: "I am in rather a tough spot. You can see from what I told you about this morning's skirmish that people are very inconsiderate of me."
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "I'm a little worried, you can see from what I've written about my skirmish this morning that people don't treat me with much consideration."

276. a common occurence BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883: Vincent virtually admits a number of similar encounters (see context). Note that this particular encounter was "accompanied by a lot of noise, swearing, ranting &c." (JLB 367, 7/25/1883). The "&c." probably also speaks volumes. 

Context:
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "Well, all the small shopkeepers &c. one deals with for daily necessities belong to the same type. They come themselves to ask you to take this or that from them or, if one goes to someone else, they ask for your custom, but if one must unfortunately put off payment for longer than a week it's cursing and scolding."

277. "I told him that I" BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883. 

Context:
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "I tell him I'll pay him as soon as I receive money but that I don't have it at the moment, and that adds fuel to the flames. I ask him to leave, and in the end I push him out of the door but, perhaps deliberately letting things get to this point, he grabs me by the neck and throws me against the wall and then flat on the floor."

278. ignored months of tax summonsBVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883: Needless to say, Vincent does not inform Theo of the summonses or even the first visit of the tax assessors until long after the fact. This becomes clear in his first report in July (see context). If Vincent's report is accurate, it may suggest that he rented the apartment before he admitted doing so to Theo the previous year (i.e., in mid-July 1882), as it seems logical that tax assessments would became due after one year. 

Context:
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "They then sent me demands and final notices but I ignored all that and said, when they came back again, that it was pointless because I simply lit my pipe with them. That I didn't have it, and my 4 chairs, table &c. wouldn't raise anything anyway. That they weren't worth as much new as they wanted to assess me for. They have indeed left me in peace since, for months now."

279. "I lit my pipe" BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883: "Then they sent me assessments and summonses, but I didn't pay the slightest attention, and once when they came to ask about them, I said it was simply no use, I'd lit my pipe with them."
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "They then sent me demands and final notices but I ignored all that and said, when they came back again, that it was pointless because I simply lit my pipe with them."

280. "Millet and the other" BVG 301, 7/22/1883: Vincent's other line of defense is to claim persecution because of his unconventional dress and manner: "you can see from what I've written about my skirmish this morning that people don't treat me with much consideration. They'd probably keep their distance more if one wore a top hat and I don't know what else besides. One has one's sense of things after all, and it isn't pleasant." (JLB 367, 7/25/1883.) One cannot help but note the relationship of these arguments to the paranoid defenses Vincent makes when his neighbors in Arles petition to have him removed in 1889. (See Chapter 33.) 

Context:
BVG301, 7/22/1883: "I do not approve, Theo, of spending more than one receives, but when it is a question of going on strike or working on, I vote for working on to the utmost. Millet and the other masters worked on till writs were served on them, or some have been in prison, or have had to move from one place to another, but I do not see that any one of them gave up his work."
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "I don't think it right, Theo, to spend more than one receives -- but if it's a question of stopping or carrying on working, I'm for carrying on to the end. Millet and other predecessors carried on right up to the bailiff, and some went to prison or had to move hither and thither, yet I don't see in them that they stopped."

281. pleas of poverty BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883. (520)

Context:
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "So far there hasn't been a soul here in the street who pays tax, yet all have been assessed for various sums, including me, and I have twice had appraisers here; I drew their attention, however, to my 4 kitchen chairs and unpainted table and said I wasn't eligible to be assessed for so much. That if they found carpets, pianos, antiques &c. at a painter's, they might not be wrong to assess such a man as being able to pay, but that I couldn't even pay my paint bill, and that there were no luxury items but only children in my house, and that consequently there was nothing to be had from me."

282. Theo's ownership of all his work BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883. 

Context:
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "Theo, there is one thing we must settle -- I don't mean that it will happen immediately, but the days might become even gloomier, and in that case I should like to make an arrangement. My studies and all the work that is in the studio are absolutely your property."

342 283. first by hiding out BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883. 

Context:
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "When I went to Scheveningen I had to leave one or two others waiting. I'm a little worried, brother, and have considerable sorrow and difficulty."

284. by moving to the country BVG 301, 7/22/1883. Vincent had been suggesting various trips for almost a year, but ostensibly for artistic or commercial reasons. The first mention of leaving The Hague because of his deepening debt comes in early July: "And of late I've sometimes thought of moving to the country, either on the seashore or somewhere where work on the land is real. Because I believe it would save some money." (JLB 358, 7/2/1883.) In the later letter in July, he wraps the unpalatable suggestion (running from debts) in the brothers' mutual respect for Millet: "Millet and other predecessors carried on right up to the bailiff, and some went to prison or had to move hither and thither" (JLB 363, 7/22/1883). But he leaves no doubt that his desire to leave is related to his mounting problems with debt collectors: "The incident this morning is a sign to me that it's a duty to confer and to take a smaller place in a village" (JLB 367, 7/25/1883). As discussed later in the chapter, we believe escaping debt collectors was a much more decisive factor in Vincent's leaving The Hague than he was willing to admit to Theo, and it may well have been an undisclosed factor in his earlier proposals for "trips," as well as his desire to take the free pied-a-terre at De Bock's house in Scheveningen. 

Context:
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "Then, if there's no hope for the future financially, I would propose a move to the country, saving half the rent in a village deep in the country, and for the same amount of money that one pays here for bad food getting good, healthy food, which is needed for the woman and the little ones, and for me too in fact" (emphasis in original).

285. resisting his brother's pleas Although Vincent often begged for extra money or accelerated payments in the summer of 1883, there is no indication in the letters that Theo obliged him until late July. In mid-June, Vincent wrote, "I'm absolutely broke, send somewhat earlier if you can" (JLB 355, 6/16/1883). But the money arrived around June 21, about the usual time. As of mid-July, Vincent's thank you for the July 10 payment suggests there has been nothing extra in the meantime: "I'm absolutely broke, send somewhat earlier if you can" (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). The same is true for the July 20 payment: "I thank you for your letter, and for the enclosure. ... I had hoped that you would have been able to send something -- well, in any event, especially if you have no money, you must write to me soon, for it's quite a feat to keep one's spirits up in the circumstances." (JLB 363, 7/22/1883.)  286. an extra fifty francs BVG 306, 7/27/1883: In addition to all his other woes, Vincent reports trouble cashing the banknote because it was torn. Initially, the bank agreed only to give him 20 francs (10 guilders) on the 50 franc note and forward the note to Paris for verification or replacement. If the note was refused, Vincent would have to repay the 10 guilders (JLB 368, 7/27/1883). In his next letter, two or three days later, he reports that the Paris bank honored the note and he has received the full 50 francs ("a total of twenty-three guilders" [JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883]). One cannot help but marvel at the speed at which this international transaction was accomplished. 

Context:
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "To my surprise another letter from you arrived yesterday with a banknote enclosed. I don't need to tell you that I was glad of it, and truly thank you for it."

287. bought a new easel BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883. 

Context:
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "Today I bought a field easel and painting canvas. The first is nice, because one doesn't get as dirty as when one works on one's knees outdoors."

288. he was refused permissionBVG 292, 6/10/1883: Vincent had asked for permission only the week before (JLB 348, 6/3/1883). There must be more to this setback than Vincent reveals, as he has been working in the almshouse for some time. Just as he was "chased away" from train stations and soup kitchens because of the general disturbance he made with his vigorous drawing and, no doubt, energetic talking, Vincent may simply have worn out his welcome at the almshouse by this time (see Ch. 15, n. 223). Adrianus Jacobus Zuyderland, an inhabitant of the Old Men's and Women's Home in The Hague, did, however, continue to pose from time to time ("had the Orphan man again today" [JLB 362, 7/13/1883]), and Vincent even returned to the almshouse occasionally on visiting days ("I must tell you that I've been to the orphanage again after all on a visiting day" [ibid.]). 

Context:
JLB 352, 6/11/1883: "But I've had a disappointment with the Orphanage in that I have not been given permission to draw there -- Well, it's not too bad for there are other orphanages, it's just that in this one I know a man who has modelled for me regularly, and that would have made it easier for me to do sketches." (Emphasis in original.)

289. he broke off BVG 306, 7/27/1883: That is certainly the implication of his bitter, blasphemous diatribe against his former friend Willem Kiesenberg, a carpenter in The Hague, in July (see context). 

Context:
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "In many cases a carpenter's boy becomes a carpenter's boss, small-minded, dry, mean, vain, and whatever one thinks of Jesus his approach to things was different from my friend the carpenter's from the yard behind here, who has worked his way up to become a slum landlord and is a lot more complacent and much more preoccupied with himself than Jesus."

290. His friend Van der Weele left BVG 299, 7/11/1883. Later, Vincent reports that Van der Weele is "now travelling during the holidays" (JLB 370, 8/3/1883) -- presumably a reference to the dog days of summer during which most people who could escape the city did so. Apparently, Van der Weele went to Gelderland. When he returned in late August, Vincent writes, "This morning I was at Van der Weele's and saw the studies he brought back from Gelderland" (JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883). 

Context:
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "Was at Van der Weele's last Sunday; he was working on a painting of cows in the milking yard, for which he has several substantial studies. He's moving to the country for some time."

291. De Bock and Blommers evaporatedAfter the flurry of interaction surrounding Vincent's securing of the pied-a-terre in De Bock's house in early July, there are no further reports of encounters with [Théophile] de Bock. The only specific mention of him comes toward the end of July, but it is clearly tinged with disenchantment: "I talk to De Bock and other painters sometimes, but I don't talk about things as if I trusted them completely, and there are many things they don't need to know" (JLB 364, 7/22/1883). We suspect the ambiguous time reference ("sometimes") is meant to obscure Vincent's failure to pursue this relationship. Vincent did not follow through on his promise to have Theo see De Bock when he visited in August, and that failure may well have ended De Bock's interest in Vincent. In fairness, it is also possible that De Bock left The Hague for the summer; but even that would not explain his complete disappearance from the letters at this time. (He is mentioned only once more, in retrospect, in 1884 [JLB 411, 12/8/1883].)

The same defensive obfuscation may be at work in Vincent's murky account of his contacts with Blommers that summer. (See Ch. 19, n. 226.) On July 22, Vincent reports, "I've seen and spoken to Blommers twice already in Scheveningen," but he doesn't say when, how long ago, or under what circumstances, except that it was not, apparently, at Blommer's house or studio (which was attached to his house) (JLB 363, 7/22/1883). He reassures Theo that Blommers "asked me to call on him sometime," but he never reports doing so (ibid.). In a plaintive letter only a week later, one can hear renewed feelings of rejection and alienation that probably betray the failure of Vincent's summer outreach to his fellow artists: "one gets particularly upset if more superficial people are amused by thinking they're so much wiser and are so much better at getting where they want. Yes, then it's sometimes difficult, and if conditions are such that the difficulties rise to a spring flood, one can be led to regret that one is as one is and wish one had been less conscientious" (JLB 368, 7/27/1883). Van der Mast and Dumas (and others) suggest a more substantive relationship between Vincent and De Bock, citing the latter's participation in a posthumous exhibition of Vincent's work in 1892 (Van der Mast and Dumas, p. 162). But there is no evidence to support any warmth or influence either way at this time, and much evidence to the contrary. De Bock's later enthusiasm for Vincent's work was more likely opportunism (consistent with Vincent's account of him) than nostalgia or "courage" (Van der Mast and Dumas's term). 

292. alone on his long walksEven the "splendid country lad" Vincent mentions in mid-June disappears (JLB 354, 6/15/1883; see Ch. 19, n. 228). He does not reappear until more than a month later, this time in a letter to Theo: "I have a model -- a country lad -- who lives here in the neighbourhood and to whom I've already spoken about painting studies. He can arrange to go off into the country with me, for instance into the dunes, very early in the morning." (JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883.) The speculative tone indicates that no dune-walks have yet taken place. The next mention, only a week later, is still prospective: "If it's at all possible, I'll do a few studies for it in the dunes before you come, namely going with a model to those fields behind Loosduinen, in the early morning or in the evening towards dusk" (JLB 370, 8/3/1883). The peasant-boy model is not mentioned again. It is possible that the imagined expeditions never took place or, equally likely, that they ended abruptly (and badly) after the first one or two.  293. "At times her temper" BVG 284, 5/9/1883-5/10/1883. 

Context:
BVG 284, 5/9/1883-5/10/1883: " At times her temper is such that it is almost unbearable even for me -- violent, mischievous, bad. I can tell you, I am sometimes in despair. She comes round again, and she has often told me afterward: I myself do not know what I am doing then."
JLB 342, 5/10/1883: " Her mood can be such that it's almost unbearable, even for me, quick-tempered, wilfully wrong, in short, sometimes I despair. It passes -- and more than once she has said to me later -- I DON'T MYSELF KNOW WHAT I'M DOING THEN." (Emphasis in original.)

294. to preserve his fantasy Vincent repeatedly absolved Sien of blame ("she's sometimes brazenly duped by them and incited to intrigue" [JLB 338, 4/30/1883]), and pleaded with Theo not to blame her, either: "Above all, don't think badly of her -- there are deuced good things in her character that are still well worth the trouble when things are going well" (JLB 344, 5/21/1883). He insisted that his love for Sien was true and could not die: "I have faith that where love is true it doesn't die" (JLB 337, 4/21/1883). Even as early as April 1883, however, Vincent was already uncertain of this verity, as he added immediately, "For love can indeed die, in a way -- but there's something like a power of renaissance in love" (ibid.).

His relationship with Sien was increasingly marked by this painful ambivalence. His first defense against it was to attribute it to the changeable nature of all women. Citing Michelet, he explained to Theo: "Michelet says rightly: a woman is an illness. They are changeable, Theo -- they are changeable like the weather. Now those with an eye for it see something beautiful and good in all weathers, find snow beautiful and burning sun beautiful and storm beautiful and calm beautiful, cold good and heat, are fond of all seasons and don't want to miss a single day of the year, and are fundamentally content and resigned to things being as they are -- yet even if one looks at the weather and the changing year like this -- and the changing female nature in the same way -- believing that in the essence of that nature, in its mysteriousness, there is a Reason -- accepting where one doesn't understand -- even, I say, if one should view it in that way, our own nature and vision isn't always and at every moment in harmony and accord with that of the woman with whom we're united, and individually one feels either concern or dissatisfaction or vacillation, despite the belief and the good spirits or serenity one may have." (JLB 342, 5/10/1883; emphasis in original.)

Another coping mechanism was to blame himself: "I must change so much in myself too, but I must ensure that in me she has an example of working and of patience, and that's damned difficult, brother, to be so that one can indirectly show someone how to do something, and I too fall short sometimes, I must raise myself to something better in order to awaken her interest." (ibid.) Another was sheer denial: "I don't find anything unusual in what has befallen me ... there are deuced good things in her character that are still well worth the trouble when things are going well" (JLB 344, 5/21/1883). As late as July, Vincent was protesting that things had improved: "I once wrote to you that things might turn out as they did years ago when I was also living in The Hague -- that at first it would be a miserable time but become more agreeable later on. In many respects it has already become more pleasant and agreeable of late." (JLB 362, 7/13/1883.) This brief flare of optimism may be related to Vincent's procurement at this time of the pied-a-terre in Scheveningen where he spent most days away from the Schenkweg -- and away from Sien. Like so much of Vincent's optimism that summer, it may also be merely face-saving happy-talk for Theo's benefit. It is hard to imagine that, at this late date, even Vincent could bring himself to believe that the relationship with Sien had someplace to go.

Vincent became especially defensive when Theo wrote that he was "a little concerned about what [Vincent] wrote regarding the woman" (JLB 344, 5/21/1883). Vincent responded with yet another delusional wave of optimism for the future: "it has remedied itself once again, and there will come a time, I hope, when everything goes a great deal better. When you come, I'll be able to tell you better than I can in writing what I'm sometimes worried about. I repeat, my woman's true and thorough recovery in both mind and body will take years. So you needn't be immediately concerned that there's something unusual if I write to you that I'm a little worried about it." (ibid.) Vincent was especially eager that Theo not mention any of his complaints about Sien to others: "But, in particular, don't talk about it to others" (ibid.). This could refer either to their parents, or to Tersteeg, or both. The fear of losing face undoubtedly drove Vincent's efforts to salvage the relationship with Sien long after an objective observer would have declared it a lost cause. 

295. explain Sien's lazinessBVG 284, 5/9/1883-5/10/1883. (See Ch. 19, n. 296.) 

Context:
JLB 342, 5/10/1883: "My woman has certain faults and defects in the way she acts - that's bound to be the case. THAT DOES NOT MAKE HER BAD in my view. Still, those defects must be eliminated -- habits of laxity, indifference, lack of activity and deftness, oh, a mass of things." (Emphasis in original.)

296. slovenliness BVG 284, 5/9/1883-5/10/1883. 

Context:
JLB 342, 5/10/1883: "Still, those defects must be eliminated -- habits of laxity, indifference, lack of activity and deftness, oh, a mass of things."

297. increasingly violent BVG 284, 5/9/1883-5/10/1883. 

Context:
JLB 342, 5/10/1883: "Her mood can be such that it's almost unbearable, even for me, quick-tempered, wilfully wrong, in short, sometimes I despair. It passes -- and more than once she has said to me later -- I DON'T MYSELF KNOW WHAT I'M DOING THEN." (Emphasis in original.)

298. fits of temper BVG 314, 8/19/1883. 

Context:
JLB 376, 8/19/1883: "If I left the woman, she might go mad, but because I for my part have more than once found a way of calming her down during her moods of intolerable bad temper, ... there has come into her that je ne sais quoi of calm when I'm with her" (emphasis in original).

299. who had moved into BVG 281, 4/30/1883: Vincent is never clearer than this on exactly when Sien's mother, Maria Wilhelmina Hoornik-Pellers, moved into the apartment. For obvious reasons, he withheld the news from Theo at the time. It may have been as late as February 1883, for Vincent was apparently still visiting the little charity house where Maria lived at that time: "I don't know if you know the 'gift houses' on Brouwersgracht opposite the hospital. ... I've already made a few scratches there this week. They're some rows of houses with small gardens which belong to the poor board, I believe." (JLB 310, 2/8/1883.) This appears to refer to the houses that can be seen in Sien's Mother's House (F 941 JH 146) and Sien's Mother's House, Closer View (F 942 JH 147) -- although the fact that Vincent drew them does not necessarily mean that Maria was still living there at the time. 

Context:
JLB 338, 4/30/1883: "Do you know what I'd prefer to the woman's relations with her mother? -- in my case, where they have decidedly unfortunate consequences -- that the mother should move in with me completely. I suggested that once this winter when the mother was very hard pressed, and I said if you're so attached to each other, come and live together."

300. began to make trouble BVG 280, 4/21/1883-4/22/1883. 

Context:
JLB 337, 4/21/1883: "It is, however, a sad thought that something like the relationship between mother and daughter can have a dark side. So that a man who loves light and seeks it can be fatally thwarted by it."

301. In his paranoia BVG 288, 6/3/1883: The extent to which Vincent's suspicions of Sien's family were well-founded, is, of course unknowable. But whatever truth there was to them, Vincent's paranoid nature no doubt magnified it. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "Anyway, I leave it to you to decide to what extent these suspicions about me were well founded. Well then, but it was secretly discussed behind my back."

302. "meddlesome, slandering" BVG 281, 4/30/1883. 

Context:
BVG 281, 4/30/1883: "A wife's mother is, in some cases, the representative of a meddlesome, slandering, aggravating family, and as such decidedly injurious and hostile, though she may not be so bad herself."
JLB 338, 4/30/1883: "In some cases the mother of a woman is the representative of a meddlesome and malicious and insufferable family -- and as such definitely harmful and hostile, even if she isn't that bad in herself."

303. "wolves" BVG 280, 4/21/1883-4/22/1883. Emphasis in original. Vincent couches this accusation in a general statement about the families of mistresses and wives, prompted ostensibly by Theo's complaints about Marie's parents. But such a bitter accusation clearly comes from his current experience. 

Context:
BVG 280, 4/21/1883-4/22/1883: "Not everybody's intention is to act silently, and some older and wiser members of the family often get so clamorous that one regrets having spoken to them. The more so, because they cannot stop intriguing and, oh well -- they are probably wolves."
JLB 337, 4/21/1883: "Act and be silent is not everyone's aim, and some older and wiser family members lapse so easily into noise-making that one may regret having spoken to them. Especially because they can't help intriguing, and anyway -- they're probably wolves." (Emphasis in original.)

304. "trying to draw [Sien] away" BVG 288, 6/3/1883: We have slightly reordered and altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 288, 6/3/1883: "… her family tried to draw her away from me; I have had nothing to do with any of them except the mother, because I did not trust them. The more I tried to analyze the history of that family, the more I was strengthened in that opinion. Now, just because I kept out of their way, they plot against me, and so a treacherous attack occurred. I told the woman my opinion of their intentions, and said she had to choose between her family and me, but that I did not want to have anything to do with any of them, primarily because I thought that relations with her family would lead her back to her former bad life."
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: " Her family were trying to get her away from me. I've never involved myself with anyone except the mother, because I considered them untrustworthy. The more I try to analyze the history of that family, the more I'm strengthened in that view. Well, they were intriguing precisely because I ignored them, and this led to a treacherous attack. I've told the woman how I view their intentions and also that she must choose between her family and me, but that I didn't wish to have any dealings with any of them, in the first place because I believed relations with her family would lead her back to her previous wrong life." (Emphasis in original.)

305. "He earns too little"BVG 288, 6/3/1883: Unlike the third accusation in this list, Vincent does not put this one or the second one in quotations, but he clearly imagines these exact words being spoken. We feel justified in adding the quotation marks and changing the person and tense accordingly because the text makes it clear that Vincent may be imagining these conspiratorial mutterings against him, either in part or in whole (see Ch. 19, n. 301). 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "The reason why the family advised her to leave me was that I earned too little and I wasn't good for her, and only did it for the posing but would leave her in the lurch."

306. "He is not good"BVG 288, 6/3/1883. (See Ch. 19, n. 305.) 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "The reason why the family advised her to leave me was that I earned too little and I wasn't good for her, and only did it for the posing but would leave her in the lurch."

307. "He will certainly leave" BVG 288, 6/3/1883. Vincent clearly intends this accusation as a verbatim quotation: "And that influence [of Sien's family] is fatal and has a grip on her precisely because it comes from her family and those who unsettle her by saying 'he'll leave you in the lurch'. In this way they seek to persuade her to leave me in the lurch." (JLB 348, 6/3/1883; emphasis in original.) Earlier in the same letter, he repeats the accusation almost word-for-word, but without casting himself in the third person. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "The reason why the family advised her to leave me was that I earned too little and I wasn't good for her, and only did it for the posing but would leave her in the lurch" (emphasis added).

308. Maria departed in May Van der Mast and Dumas, p. 58. Maria went to live with one of her sons, whom Vincent refers to as "a notoriously bad lot" (JLB 348, 6/3/1883). According to Van der Mast and Dumas: "Sien's mother, widow M.W. Hoornik-Pellers lived for a considerable time in the Painters' quarter, at number 28 Fagelstraat, number 62 Koningstraat and number 37a Waterloostraat. At the back she had a view of the large complex of working-class houses." (Van der Mast and Dumas, p. 58.)  309. "backsliding" BVG 280, 4/21/1883-4/22/1883. We have removed the emphasis in original. 

Context:
BVG 280, 4/21/1883-4/22/1883: "A mother's influence and conversation with friends, more than anything else, sometimes bring a kind of backsliding in women which prevents a reform in thought and action -- sometimes so urgently necessary."
JLB 337, 4/21/1883: "Through the influence of the mother and mixing with girlfriends -- perhaps more than through anything else -- something called a retrograde gets into women sometimes and prevents reforms in their thinking and actions, which are sometimes needed, and urgently needed" (emphasis in original).

310. cut off contact BVG 288, 6/3/1883. 

Context:
JLB 348, 6/3/1883: "I would think it brave and generous of her if she broke off all relations with her family, I myself advise her not to go there."

311. But she never did BVG 317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883. 

Context:
JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883: "She might have trusted me completely a long time ago, but she hasn't."

312. "She prefers to listen" BVG 317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883. We have slightly altered the translation.

Context:
BVG 317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883: "She preferred to listen to and believe people who told her that I should desert her, which -- if it should come to that in the end -- would be her family's fault, because she takes their view of things, at least more their fault than hers, for the family never stopped upsetting her with this talk."
JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883: "What she listened to and believed more was that I would leave her in the lurch after all, which, if it were finally to happen in the end, precisely because she sees it like that, would be more the family's fault than hers, because the family continually upset her with that."

313. "He often sits" BVG 284, 5/9/1883-5/10/1883. 

Context:
BVG 284, 5/9/1883-5/10/1883: " He often sits with me in the studio on the floor in a corner, on a few sacks; he crows at the drawings and is always quiet in the studio, because he looks at the things on the wall."
JLB 342, 5/10/1883: " He often sits with me in the studio on the floor in a corner on a couple of sacks or something, he crows at the drawings and is always quiet in the studio because he looks at the things on the wall."

314. "[When he] comes crawling" BVG 306, 7/27/1883: On the eve of Theo's visit, such moments provided Vincent with his only companionship. We have combined elements from both translations. 

Context:
BVG306, 7/27/1883: "… when I am with them and the little boy comes creeping toward me on all fours, crowing for joy, I haven't the slightest doubt that everything is right."
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: " When I'm with them and the little fellow comes crawling towards me on hands and knees, crowing with delight, I haven't the slightest doubt that it's all right."

315. nervousness, feverishness BVG 302, 7/22/1883. 

Context:
JLB 364, 7/22/1883: "Whether it's fever or nerves or something else I don't know -- but I don't feel well. ... I may have caught a chronic fever or something."

316. faintness BVG 301, 7/22/1883. "One walks along the road with a very weak and faint feeling in the stomach" (JLB 365, 7/23/1883). "I must keep on working, and there's a feeling of weariness that overwhelms me time and again, a general weakness" (JLB 364, 7/22/1883). 

Context:
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "I, too, have an enormous feeling of faintness at times in the dunes or elsewhere, because there's nothing coming in."

317. dizziness BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883. "A sort of dizziness sometimes, and headache too now and again" (JLB 370, 8/3/1883). 

Context:
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "For the rest, I'm not yet exactly back to normal. It may be that my stomach is somewhat weakened, which is what I conclude from the symptom of dizzy spells in the head, etc., which are sufficiently troublesome to make doing something about them an urgent matter."

318. upset stomach BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883. 

Context:
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "I got some nourishing things with what you sent, but I have little appetite because my stomach isn't working properly, and I fear it will be some time before that clears up."

319. "a pain between" BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883: On this complaint, Vincent is almost clinically specific. 

Context:
BVG305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883: "What I told you about my feeling rather weak is true. It has now settled into a pain between the shoulders and in the lumbar vertebrae."
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "What I said to you about not feeling strong is true, it has now come down to pain between the shoulders and in the lumbar vertebra."

320. "a feeling of prostration" BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883. 

Context:
BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883: "I must go on with my work, but a feeling of prostration overwhelms me again and again -- a general faintness, a reaction after exertion, which keeps returning, and which I must try to overcome, otherwise it will get worse."
JLB 364, 7/22/1883: "I must keep on working, and there's a feeling of weariness that overwhelms me time and again, a general weakness that's a reaction to exertion and keeps recurring, but which I must do something about or it will get worse."

343 321. "I feel miserable" BVG 302, 7/22/1883. 

Context:
BVG302, 7/22/1883: "Except for what I told you about, there is nothing the matter with me, and things are going well -- but perhaps I am a little feverish or something -- I feel miserable."
JLB 364, 7/22/1883: "Apart from what I've already written, there's nothing particular wrong with me and things carry on as normal -- but I may have caught a chronic fever or something, and have suddenly fallen ill."

322. indictment of his brother's stinginess BVG 303, 7/23/1883. 

Context:
JLB 365, 7/23/1883: "If I don't have a little extra on occasion, I have to pay out so much each time when I receive the normal amount that not much is left for the 10 days that lie ahead, on the last of which one walks along the road with a very weak and faint feeling in the stomach."

323. "I have a faint" BVG 301, 7/22/1883. 

Context:
BVG 301, 7/22/1883: "And it happens to me, too: when I am sitting in the dunes or somewhere else, I have a faint feeling in my stomach because there isn't enough to eat."
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: " I, too, have an enormous feeling of faintness at times in the dunes or elsewhere, because there's nothing coming in."

324. dizzy spells that lingered BVG 308, 8/2/1883. 

Context:
JLB 370, 8/3/1883: "I don't feel entirely well yet, but fortunately the work is so animating that as long as I am busy, I don't feel the weakness so much; but it overtakes me occasionally during the intervals when I am not in front of my easel. Sometimes it's a kind of dizziness, and at times a headache too. Well, it's nothing but weakness. I have repeatedly put off taking more nourishing food because there were other things more pressing, but it has lasted a little too long."

325. stirred the darkest fears BVG 306, 7/27/1883: Vincent writes ominously and cryptically of his illness. 

Context:
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "In a few days, when I shall have had some more nourishing food than recently, I think I shall get rid of my worst depression; but it is more deeply rooted than that."

326. "overwrought nerves" BVG 306, 7/27/1883: Vincent couches this darkest of anxieties in the densest of language. 

Context:
BVG306, 7/27/1883: "I think one may consider these thoughts partly the consequence of overwrought nerves, and if one has them, one must not think it one's duty to believe that things are really as gloomy as one supposes; if one did, it would make one mad."
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "I believe one has the right to regard those thoughts as the consequence, in part, of stress and if one has them one shouldn't make it a duty to believe things are indeed as black as one then thinks but, because if one were to worry about it one would go mad."

327. the danger of melancholy BVG 306, 7/27/1883. 

Context:
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "… it's reasonable to strengthen oneself physically in that case, and really set to work when that has been done, and if that doesn't help continue nonetheless with these two remedies and regard it as something fatal if that melancholy persists. In time one will gain in strength of mind and carry on with life." (Emphasis in original.)

328. fatality of madnessBVG 306, 7/27/1883. (See Ch. 19, n. 326.) 

Context:
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "I believe one has the right to regard those thoughts as the consequence, in part, of stress and if one has them one shouldn't make it a duty to believe things are indeed as black as one then thinks but, because if one were to worry about it one would go mad, on the contrary, it's reasonable to strengthen oneself physically in that case, and really set to work when that has been done, and if that doesn't help continue nonetheless with these two remedies and regard it as something fatal if that melancholy persists. In time one will gain in strength of mind and carry on with life." (Emphasis in original.)

329. Breitner's garret room BVG 299, 7/11/1883. 

Context:
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "Imagine, I go to the garret that he has at Siebenhaar's."

330. "with a razor" BVG 299, 7/11/1883. In the strained mocking tone that pervades his account of the visit to Breitner's, Vincent adds that the studio was "furnished" with "various matchboxes (empty)," invoking an image of the artist smoking furiously (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). 

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "It has been furnished in the main with various (empty) matchboxes, and for the rest with a razor or the like and a box with a bed in it."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "It was furnished mainly with various matchboxes (empty), and then with a razor or something, and a cupboard with a bed in it."

331. hurried strokes Vincent describes Breitner's work as "like something done in haste by Vierge; but when he, that is B[reitner] is too hasty or doesn't work things through, which is usually the case, it's difficult to say what it resembles, for it looks like nothing" (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). The reference is to Daniel Urrabieta Vierge, known primarily for his illustrations, which appeared in magazines like Vie Moderne, Scribner's, Harper's, and L'Illustration, the last of which Vincent cites specifically (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). Vierge also illustrated works by Victor Hugo (e.g., Notre-Dame de Paris [1882]) and Jules Michelet (e.g., L'Histoire de la Révolution [1877]). Where Vincent would have seen Vierge's paintings -- as implied by the comparison to Breitner -- is not clear. In fact, the reference to Vierge in this context is more apt than Vincent could have known in 1883. About a decade later, Vierge was struck by hemiplegia, losing completely the use of his right side and impairing his reason. Through a long, courageous struggle, he regained some use of his left hand and returned to illustrating books, including Don Quixote in 1893, although he had to have the texts read to him in a loud voice. The artistic community eventually honored his struggle with a medal of honor for his illustrations for Don Pablo de Segovie by Francisco Gómez de Quevedo y Villegas, and a Legion of Honor.  332. "like patches of faded color" BVG 299, 7/11/1883: Vincent's descriptions of the three paintings by Breitner are longer and more sarcastic than almost anywhere else in the letters, suggesting a considerable defensive effort to distance himself from them. In his letter, Vincent supplemented these descriptions with sketches of each painting. 

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "From a distance it looks like patches of faded colour on a bleached, mouldering and mildewy wallpaper and in that respect it has some qualities, which to me are none the less positively objectionable."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "From a distance they're areas of faded colour as on bleached and rotting and mouldering wallpaper, and in that sense there are qualities in it that are absolutely unpalatable to me."

333. "absurd" BVG 299, 7/11/1883: Not just absurd, but "couldn't be more absurd" (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). 

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "Now, you try to imagine something like that, but on ne peut plus absurd and heavy-handed to boot, and you have the work of friend Breitner."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "You see, try to picture such a thing, but it couldn't be more absurd, and heavy-handed as well, and you have the work of Friend Breitner."

334. "ridiculous" BVG 299, 7/11/1883. 

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "That's why I believe B. will be all right again, but I do find this stuff ridiculous."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "This is why I think that B. will be all right in the end, but I find this absurd."

335. "weird" BVG 299, 7/11/1883: Vincent uses the word in English, treating it as a distinctly English expression. Vincent apparently means to invoke the nascent genre of science-fiction. In addition to the mention of Jules Verne elsewhere in the same letter, he cites favorably two authors who were pioneers in the literary style that spawned Symbolism in the nineteenth century and Surrealism in the twentieth century, and launched thousands of horror movies: "I like the work of Hoffmann and Edgar Poe on occasion. (Contes fantastiques, Raven &c.)" (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). The reference is to Ernst Theodor Amadeus Hoffmann, a German writer, composer, critic, and caricaturist, whose tales of the fantastic and supernatural were collected in a French translation, Contes fantastiques (Fantastic Tales) (1830-1831), which is probably the volume Vincent cites. 

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "But I look on [Breitner's work] as the result of a spell of ill-health. Van der Weele also has two rather curious little watercolours of his, stylishly done, which have a touch, a certain je ne sais quoi, of what the English call 'weird.' "
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "But I regard [Breitner's work] as a period of illness. Van der Weele has two rather curious drawings by him, elegantly done in watercolour, which have a certain je ne sais quoi of what the English call 'weird'" (emphasis in original).

336. "impossible and meaningless" BVG 299, 7/11/1883. 

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "They are like something seen in a fever, impossible and meaningless as in the most preposterous dream."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "It's the sort of thing one sees when one has a fever -- or impossible and meaningless as in a dream that makes no sense at all."

337. "in a fever" BVG 299, 7/11/1883.

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "They are like something seen in a fever, impossible and meaningless as in the most preposterous dream."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "It's the sort of thing one sees when one has a fever -- or impossible and meaningless as in a dream that makes no sense at all."

338. "strayed far from" BVG 299, 7/11/1883.

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "Imperceptibly he has strayed far from a composed and rational view of things, and so long as this nervous exhaustion persists he will be unable to produce a single composed, sensible line or brushstroke."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "Imperceptibly he has strayed terribly far from a calm, rational contemplation of things, and now he can't put down a single calm, reasonable line or brushstroke as long as this stress continues."

339. painting by Émile Wauters BVG 299, 7/11/1883. Émile Wauters painted The Madness of Hugo van der Goes in 1872. Wauter's brother Alphonse had written a biography of Hugo van der Goes, the Flemish artist, in 1864 and the painting incorporates some specific elements of the medieval artist's story: the hovering monks at the monastery where he sought refuge, the young choirboys singing to ease his inner torments. Vincent's reference to longstanding rumors of Breitner's mental problems may have some substance, although neither Breitner's colleagues nor posterity has ever questioned that painter's sanity. We suspect that Vincent is confusing criticisms of Breitner's unconventional style and subject matter with concerns about his mental health -- a conflation that reflects Vincent's worries about the relationship between his own rejected art and his own mental state. 

Context:
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "You remember the painting The madness of Hugo van der Goes by Wauters? In some things B. faintly reminds me of a state of mind like Van der Goes's. I'd not like to be the first to say this, but I believe his work has already been discussed in these terms for some considerable time."

340. insane fifteenth-century painter Hugo van der Goes was stricken by an unidentified mental illness on a return trip from Rome in 1475. He retired from art and entered a monastery, the Roode Clooster near Brussels, seeking a cure for his illness. He died seven years later. According to his chronicler, a monk at Roode Clooster named Gaspar Ofhuys, Van der Goes was "deeply troubled by the thought of how he could ever finish the works of art he wanted to paint." The quotation is from the Chronicle of the Roode Clooster (or Red Cloister), written in Latin (c. 1512) by the monk Gaspar Ofhuys. The chronicle was discovered, translated, and published by A. J. Wauters, "Originale Cenobii Rebeevallis in Zonia Prope Bruxellam in Brabantia," Bulletin de l'Academie Royale de Belgique II (1863), pp. 723-743.  341. "overcome by a depression" BVG 302, 7/22/1883: We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG302, 7/22/1883: "I have tried to work a little today, but suddenly I was overcome by a depression which I cannot exactly account for."
JLB 364, 7/22/1883: "I did do some work today, but I was overcome all at once by a malaise in my very marrow, and I don't exactly know what to attribute it to."

342. "difficulties [that] rise" BVG 306, 7/27/1883. 

Context:
BVG306, 7/27/1883: "Yes, then it is sometimes difficult, and when circumstances occur which make the difficulties rise like a tidal wave, one is almost sorry to be the way one is, and would wish to have been less conscientious."
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "Yes, then it's sometimes difficult, and if conditions are such that the difficulties rise to a spring flood, one can be led to regret that one is as one is and wish one had been less conscientious."

343. "the doubt that overwhelms" BVG 306, 7/27/1883. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 306, 7/27/1883: "When I am at work, I have an unlimited faith in art and the conviction that I shall succeed; but in days of physical prostration or when there are financial obstacles, I feel that faith diminishing, and a doubt overwhelms me, which I try to conquer by setting to work again at once."
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "While I'm working I feel an unlimited confidence in art and that I'll succeed, but on days of physical exhaustion or when there are financial obstacles I feel that faith less and am overcome by doubt, which I try to get over by immediately setting to work."

344. "One must not believe" BVG 306, 7/27/1883. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 306, 7/27/1883: "I think one may consider these thoughts partly the consequence of overwrought nerves, and if one has them, one must not think it one's duty to believe that things are really as gloomy as one supposes; if one did, it would make one mad."
JLB 368, 7/27/1883: "I believe one has the right to regard those thoughts as the consequence, in part, of stress and if one has them one shouldn't make it a duty to believe things are indeed as black as one then thinks but, because if one were to worry about it one would go mad …"

345. straight through past sunrise BVG 294, 6/15/1883-6/17/1883. In another letter a week later, Vincent includes a wonderful description of daybreak outside his window: "It's not yet 4 o'clock [a.m.]. Yesterday evening there was thunder and last night it rained. It's dry now but everything's dripping and the sky is grey, but broken here and there by darker or lighter masses of cloud, neutral tint or yellowish white, which shift their position. Because it's still so early the green is greyish and toned; along the small wet road comes a farmer in an indigo smock on a brown horse that he has fetched from a field. The city in the background is a grey silhouette, but also toned, in which the wet red roofs show up clearly. It's more like Daubigny than Corot because of the variation of colour in the ground and the green, the vividness of everything." (JLB 356, 6/22/1883; emphasis in original.) 

Context:
JLB 355, 6/16/1883: "I won't sleep much tonight again because of the drawing. But it's very pleasant with a pipe at night when everything's quiet, and the dawn and the sunrise is glorious."

346. smoking his pipeBVG 294, 6/15/1883-6/17/1883. (See Ch. 19, n. 345.) 

Context:
JLB 355, 6/16/1883: "But it's very pleasant with a pipe at night when everything's quiet, and the dawn and the sunrise is glorious."

347. "dropped with exhaustion" BVG 294, 6/15/1883-6/17/1883: Vincent couches this report in the usual generalized (i.e., exculpatory) third person. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 294, 6/15/1883-6/17/1883: "But just when one feels so much attracted by the work, one must stick to it till one drops with exhaustion, so to speak."
JLB 355, 6/16/1883: "But precisely when one is so strongly drawn by the work, one must continue with it until one is fit to drop, so to speak."

348. "serenity" BVG 295, 6/22/1883. 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "I have a great serenity and good spirits in regard to the work, and I have so much to do that it quite absorbs me."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "I have a great deal of serenity and cheerfulness and so much to do that it completely absorbs me."

349. bristled with defensiveness Theo's report on an exhibition in Paris called "Les Cent Chefs-d'Oeuvre" (The Hundred Masterpieces) triggered a surge of self-justification as Vincent took every compliment of other art as a criticism of his own. "And when one remembers -- at the time there were some people who were rather suspect as regards their character, intentions and genius, according to public opinion, people of whom the most absurd things were said, Millet, Corot, Daubigny, etc., who were regarded more or less the way the village constable regards a stray shaggy dog or a tramp without a passport, and time passes and lo and behold 'the hundred masterpieces', and if a hundred isn't enough, then innumerable. Let alone what becomes of the village constables. Little remains of them except some notes of the testimony as a curiosity. Yet it remains a drama, I believe, the history of the great men -- given too that they not only had to deal with village constables during their lifetimes, since usually they're no longer with us when their work is publicly recognized, and during their lifetimes they were under some pressure for a long time because of the opposition and the difficulty of struggling through life. And so whenever I hear of the public recognition of the merits of some people, I think all the more of the quiet, slightly sombre figures of those who had few personal friends, and in their simplicity I find them even greater and more poignant like that." (JLB 358, 7/2/1883; emphasis in original.)

In only a few paragraphs, Vincent manages to pack most of the arguments he has made over the last two years in defense of his ignored art: (1) Public opinion is tardy and fickle and often flat-out wrong (message: Tersteeg is wrong about me); (2) Great artists go unrecognized (as I am); (3) Great artists are recognized after their time (as I still might be); (4) Great artists face depression and obstacles (as I do); (5) Great artists were often simple and without friends (as I am); and (6) The illustrators that I admire are unrecognized great artists (like me). 

350. "I, too, shall be"BVG 305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883. 

Context:
BVG305, 7/25/1883-7/26/1883: "I think, Theo, that if I can work on regularly and calmly, I, too, shall be able to make something of the kind in the future."
JLB 367, 7/25/1883: "I believe, Theo, that I too could do something like that through carrying on working regularly and calmly in the future."

344 351. "Taking a rest"BVG 303, 7/23/1883. 

Context:
BVG303, 7/23/1883: " Taking a rest is out of the question, but I think it would be a good thing to find distraction in a change of subjects and style."
JLB 365, 7/23/1883: " There's no question of resting, but I believe that finding a diversion by changing the manner of work and the subjects would be a good thing."

352. to feel that tug again The letters in the two to three weeks before Theo's arrival in mid-August are filled with the language of the Rijswijk mill, transmuted to the Scheveningen beach. Vincent conflates, perhaps intentionally, (1) his nostalgia for a better, simpler time in his relationship with Theo; (2) his nostalgia for the earlier days of the seaside fishing village; (3) the brothers' shared fondness for the artists of an earlier era; and (4) their shared love of nature. "I thought of you particularly on that walk. I don't doubt that you'll agree with me that in the last 10 years the dunes in the vicinity of the city and Scheveningen have lost much of what was real and, another thing, are taking on a more frivolous character, more so each year. Now, not just 10 but 30 or even 40 or 50 years ago was when the painting of the dunes &c. in their true character started. At that time things were more Ruisdael-like than now. If one wants to see something that evokes a Daubigny, a Corot atmosphere, one must go further along to where the ground is almost untouched by the footsteps of visitors, etc. Scheveningen is undoubtedly very beautiful but nature there has long ceased to be virgin -- well, I found the virginity of nature to be outstanding on the walk I told you about." (JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883) Vincent, of course, sealed this remarkable conflation with an image: "While writing this letter I've started a watercolour of that bush; I've painted a study of the other thing, that jetty. And in any event, this way I have a souvenir of the walk that I can show you when you come. And if you like we can walk there together when you come." (ibid.)  353. "I shouldn't be" BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883. 

Context:
BVG307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: " I shouldn't be surprised if you also remember that spot once you had walked there."
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: " It wouldn't surprise me if you were also to remember that landscape if you walked there."

354. "I think if we were" BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883. 

Context:
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "I believe that if we were there together, that spot would put you and me into a mood in which we wouldn't hesitate about the work but firmly feel what our intentions should be."

355. "oscillations" BVG 259, 1/11/1883. 

Context:
BVG 259, 1/11/1883: "… one passes from melancholy to animation and enthusiasm; and this will always remain so -- only the oscillations become stronger."
JLB 300, 1/10/1883: "So one goes from melancholy to cheerfulness and enthusiasm, and this will always remain and the swings will only get stronger."

356. "I can give you little" BVG 301, 7/22/1883: Vincent quotes the words directly from Theo's letter. Apparently, Theo's message was cryptic. At first Vincent seems unsure of its intended significance -- or perhaps chooses not to see it. Initially, he responds with questions to clarify its meaning, perhaps trying to find a meaning other than the most obvious, hurtful one: "If you mean that only in relation to financial matters, I wouldn't be downcast, but if I'm to take it as applying to my work, I really don't see how I deserve that. It just so happens that I can now send you the prints of photos after a few of my recent drawings, which I promised you earlier but couldn't manage because I was flat broke. I don't know how you intended those words, nor can I know. Your letter is too brief." (JLB 363, 7/22/1883.) A little later in the same letter, Vincent grapples faint-heartedly with the worst possibilities: "Anyway -- it would be nothing, Theo, if only I could hold on to the thought: it will work all the same, just press on. But now to me your words 'as for the future, I can give you little hope' are like 'the hair that breaks the camel's back at last'. The burden is sometimes so heavy that one hair more makes the animal fall to the ground." (ibid., emphasis in original.) Vincent is obviously reaching for the English cliché about a straw, not a hair, breaking a camel's back. 

Context:
BVG301, 7/22/1883: "So now my first batch of photographs for you to show to some artists coincides with your 'I can give you little hope for the future.' Has anything happened?"
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "So now my first consignment of photos to be shown to someone or other if needed coincides with your 'as for the future, I can give you little hope'. Is there something in particular???"

357. "They hit me" BVG 301, 7/22/1883: In the original, Vincent refers to the letter, not the specific words, but the latter are clearly the source of his pain. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG301, 7/22/1883: "Thanks for your letter, thanks for the enclosure, though I cannot repress a feeling of sadness at your saying, 'I can give you little hope for the future.' ... I do not know what you mean by that expression, how can I know it? Your letter is too short, but it hit me unexpectedly right in the heart."
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "I thank you for your letter, and for the enclosure, although I can't suppress a feeling of sadness over what you say, 'as for the future, I can give you little hope'. ... I don't know how you intended those words, nor can I know. Your letter is too brief, but it gave me an unexpected blow right in the chest."

358. "I feel my ardor" BVG 301, 7/22/1883. 

Context:
BVG301, 7/22/1883: "But I feel my ardour vanishing, one needs to have a fixed point somewhere. When you say, "Set your hopes on the future," it sounds to me as if you yourself had no confidence in me. Is this true?"
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "But I feel my enjoyment fading, one needs a fixed point somewhere. You see, the fact that you say to me, just have hope for the future, is as if you yourself no longer have any hope for me. Is that so?"

359. self-doubt and self-reproach BVG 303, 7/23/1883: Vincent tries to tease this image of emotional doom into a conceit of unlikely salvation. 

Context:
JLB 365, 7/23/1883: "Still, after all, whatever may come, I hope not to restrain myself weakly, and have hope that a certain fever and fury of work will carry me through it if it comes to the worst, as a boat can be hurled over a reef or a sandbank by the swell and can take advantage of the storm not to founder. Yet such manoeuvres don't always work, and it would be desirable to sail round the spot by tacking. After all, if it fails, what is lost in me?" (Emphasis in original.)

360. "All my troubles" BVG 302, 7/22/1883: We have altered tenses in the first and third sentences cited so that the entire excerpt is in the present tense, whereas Vincent skips back and forth between tenses, putting his reaction to Theo's letter in the past tense, even though he read it only hours before, if that. We think the present tense better represents his current state of mind at the time he is writing. 

Context:
BVG302, 7/22/1883: "I had written you early this morning, but after I had mailed my letter, it suddenly seemed as if all my troubles crowded together to overwhelm me, and it became too much for me because I could no longer look clearly into the future. I can't put it any other way, and I can't understand why I shouldn't succeed in my work. I have put all my heart into it, and, for a moment at least, that seemed to me a mistake. But, boy, you know it yourself -- what things in practical life must one devote one's strength and thought and energy to? One must take a chance and say, I will do a certain thing and carry it through. Well, then it may turn out wrong, and one may hit an impenetrable barrier when people do not care for it; but one needn't care after all, need one? I don't think one has to worry over it; but sometimes it becomes too hard, and one feels miserable against one's will."
JLB 364, 7/22/1883: "I wrote to you early this morning, but when I had posted my letter it was just as if suddenly all the trouble I had had with one thing and another gathered itself together and it was too much for me, because I could no longer comprehend the future. Otherwise I cannot say -- cannot understand -- why the work shouldn't be making progress. I've set my whole heart on it, and that seemed to me a mistake, at least for the moment. Still, old chap, you know yourself, on what (in practice, in real life), to what should one give one's strength and one's thoughts and mental powers? One must have a stab at it and say, I'll do something and carry it through. Now and then it may turn out wrong and one may come up against a wall if people don't want to have it, but still one needn't take it to heart, need one? I don't believe that one should make oneself ill over it, but sometimes it becomes too much for someone and one falls ill, even though one would rather not."

361. "I am only a burden to you" BVG 302, 7/22/1883. Interestingly, even in this seemingly genuine paroxysm of guilt, Vincent defends himself: "And I can't help it, for one must go through many periods to become good, and in the meantime what one produces isn't bad because of that if one does one's best" (JLB 364, 7/22/1883). 

Context:
BVG302, 7/22/1883: "And now I thought, I am sorry that I didn't fall ill and die in the Borinage that time, instead of taking up painting, for I am only a burden to you."
JLB 364, 7/22/1883: "Now I thought that I was sorry that I didn't get ill and give up the ghost somewhere in the Borinage years ago instead of painting. For I'm just a burden to you."

362. Thoughts of death BVG 309, 8/4/1883-8/8/1883: Vincent begins his rumination on shortened life and early death with this statement. 

Context:
JLB 371, 8/7/1883: "For no particular reason I can't help adding something here that's just a recurring thought of mine. Not only did I start drawing relatively late, but on top of that I can't count on living for a great many years, relatively speaking."

363. The lonely beach BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883. 

Context:
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "The flat areas there behind Loosduinen, it's just like Michel, and the lonely beach too."

364. "gloomy mood" BVG 307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883. 

Context:
BVG307, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "I think if we were together on that spot, it would put you and me into a mood such that we would not hesitate about the work, but feel decisive about what we have to do. Was it a chance harmony of my rather gloomy mood with those surroundings, or shall I find the same impressions there again in the future?"
JLB 369, 7/29/1883-7/30/1883: "I believe that if we were there together, that spot would put you and me into a mood in which we wouldn't hesitate about the work but firmly feel what our intentions should be. Was it due to a chance correspondence between a rather sombre mood and those surroundings, or will I have the same impressions there again in the future?"

365. a magazine profileBVG 309, 8/4/1883-8/8/1883: Vincent does not identify the artist explicitly, but later in the same letter, when he returns to the general topic of artists dying early, he uses the name Guillaume Régamey, a French painter and illustrator. This suggests that Régamey was the artist profiled in the English magazine piece. Vincent supplies some of Régamey's biographical information, presumably drawn from the same article: "[He was] someone who doesn't have much of a reputation (as you know, there are two Régameys, F. Régamey paints Japanese and is his brother), but was a character for whom I have great respect all the same. He died at the age of 38, and a period of 6 or 7 years was devoted almost exclusively to drawings that are in a very singular style and were done while working was made difficult by physical problems. He is one of many -- a very good person among many good people." (JLB 371, 8/7/1883.) Actually, Guillaume Régamey died on January 3, 1875, at age thirty-seven, more than eight months shy of his thirty-eighth birthday on September 22. Also, Guillaume Régamey had two brothers, not one, both with the first initial "F." Vincent is referring to Félix Régamey, who traveled to Japan in the 1870s. He returned to France in 1881 and published illustrations of his travels, some of which Vincent collected. The third brother was Frédéric Régamey. 

Context:
JLB 371, 8/7/1883: "Lately I've thought sometimes of a story that I read in an English magazine, a tale of a painter in which a person featured who had also been weakened during a difficult time, and went to a remote area in the peat fields and found himself in the melancholy nature there, so to speak, and was able to paint nature as he felt and saw it. It was very accurately described in the story, evidently by someone who knew about art, and it struck me when I read it, and I've now been thinking of it from time to time these past few days."

366. "Not only did I start"BVG 309, 8/4/1883-8/8/1883: Apparently taking his cue from the article about Guillaume Régamey, who died at age thirty-eight, Vincent calculates very specifically the time he has left to live: "I think I may safely presume that my body will hold up for a certain number of years quand bien même [in spite of everything] -- a certain number between 6 and 10, say." His estimate turns out to be accurate. He was thirty when he wrote this; he died at age thirty-seven. 

Context:
JLB 371, 8/7/1883: "Not only did I start drawing relatively late, but on top of that I can't count on living for a great many years, relatively speaking."

367. Transforming a frisson It should also be noted, less flatteringly to Vincent, that this entire morose train of thought is probably being used, self-consciously we believe, as an argument. The telltale signs are the appearance, embedded in the new narrative of mortality, of some of the arguments that he has used before: "A certain desire to make every effort will thus seem to you all the more understandable. At the same time a certain resolve to use simple means. And perhaps you'll also be able to understand that, for my part, I don't view my studies in isolation, but always have in mind the work as a whole." (JLB 371, 8/7/1883.) The larger plea also contains numerous oblique restatements of arguments used before: about drawing ("Thus this work is the goal -- and concentrating on that thought, what one does and does not do simplifies itself in that it's not a chaos"); about his lack of progress ("Now the work is going slowly -- all the more reason not to lose any time"); about Impressionism ("to leave a certain souvenir in the form of drawings or paintings in gratitude"); and, of course, about the need for more money to relieve his financial worries without having to take a job ("So I carry on as one unknowing but who knows this one thing -- 'I must finish a particular work within a few years' -- I needn't rush myself, for that does no good -- but I must CARRY ON working in calm and serenity, as regularly and concentratedly as possible, as succinctly as possible" [ibid., emphasis in original]). It is also a reflection on the argument that, immediately after Theo's visit, Vincent's attitude toward his longevity and mortality appears to become considerably less dire: "Weissenbruch said something similar to me last year -- you carry on quietly, and when you're old you'll look back calmly on your earliest studies" (JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883).  345 368. "I would like" BVG 309, 8/4/1883-8/8/1883: We have slightly altered the translation. We should note the conflict between the two emotions that Vincent conjoins in this ringing declaration of new purpose: he wants to accomplish "something with heart and love," but he wants to do it "with willpower" (JLB 371, 8/7/1883). This contradiction lies at the heart of Vincent's emotional life. He wants to force the world -- first and foremost his family -- to love him. That, of course, is the one thing he cannot force, no matter how much willpower and self-control he exerts. It is unlikely that Vincent recognized this contradiction. He apparently truly believed that, just as Theo could be coaxed and coached into admiring his work, just as Sien could be persuaded to gratitude by his pity and sacrifice, so Tersteeg and Mauve and Ma and Pa and, of course, Theo, could be forced by the power of his will to love him. 

Context:
BVG 309, 8/4/1883-8/8/1883: "The world concerns me only in so far as I owe it certain debt and duty, so to speak, because I have walked this earth for 30 years, and out of gratitude would like to leave some memento in the form of drawings and paintings -- not made to please this school or that, but to express a genuine human feeling. … That is how I regard myself, as having to accomplish in a few years something full of heart and love, and to do it with a will. Should I live longer, tant mieux, [so much the better] but I put that out of my mind. Something must be accomplished in those few years, this thought guides all my plans."
JLB 371, 8/7/1883: "I'm concerned with the world only in that I have a certain obligation and duty, as it were -- because I've walked the earth for 30 years -- to leave a certain souvenir in the form of drawings or paintings in gratitude. … I see myself in a similar way -- as having to do something with heart and love in it within a few years, and do it with willpower. If I live longer, so much the better, but I'm not thinking about that. In those few years SOMETHING MUST BE DONE -- that thought is my guiding principle in making plans for the work." (Emphasis in original.)

369. "The only thing" BVG 310, 8/11/1883. 

Context:
BVG310, 8/11/1883: " The only thing I want is to make some good work 'quand bien même,' and there is a chance of doing this if we keep our serenity, whether the future is dark or not."
JLB 372, 8/12/1883 or 8/13/1883: " By which I mean only that I want to do something good, come what may, and there's a chance of bringing that about if we keep our serenity, dark future or no dark future."

370. Theo's train arrived Theo had left Paris sometime around August 11 and gone to Nuenen to stay with his parents (JLB 372, 8/12/1883 or 8/13/1883). He left Nuenen on August 17 and changed trains in Breda. ("I gather you plan to leave Breda at 2.15 on Friday. If there's any change in your travel plans, let me know, and I'll meet your train." [JLB 373, 8/14/1883.]) After his brief visit, Theo returned to Nuenen. ("[W]rite me one more letter while you're in Nuenen" [JLB 376, 8/19/1883]; "At the moment you're in Nuenen" [JLB 377, 8/20/1883].)  371. Friday, August 17 Vincent wrote Theo three days before his arrival: "I've just received a letter from home ... and I gather you plan to leave Breda at 2.15 on Friday" (JLB 373, 8/14/1883). We are relying on Hulsker's calculation of the train time from Breda to The Hague: "The visit can only have lasted a very short time, because Théo arrived from Nuenen late in the afternoon of 17 August 1883 and returned the same day" (Hulsker, Vincent and Theo, p. 156).  372. only stopped between trainsThe exact hour of Theo's departure is not known, but Vincent wrote him a letter later the night of August 17, after his departure (JLB 375, 8/18/1883). He may not have been going directly back to Nuenen, although he had returned there by August 19 (JLB 376, 8/19/1883).  373. Theo may not have visitedThere is no indication, even indirect, that Theo visited the studio during his brief visit. Theo's only comment about Vincent's work (the only one Vincent records, at least) is its "manly approach and perception" -- a comment that could have been based on the drawings, descriptions, and (recently) photographs Vincent had already sent (JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883). It is reasonable to assume that if Theo had leveled any negative criticism of Vincent's work, the subsequent letters would have been filled with rebuttals. In the absence of affirmative evidence of a studio visit, one can easily imagine Theo's reasons for not wanting to visit Vincent's apartment. If, in fact, he did not, that in itself would constitute a provocative act of rejection.  374. "manliness" BVG 317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883: It is possible that this "say" appeared in a letter that Theo wrote shortly after his visit to The Hague. There is no mention of it in the letter that Vincent wrote immediately after Theo left (JLB 375, 8/18/1883), although that letter was preoccupied with refighting the battles that had been engaged during their brief time together; this rare "compliment" of his work would not have qualified as a causus belli. Vincent cites this compliment in another letter soon after Theo's visit, but without attributing it directly to Theo: "What we must work at is getting yet more of a manly element into it. I don't think you'll have to retract your view that you already see something of that, particularly not when I have my strength back." (JLB 378, 8/21/1883; emphasis in original.)

This sequence of thoughts clearly suggests Theo is the author of the phrase "manly element." However, if Theo did not share this positive critique until after his visit, then any opinion of Vincent's art that Theo expressed during his visit must have been more negative; because, in the same letter as the "manly" comment, Vincent writes with some relief, "I'm still very pleased with your revised opinion of the work," and says that Theo's " revised opinion agrees with Van Rappard's [and with] Van der Weele [who] also thinks that my work has something" (JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883; emphasis in original). If "manly" is the "revised opinion" referred to here, then the thrust of Theo's opinion at the time of his visit must have been that there was "nothing" in Vincent's work. This would only make the point in the text stronger. 

Context:
BVG317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883: "… the better work I do later will cast a reflection on the work I am doing now, and will show more clearly that even now there is already some truth and simplicity in it, and as you yourself express it, a manly conception and perception."
JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883: "Later, through better work, there will come a reflection about what I'm doing now which will make it clearer that even now it already has an element of simplicity and truth and, because you say it yourself, of a manly approach and perception." (Emphasis in original.)

375. "nice long walk" BVG 310, 8/11/1883: 

Context:
BVG310, 8/11/1883: "I am quite sure that at all events our being together will calm me down. I hope we shall take some nice long walks together, too."
JLB 372, 8/12/1883 or 8/13/1883: "I firmly believe that our being together will calm me down at any rate. I hope we'll also go for a long walk together."

376. they fought bitterly The heat of this conversation can be felt in Vincent's immediate, frantic, and extended effort to limit the damage from it in a letter written right after Theo got on the train that night (JLB 375, 8/18/1883). Statements like "I fear I've said something to you about the work that I ought to have put differently," his belated and florid expressions of gratitude, his unusual admissions of guilt, and his strained efforts to "unsay" some of his harshest comments ("Forget about that, you'd be doing me a favour if you took that as unsaid") all point to a fierce exchange indeed (ibid.). Vincent describes how the conversation got out of control, couching his confession, of course, in general terms: "I think that if that turns out all right, it will turn out all right by itself through time when I'm calm, but in nervousness I blame it now on this, now on that. It's the same with other things, which I don't want to drag up now, although I later remember what I say, even in nervousness, and a grain of it may be right, yet not all beginnings have a continuation, and in nervous tension they often seem more than they are." (ibid.)

Not until months later, however, does Vincent allow himself to use a word like "fight" to characterize their meeting (JLB 413, 12/15/1883). His statement at that time includes, for the first time, a characterization of Theo's attitude during their encounter, which clearly indicates that he, too, made his arguments forcefully, even heatedly (JLB 469, 11/14/1884). Like the other reconstructions in the text, this one is based on Vincent's later recollections of the conversation, some of which come immediately afterward (i.e., the same night), some of which come a full year later. In some cases, Vincent specifically signals that a subject was discussed that night; in others, we have made inferences based on the proximity of report and event. Because Vincent received a letter or letters from Theo in the week after the meeting, some of the topics discussed in Vincent's immediately subsequent letters may have been raised in Theo's letters, not in their conversation. As before, the order of subjects is conjectural, except that Vincent says explicitly that the last topic of discussion was their father ("we talked about Pa, you will recall, during your visit" [JLB 388, 9/21/1883]). 

377. towering rages and fuming silences BVG 328, 9/26/1883: That is the clear implication of this recollection of their conversation from about a month later. 

Context:
JLB 390, 9/26/1883: "I don't dare take it on credit, which would again cause me a considerable bill in time. You know yourself how we weren't exactly in the mood to be able to say more during your visit." Vincent himself raised another old injury at the brothers' reunion in The Hague. Launching a fierce attack on Theo's misguided dedication to Goupil, Vincent tried yet again to lure his brother away from that world, away from their family, away from their father, and convince him that his only true companion in the world was walking beside him at that moment. 

378. Theo's finances were strained BVG 308, 8/2/1883: Theo had already written Vincent to this effect. 

Context:
JLB 370, 8/3/1883: "You remember what you wrote about the possibility of a disappointment with the percentage from the business. Well, I hope that that catastrophe doesn't happen, but we must regard it as a pleasant surprise if it does turn out all right, and not lose a fraction of the time we have left."

379. divided six ways BVG 304, 7/24/1883-7/25/1883: Theo had informed Vincent of this at the end of July. If Vincent was moved by his brother's plight, he did not reveal it, but instead used it to restate his own case: "But the subdivision of my 150 francs among 4 living beings, while all the expenses for models, drawing materials, painting requisites and rent must be paid from them, also makes one think, don't you agree?" (JLB 366, 7/24/1883). 

Context:
JLB 366, 7/24/1883: "The division of your income, directly and indirectly, among no fewer than 6 people is indeed remarkable."

380. shallow, superficial life In his later summary of the conversation, Vincent does not repeat the specifics of what he said about Theo's life, but he apologizes profusely for whatever it was: "If I pass judgement on people, circumstances, circles in which I do not move, it's understandable that I don't hit the mark but fantasize beyond nature and see things very fantastically, just as everything becomes strange when seen against the light. You, who are closer, don't understand how it's possible that they can appear a little like that when seen at a distance, in retrospect." (JLB 375, 8/18/1883.) In retrospect, Vincent wants to attribute his harsh opinions to his status as an artist -- i.e., not to any personal animosity toward his brother: "And even if I saw everything totally wrong, anyone who thought it over would perhaps understand that, given certain events, I can hardly speak otherwise" (ibid.). The other insight into what Vincent said about Theo's life in Paris comes from some obscure commentary on Daudet's Fromont jeune et Risler âiné. "I do NOT see you in Fromont Jeune of course" (JLB 377, 8/20/1883; emphasis in original). Vincent uses the other title character in Daudet's book to defend himself: "But I do see a resemblance between myself and Risler aîné -- in his absorption in his work, his decisiveness in that, while otherwise he was an 'ordinary chap' and fairly nonchalant and short-sighted, his few wants for himself, so that he changed nothing for himself when he became rich" (ibid., emphasis in original).  381. "begging" BVG 314, 8/19/1883. We have removed the emphasis in original. 

Context:
BVG314, 8/19/1883: "Perhaps it will come sooner if one goes on working quietly than if one goes begging for it, or visiting people …"
JLB 376, 8/19/1883: "And perhaps sooner when one works on quietly than when one goes and asks him or visits him" (emphasis in original).

382. It is so painful BVG 312, 8/17/1883.

Context:
BVG 312, 8/17/1883: "It is practically always so painful for me to speak to other people. I am not afraid of it, but I know I make an unfavorable impression."
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "It's so painful for me to talk to most people, I'm not afraid to, but I know I make a disagreeable impression. "

383. The best thing BVG 312, 8/17/1883.

Context:
BVG 312, 8/17/1883: "My opinion is that the best thing would be to work on till art lovers feel drawn towards it of their own accord, instead of having to praise or explain it."
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "And as for how I think about selling, I wanted to say this again. I believe that the best would be if we carry on working until, instead of having to praise or explain it to art lovers or say something to go with it, they feel drawn to it of their own accord."

384. not doing enough to sell Consciously or unconsciously, Vincent started laying the groundwork for this argument the previous month: "As for financial matters, you'll remember writing to me months ago about bad times. My answer was: very well, a reason for us to do our very best on both sides; see that you send me the absolutely essential, I'll get on with making more progress so that perhaps we can place something with the illustrated magazines.'" (JLB 363, 7/22/1883.) "Now I had hoped that perhaps a few of the 10 or 12 drawings could be placed, but that too has fallen through" (JLB 365, 7/23/1883). But Vincent's defenses against Theo's demands for Vincent to do more to sell his own work grow increasingly desperate. At their meeting in The Hague, in the heat of argument, Vincent openly blames his failing career on his brother's inaction. In the letter he wrote immediately after Theo's departure, it is the only accusation that he absolutely, unequivocally withdraws: "Furthermore, if I'm ever less fortunate in the future, in no circumstances -- I say in NO CIRCUMSTANCES -- you understand -- not even if you have to withdraw your help entirely -- shall I regard it as your fault. Which wouldn't need to be said, had I not said things more because of the strong effect of my nerves than because I think you should have said something more adequate at the time when I was calm. Forget about that, you'd be doing me a favour if you took that as unsaid." (JLB 375, 8/18/1883; emphasis in original.)  385. to heal the rifts This is a particularly vivid example of Vincent's delusional efforts to portray himself (and probably see himself) as more sinned against than sinning: "Those who could be friends have become hostile, and appear to want to stay like that. Consider the fact that, after all, I've done nothing that could justify this, at any rate not explain why Mauve, say, or Tersteeg or C.M. are so cool as not to want to see anything or say a word. I find it human that a coolness may arise over one thing or another, but to maintain the coolness now that more than a year has passed, and after repeated attempts at reconciliation, is not kind." (JLB 363, 7/22/1883.) Note that this passage is blatantly self-contradictory. In the first half, Vincent maintains that he has done nothing wrong that would justify the anger of his former friends and family; in the second half, he appears to concede a cause for their anger, but faults them nevertheless for not having accepted his apology.  386. recently spoken to Uncle Cor Two days after Theo leaves The Hague, Vincent writes: "Supposing my faults were just as bad and as indisputable as those of the woman, for instance, then I would like someone to do for me what I've done for the woman, and on several occasions -- to forgive me not by halves but through and through, as if there had been absolutely nothing wrong and never would be. If perhaps you said something to C.M. about me possibly leaving the woman, then please take it back immediately -- I can't do something that now seems to me cruel or merciless." (JLB 376, 8/19/1883.) Since there is no evidence of a letter from Theo until a couple of days later, this passage indicates that the subject was discussed during Theo's Hague visit (JLB 378, 8/21/1883). (The previous mention of Uncle Cor is a bitter one in mid-July, long after Vincent had sent him some sketches in hopes of a sale: "After all, I don't think it very nice of C.M. that I haven't received one syllable in reply to my letter" [JLB 361, 7/11/1883].)

Vincent's demand that Theo take back anything he said to Cor "about me possibly leaving the woman" indicates that this was either a condition imposed by Uncle Cor on his assistance or a promise made by Theo in courting their uncle's support, which may or may not have been elicited by Cor (JLB 376, 8/19/1883). When Theo's letter arrives around August 21, there is more news of the arrangement with Cor. "Your letter arrived today and gave me leeway in many respects. Accept my thanks for the step taken with C.M." (JLB 378, 8/21/1883.) This apparently refers to a firming up of the deal, probably through a conversation between Theo and Cor in Nuenen, where Theo was at the time. Vincent reports in the same letter "having paid my debts with the money from C. M." (ibid.). If the letter did not include payment, the inevitable inference is that Theo gave Vincent money from Uncle Cor when he visited The Hague on August 17. But Vincent adds a caution to his brother which further suggests that the deal was originally somehow conditioned on Vincent's leaving Sien: "I'll thank C.M., send him some studies, otherwise, especially about the woman, nothing " (ibid., emphasis in original). Vincent sent his uncle "a number of studies" a few days later (JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883). 

387. a substantial advance Only a few days after Theo's visit, Vincent reports "having paid my debt with the money from C.M." (JLB 378, 8/21/1883). This is the first mention of this money. Whether or not Theo brought it with him to The Hague to give to Vincent is not settled definitively in the letters, but it is by far the likeliest scenario. Theo may have enclosed it in a letter that he sent Vincent from Nuenen immediately after his visit (one apparently arrived on August 17 [JLB 374, 8/17/1883] and another on August 21 [JLB 378, 8/21/1883]), but this seems highly unlikely both because of the cumbersomeness of registering letters that contained money (as Theo always did after the loss of a letter the previous year) and because Vincent does not explicitly acknowledge receipt of the money in his responses to Theo's letters. In any event, Vincent not only had possession of the money by about August 21 but had already used it to pay his debts. By the next day, he had sent his uncle "a number of studies" (JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883) -- "more than 20" (JLB 380, 9/2/1883) -- clearly following up on the commission that was discussed during Theo's visit. "I don't think he'll be dissatisfied -- moreover, he can exchange them later" (ibid.). A final clue that the money changed hands during the visit is Vincent's report a month later, from Drenthe, indicating that he began repaying his debts as soon as Theo left The Hague: "Since your visit I've paid Leurs more than 30 guilders" (JLB 391, 9/28/1883).  388. would have to leave SienSee Ch. 19, n. 386. Hulsker believes that the pressure to leave Sien came directly from Theo: "Théo had exerted strong pressure on [Vincent] to break away from Sien completely, as is obvious from a much later letter, written at the end of December, when Vincent had met with Sien again; it was one of the most bitter letters he had ever written to Théo. 'Know then that I look back on your visit of last summer, on our conversations at the time, and on what resulted from them with deep regret' (letter 350). Though he saw the decision to leave Sien as his own responsibility, he could not forgive Théo for having influenced that decision." (Hulsker, Vincent and Theo, p. 157.) There is no doubt that Theo wanted Vincent to leave Sien; he had been advocating that since he first learned of her. Theo's hostility to her was well established going into their meeting on August 17. We believe that Theo used Uncle Cor and his willingness to re-engage with Vincent as a new strategy in separating Vincent from his prostitute family.

This kind of indirect assault would have been typical of Theo. The most interesting (and, of course, unanswerable) question is whether and to what extent Theo gave Vincent the money from their uncle conditioned on Vincent leaving Sien. If he did so, whether explicitly or implicitly, Vincent's acceptance of the money constituted a corresponding agreement to break off the relationship. This scenario makes an interesting reprise of Vincent's experience with Kee Vos and her family's rejection of Vincent's suit because he did not have enough money. In his later fury over the incident, Vincent accuses them of "slave trading." Perhaps because of these resonances, Vincent resists being held explicitly accountable to Theo's cold bargain. In a letter soon after his brother's visit, he appears to back away from the "deal" that was effectively sealed by his taking the money: "If perhaps you said something to C.M. about me possibly leaving the woman, then please take it back immediately -- I can't do something that now seems to me cruel or merciless" (JLB 376, 8/19/1883). 

389. cruelty for denying him BVG 350a, 12/15/1883-12/31/1883. 

Context:
JLB 418, 12/28/1883: "Cruel, I repeat, because what is crueller than to deprive such an unfortunate, withered woman and her little child of support?"

390. one true love, Kee Vos The subject of Kee Vos reappears suddenly at this time and turns into a long, agonized reprise of the obsession from two years before. "The few words about it that we exchanged on the road made me feel that nothing has changed in me in this regard, that it is and will remain a wound which I live above but which is there deep down and cannot heal -- years from now it will be what it was the first day" (JLB 374, 8/17/1883). Vincent has not developed this theme (that his frustrated love for Kee drove him into Sien's arms) since the hyperventilating arguments that accompanied Sorrow (F 929a JH 130) in May 1882 (JLB 222, 5/1/1882). (See Chapter 18.) Vincent argues to Theo that the real motive for many of his recent actions has been his unrequited love for Kee. Not just his entanglement with Sien, but also his alienation from their parents. "You will understand, though, that I must avoid everything that might tempt me to hesitate, and so I must keep away from everything and everyone that might remind me of her. As a matter of fact, this year, too, that thought has sometimes made me more decisive than I otherwise would have been, and you see that I can do something like that in such a way that no one truly understands it." (JLB 374, 8/17/1883; emphasis in original.)

This strikes us as an easy out for Vincent -- i.e., "I did it on account of love" -- an invocation of Michelet that he hopes will assuage his perpetually lovelorn brother and relieve the pressure to abandon Sien. If there is any reality to the connection, it is one that Vincent would not have recognized or acknowledged: that his family's rejection of Sien reprised their rejection of his suit of Kee Vos. By claiming to be a victim of love (rather than of his family's failure to love him), Vincent could cast himself as shunning ("I must avoid everything and everybody") rather than shunned, thus finding some delusional consolation at a time when there was little to be found elsewhere. 

391. "a wound that I carry" BVG 313, 8/18/1883. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG313, 8/18/1883: "A simple word said about it during our walk, made me feel that absolutely nothing is changed in me in that respect, that it is and remains a wound which I carry with me, while it lies deep and cannot be healed. After years it will be the same as it was the first day."
JLB 374, 8/17/1883: "The few words about it that we exchanged on the road made me feel that nothing has changed in me in this regard, that it is and will remain a wound which I live above but which is there deep down and cannot heal -- years from now it will be what it was the first day."

346 392. "a faded whore" BVG 350a, 12/15/1883-12/31/1883. 

Context:
BVG350a, 12/15/1883-12/31/1883: "Don't think it will help you if you reason that it was only a question of a faded whore and of bastards."
JLB 418, 12/28/1883: "Don't think that you can fool yourself that it was nothing, or just my imagination; don't think that it will help you to argue that this is just about one faded whore and her bastards."

393. "bastards" BVG 350a, 12/15/1883-12/31/1883. 

Context:
BVG350a, 12/15/1883-12/31/1883: "Don't think it will help you if you reason that it was only a question of a faded whore and of bastards."
JLB 418, 12/28/1883: "Don't think that you can fool yourself that it was nothing, or just my imagination; don't think that it will help you to argue that this is just about one faded whore and her bastards."

394. like Tersteeg During their argument, Theo also reminded Vincent of his frequent complaints about Sien's violent temper and backsliding: "She has been more confiding than normal of late, and the mother had incited her to play some tricks which she didn't want to inflict on me. Things of the kind we talked about when you were here, such as starting a row and the like." (JLB 381, 9/5/1883; emphasis added.) Theo also argued that Vincent's rescue efforts had "corrupted" Sien (JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883). "What you said -- that you thought it would do her good if she was away from me -- is something I would probably agree with myself, were it not that she'd then fall back on her family" (ibid., emphasis in original). Vincent defends her against the charge: "When one thinks for a moment about that neglected, half or rather wholly corrupted character of hers -- which I would say has been dragged through the sewer -- then I for one say, in the end she cannot be other than she is" (ibid., emphasis in original). Theo also argued that it could only do Sien good to be on her own (an argument that applied to Vincent as well). But Vincent stood fast in her defense ("she cannot be other than she is" [ibid.]) and in his own ("I can no more do otherwise" [JLB 376, 8/19/1883]).  395. fathered Sien's child Not surprisingly, this accusation never surfaces explicitly in Vincent's letters. At the time, it can be seen only in cryptic references like this: "Let us not suspect each other of absurd things and we'll continue to get by" (JLB 375, 8/18/1883); and especially this long, tortured passage: "When I say I'm a poor painter and still face years of struggle -- in my daily life I have to arrange things more or less as a farm labourer or factory worker does -- then that's a fixed point from which many things follow, which are thus taken out of their context if they're viewed other than in general. There are painters in other circumstances who can and must act differently. Everyone must decide for himself. If I'd had other opportunities, other circumstances, and if nothing of a decisive nature had happened, of course I would have been influenced in my actions. Now, though -- and with all the more reason -- because I, should there be the slightest question of seeing it as me arrogating to myself something to which I had no right, even if I had the right after all, but simply because of the question being raised, I withdraw of my own accord from contact with people who keep up a certain position, even from my family -- thus we're faced by this fact, my firm intention to be dead to everything except my work." (JLB 374, 8/17/1883.)

The thrust of this extraordinarily obscure passage appears to be this: In their conversation, Theo wondered why Vincent did not leave Sien and suggested that it was because he had fathered Sien's son, Willem. Although Vincent twice calls the accusation "absurd," he does not appear to deny it directly. Instead, he mounts a defense -- not against the deed, but against the calumny. He insists that he is playing by different rules: the rules of "a farm labourer or factory worker" (ibid.). And his actions, including fathering a child out of wedlock, should be seen in that light -- as part of that whole (an argument he has used to defend his drawings). If he had been in Theo's position, if he laid claim to a place in the family, a place in society, then an illegitimate child would be a shame that would require him to withdraw from proper society ("withdraw of my own accord from contact with people who keep up a certain position "), and even from his family (ibid.). But because he does not make any such claims, because he is an artist who aspires to the life of a laborer (as opposed to "painters in other circumstances who can and must act differently"), an illegitimate child should not be looked on in that way, and he is under no obligation to apologize, feel ashamed, or withdraw (ibid.). Vincent adopts the same dismissive, unapologetic tone in a third letter only days later: "But I desire only that you shouldn't doubt me with respect to good will, application -- and grant me a little common sense so that you don't suspect me of doing silly things, and so quietly let me carry on working in my normal way" (JLB 377, 8/20/1883; emphasis added).

It is not until a year later that he returns to the subject. In 1884, living in Nuenen, where his father is the parson, Vincent becomes involved with a local woman, Margot Begemann. In September, Margot attempts suicide. Vincent claims that her family, who did not approve of their courtship, drove her to it by accusing her of having had sex with Vincent and perhaps making her pregnant (see Chapter 22). "Theo, now that I know more than I did at first about what made her so desperate, do you know what it was? Her family spoke to her in pretty much the same tone as you to me -- that evening. Well, I was furious with you (then, that's passed now), and she would also have taken umbrage at it if she'd had my constitution." (JLB 458, 9/21/1884; emphasis in original.) Again, in a later letter, Vincent draws the parallel between the hurtful accusation Margot's sisters made against her and the infuriating accusation Theo made against him the year before: "As for you, on looking back I feel sure that now you would not speak the way you did that evening any more (JLB 469, 11/14/1884). The undisclosed common subject could only be of a personal, sexual, scandalous nature. The other issues argued over by Vincent and Theo in the summer of 1883 would have no parallels in the Begemann imbroglio. 

396. "I decidedly"BVG 377, 9/15/1884-9/30/1884. Emphasis in original. Speaking a year later of their meeting in August 1883, Vincent wrote. (See Ch. 19, n. 395.) In another letter soon thereafter, Vincent reemphasized the point: "You spoke to me, who can take it" (JLB 469, 11/14/1884; emphasis in original). 

Context:
BVG 377, 9/15/1884-9/30/1884: "Well, then I decidedly lost my temper with you ... "
JLB 458, 9/21/1884: "Well, I was furious with you …" (emphasis in original).

397. shattered any remaining fragments It is clear from Vincent's own account that the two brothers parted at the end of the evening bitterly antagonized. Vincent came straight home and wrote, "I fear I've said something to you about the work that I ought to have put differently, and have a vague feeling that I must have bothered you with something, because there seemed to be something the matter when you left." (JLB 375, 8/18/1883.) Given the generally restrained emotional vocabulary of their correspondence and Vincent's desperation to minimize the consequences of his harsh words (as evidenced elsewhere in the letter), this undoubtedly vastly understates the acrimony of their parting.  398. true or notSee Ch. 19, n. 395 399. Theo's train pulled awayTheo's train was headed to Nuenen.  400. Vincent's parting thoughtBVG 312, 8/17/1883: Vincent writes immediately after Theo leaves. This is consistent with Vincent's other references to their discussion of their father at this meeting. Theo's identity with Dorus was obviously not only the "text" of much of their conversation, but the subtext of virtually all of it. More than a month later, Vincent reconfirms that their father was the last subject the brothers discussed: "We talked about Pa, you will recall, during your visit and at the moment you left" (JLB 388, 9/21/1883). Then Vincent provides some additional insight into their final exchange that night: "Something that I felt vaguely then I can now express more clearly, when you speak with Pa, think at the same time of Corot, say, you'll then automatically avoid some of the extremes into which Pa lapses much too much" (ibid., emphasis original). The implication is that the specific issue discussed as Theo departed, the issue that cast Theo most disturbingly in his father's role, was Sien. Theo told Vincent that their father disapproved of his relationship with Sien and that by living with her, Vincent was hurting their father. To this Vincent belatedly replied: Pa is wrong. He is too Dutch, too righteous; not mild enough, like Corot, who had a mistress. Theo clearly shared Dorus's disapproval of Sien (more for reasons of family harmony than morality, probably), further underscoring his identity with their father in Vincent's mind. 

Context:
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: Just to return briefly to what you said on leaving: 'I'm beginning to think more and more like Pa.'"

401. "Do not hurry me" BVG 312, 8/17/1883. 

Context:
BVG 312, 8/17/1883: "… it is: do not hurry me in the various things we could not settle at once, for I need some time to decide."
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "It is: not to rush me in the various matters we were unable to deal with all at once this time. For I need some time in order to decide."

402. dozen long, agonized letters JLB 375 to JLB 384, inclusive.  403. Professions of undying fealty BVG 312, 8/17/1883. 

Context:
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "For be assured that the continuing main thought -- compared with which all the rest becomes as little as nothing -- is and will remain, whatever the future brings, a sense of gratitude towards you."

404. pleas for understanding BVG 312, 8/17/1883. 

Context:
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "By sticking to one's work, things will come out right in the end. For instance, take Mesdag, a real mastodon or hippopotamus, but he sells his pictures. I am not that far yet, but the man I mention also began late and worked his way along an honest, manly path, wherever he may be in other respects. I don't leave things undone from laziness, but rather to be able to work more, putting aside everything that does not belong directly to the work ... I beg you to have patience."

405. Theo's oversight BVG 312, 8/17/1883. 

Context:
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "It wasn't so much that I got angry with you as that you astonished me, because you know how much pain I've already suffered over it, and that it has become a piece of gossip that won't disappear whatever I do. Anyway. At all events I have the new suit from you and the old one, which is certainly still good, and so it's over for the time being, isn't it?, and let's say no more about it.

406. Chest-beating confessions BVG 312, 8/17/1883. 

Context:
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "I'm terribly sorry that I make life difficult for you -- perhaps it will clear up by itself -- but if you're faltering, tell me plainly. In that case I would rather give up everything than make you carry a heavier burden than you can bear."

407. "I am at your disposal" BVG 315, 8/20/1883-8/21/1883. 

Context:
JLB 377, 8/20/1883: "I'm at your disposal."

408. let me go BVG 315, 8/20/1883-8/21/1883. 

Context:
BVG 315, 8/20/1883-8/21/1883: "All my ideas about my work are so well ordered, so definite, that I think you would do well to accept what I say: let me go my own way, just as I am."
JLB 377, 8/20/1883: "As regards my work all my ideas are so ordered, so definite, that I believe you'd do well to accept what I say: let me get on with it as I am …"

409. take a lowly job BVG 312, 8/17/1883. 

Context:
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "I'm terribly sorry that I make life difficult for you -- perhaps it will clear up by itself -- but if you're faltering, tell me plainly. In that case I would rather give up everything than make you carry a heavier burden than you can bear. Then I would certainly go to London right away to look for no matter what, even carrying bales, and leave art for better times, at least having a studio and painting."

410. "rather than put" BVG 312, 8/17/1883: We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 312, 8/17/1883: "I would rather give up everything than put too heavy a burden on your shoulders."
JLB 375, 8/18/1883: "… I would rather give up everything than make you carry a heavier burden than you can bear."

411. "dead to anything" BVG 313, 8/18/1883. In yet another letter two days after JLB 374, 8/17/1883 (August 19), Vincent calls it "dangerous to try to progress through something other than what is directly work" (JLB 376, 8/19/1883). Theo apparently finally acquiesced in Vincent's resistance to taking a job, probably recognizing that no one was less suited to a regular job (i.e., less likely to keep it) than his intemperate brother: "I can hardly tell you how much pleasure what you say about the work gives me -- I'm glad you say that doing something else as well would really be the wrong policy" (JLB 378, 8/21/1883). 

Context:
BVG 313, 8/18/1883: "So this is the fact: My firm resolve is to be dead to anything except my work."
JLB 374, 8/17/1883: "Thus we're faced by this fact, my firm intention to be dead to everything except my work."

412. "struggle in my" BVG 313, 8/18/1883: Vincent writes this on the day after Theo leaves The Hague to return to Nuenen. In the previous letter (written only the day before), Vincent concedes more indirectly that his thoughts are in turmoil. In rejecting the idea of going to London to look for work, he says he thinks it would be better to " to wait until both the work and I myself have calmed down. ... Things inside me may clear up soon." (JLB 375, 8/18/1883; emphasis in original in italics; emphasis added in bolding). Vincent would not, however, have articulated his inner struggle in the way the text does. Indeed, he does not articulate it at all except in its most obvious terms: deciding how to respond to Theo's pressure for him to leave Sien. Vincent would probably not have admitted that the underlying issue was his conflicted relationship with his brother, not his ambivalence about Sien; or, rather, that the latter was just an expression of the former. In the same way, he would never have admitted that his heartbreak over Kee Vos had more to do with his family's failure to support him than it did with Kee Vos's rejection.

Context:
BVG 313, 8/18/1883: "Regards -- good luck on your journey -- write soon -- but you know now how I shall face the future, with serenity, and without a line on my face to betray the struggle in my very depths …"
JLB 374, 8/17/1883: "Regards -- safe journey -- write soon -- but you understand how I will approach the future, with serenity and without one sign in my face betraying the struggle in the deepest depths."

413. Only two days after In addition to a gesture of solidarity with his brother, this may also be a delayed reaction to Theo's suggestion early that month for Vincent to take a "holiday" in the polders as a way of recovering his health and focus (JLB 370, 8/3/1883.) On August 19, Vincent puts forward the idea of taking Sien with him, although in the same wishful, tentative tones: "I would like to be able to live with her in a village somewhere where she saw nothing of the city and was confronted with a great deal of nature as a matter of course" (JLB 376, 8/19/1883). By August 21, this vision has formed into a definite, fully-formed proposal not just to visit the country, but to move there: "Once there, I believe I would stay for good in the heathland and the peat districts" (JLB 378, 8/21/1883).  414. "I should like" BVG 316, 8/21/1883. 

Context:
BVG 316, 8/21/1883: "… but yet -- I should like to be alone with nature for a time -- far away from the city."
JLB 378, 8/21/1883: "But still, I would like to be alone with nature for once -- without the city."

415. emulate affluent artists De Leeuw, Sillevis, and Dumas, pp. 86-87: "The painters of the Hague School were trying to escape the prosaicness of the modern age and they now began privately to search for places where nature could still be found untainted. Somehow they kept the places they found secret from each other. [Willem] Roelofs went to Noorden, Weissenbruch to the Nieuwkoop lakes, Israels and Mauve made regular visits to Laren; the beauty of Drente and Brabant was also discovered. Some of them decided to continue living in the city in order to experience a shock each time they went to work in the countryside; others, like Mauve, fled from the city for good, opting for a studio surrounded by heathland and sheep folds."  416. take a holiday BVG 308, 8/2/1883: Vincent rejects the suggestion. 

Context:
JLB 370, 8/3/1883: "This is just the right time, and for that reason there can be no question of taking a holiday, for I'll keep at it as best I can."

417. going to the polders BVG 308, 8/2/1883. 

Context:
JLB 370, 8/3/1883: "I literally can't put it into practice, because going to the polders for a fortnight would cost me more than staying at home for a fortnight, and I don't even know how I'll scrape by at home for the next fortnight" (emphasis in original).

418. "in that country" BVG 316, 8/21/1883. 

Context:
BVG 316, 8/21/1883: "Once there, I think I would remain permanently in that country of heath and moorland, where more and more painters are settling down, so that perhaps, after a time, a kind of colony of painters might spring up."
JLB 378, 8/21/1883: "Once there, I believe I would stay for good in the heathland and the peat districts, where more and more painters are coming, and in time a kind of painters' colony might develop."

419. "I could do" BVG 297, 7/2/1883. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 297, 7/2/1883: "Here I could also do what I want if I could earn a little more and go here and there to make studies."
JLB 358, 7/2/1883: " I could do what I want here as well if I could earn some more -- go here and there now and again to get studies."

420. economic measure BVG 314, 8/19/1883: This had long been one of Vincent's rationales for moving to the country. In late July, when Theo first wrote of his dire financial prospects, Vincent replied, "Then, if there's no hope for the future financially, I would propose a move to the country, saving half the rent in a village deep in the country, and for the same amount of money that one pays here for bad food getting good, healthy food, which is needed for the woman and the little ones, and for me too in fact" (JLB 363, 7/22/1883; emphasis in original). 

Context:
JLB 376, 8/19/1883: "A move is desirable, though, but it must also be an economy measure."

421. a cheaper BVG 316, 8/21/1883. 

Context:
JLB 378, 8/21/1883: "Life there is so much cheaper than here that I believe it would save me 150 or 200 guilders a year in any case, on housing especially in any case."

422. healthier alternativeBVG 301, 7/22/1883. (See Ch. 19, n. 420.) 

Context:
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "Then, if there's no hope for the future financially, I would propose a move to the country, saving half the rent in a village deep in the country, and for the same amount of money that one pays here for bad food getting good, healthy food, which is needed for the woman and the little ones, and for me too in fact. Also having advantages perhaps for models." (Emphasis in original.)

423. (more saleable) subjects BVG 226, 8/19/1882. 

Context:
JLB 259, 8/26/1882: "I have an everlasting nostalgia for heath and pine-woods with the curious figures. A woman gathering wood, a peasant fetching sand -- in short, that simplicity that has something grand like the sea."

424. affordable models BVG 301, 7/22/1883. 

Context:
JLB 363, 7/22/1883: "I would propose a move to the country ... Also having advantages perhaps for models" (emphasis in original).

347 425. the heath and pine trees BVG 226, 8/19/1882: Vincent wrote this a year earlier when Theo first described to him their parents' new home in Nuenen. One cannot help but note that Vincent has a surge of nostalgia for the country of his childhood every time Theo visits their parents without him. In 1882, he writes: "I always have in mind the idea of moving to the country if an opportunity arises, if circumstances suggest it" (JLB 259, 8/26/1882). Almost exactly a year later, on the eve of Theo's next trip to Nuenen, Vincent writes: "Do you know what I sometimes long for? A trip to Brabant. I would so like to do the old churchyard at Nuenen." (JLB 356, 6/22/1883.) 

Context:
JLB 259, 8/26/1882: "You also write about a stretch of heath and a pine-wood nearby. Well, I have an everlasting nostalgia for heath and pine-woods."

426. "What I should" BVG 299, 7/11/1883: We have slightly altered the translation. In Vincent's long explanation of these drawings, one can hear plainly the defensive arguments he is already formulating for his parents when they express disappointment with his efforts, as he anticipates they surely will.

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: " What I should tremendously like to do, and what I feel I could do, too, on the understanding that circumstances made patient posing possible, is the small figure of Father on a path across the heath; the figure rigorously drawn, with character, and as I have said, on a stretch of brown heathland crossed by a narrow white sandy path and a sky applied and suggested with just a touch of passion. In addition, Father and Mother arm in arm, let's say -- in autumnal surroundings -- or against a small beech hedgerow with withered leaves."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: " Something I'd like to have terribly much, and which I feel I can do, given certain conditions of patient posing, is the figure of Pa on a path on the heath, the figure severely drawn with character and, as I say, a stretch of brown heath with a narrow, white, sandy path running across it, and a sky applied with some passion and evenly expressed. Then, for instance, Pa and Ma arm in arm -- in an autumn setting -- or with a beech hedge with dry leaves."

427. have to pose patiently BVG 299, 7/11/1883. 

Context:
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "Which I feel I can do, given certain conditions of patient posing, is the figure of Pa on a path on the heath" (emphasis added).

428. "They will have" BVG 299, 7/11/1883. He adds apologetically, "Well, that will be all right, and I don't work so slowly as to make it a great effort for them. And for my part I would greatly value doing it." (JLB 361, 7/11/1883.) We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "But they will have to understand that it is a serious matter, which they might perhaps not realize if the likeness isn't exact. And so they will have to be gently warned that if it comes off, they will have to adopt the pose I choose and not change it."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "But they must know that it's serious, which they might not see for themselves if the likeness isn't exact. And should be a bit prepared, in the event that this happens, for having to pose as I say and not change anything."

429. off-limits as long as BVG 332, 10/12/1883: This is clearly the thrust of something Vincent writes in October, from Drenthe. At some point, Theo has told Vincent that he cannot return to Brabant, almost certainly because of the embarrassment and heartache he has caused his parents over his lifestyle in The Hague. This prohibition may have been issued at their meeting in August or, more likely, the previous month when Vincent argued vehemently for a trip there (JLB 361, 7/11/1883). As of October, Vincent professes to agree with this prohibition ("I myself think it better"), although he solicits Theo's agreement that the rule has exceptions ("in the event of an emergency") (JLB 394, 10/12/1883). Within two months of writing this, he will invoke this exception and go to Nuenen. We believe that he could never truly accept Theo's restriction and, in fact, Nuenen was always, at some level, his ultimate destination when he left The Hague in September 1883.

Context:
JLB 394, 10/12/1883: "I would consider it desirable that we all understood that circumstances urgently require that Brabant no longer be closed to me. I myself think it better that I do not go there unless there's no other choice, but in the event of an emergency the rent that I'm obliged to pay could be saved, because Pa has a house there rent-free." (Emphasis in original.)

430. Mauve had gone there BVG 152, 10/12/1881-10/15/1881. About a year later, when Van Rappard writes of Drenthe, Vincent replies, "What you tell me about Drenthe is interesting -- I don't know Drenthe at all from having been there myself, only through what Mauve and [Frans] Ter Meulen, for instance, have brought back. I imagine it as being like North Brabant when I was young, about 20 years ago. I remember as a boy seeing the heath and the small farmhouses, the looms and the spinning wheels exactly as I see them now in drawings by Mauve and Ter Meulen." (JLB 256, 8/13/1882; emphasis in original.) Soon thereafter, Vincent reports to Theo seeing a drawing by Mauve of "a woman at a sort of loom, no doubt from Drenthe" (JLB 257, 8/14/1882). 

Context:
JLB 175, 10/12/1881-10/15/1881: "Mauve has gone to Drenthe, have agreed that I'll go to him as soon as he writes to me."

431. invited Vincent to join(See Ch. 19, n. 430.) The plan had been for Vincent to join Mauve in Drenthe and for Mauve to initiate the younger painter in the "mysteries" of oil painting. Vincent recalls this commitment in December 1881. After the disastrous trip to the Strickers in Amsterdam, Vincent fled to Mauve's house in The Hague: "I'll continue -- from Amsterdam I went to Haarlem and sat very agreeably with our dear sister Willemien, and I took a walk with her, and in the evening I went to The Hague, and I landed up at M.'s around seven o'clock. And I said: listen M., you were supposed to come to Etten to try and initiate me, more or less, into the mysteries of the palette. But I've been thinking that that wouldn't be possible in only a couple of days, so now I've come to you and if you approve I'll stay four weeks or so, or six weeks or so, or as long or as short as you like, and we'll just have to see what we can do." (JLB 193, 12/23/1881.) Vincent's view of Drenthe was no doubt colored by the unfulfilled promise of this canceled "initiation."  432. before he fell sick BVG 155, 11/9/1881-11/10/1881. 

Context:
JLB 181, 11/8/1881-11/9/1881: "Mauve is ill, but Pa and Ma have asked him to come here and get well as soon as he can make the journey."

433. traveled there in 1882 BVG 225, 8/14/1882. (For more on Van Rappard's trips there, see Brouwer, Siesling, and Vis, pp. 20, 22). De Leeuw and others make the point that a number of artists Vincent knew or knew of left the city "to search for places where nature could still be found untainted" around this time (De Leeuw, Sillevis, and Dumas, pp. 86-87). We would argue that Vincent's inspiration was much more specific and his choice of destination was based on personal resonances, not collegial solidarity. Another artist he knew through his family, Julius Jacobus van de Sande Bakhuyzen, had visited Drenthe (Dijk and Van der Sluis, p. 158); De Bock may have, too, by this time (ibid.); and Vincent's on-again-off-again friend George Breitner had been there as recently as the summer of 1883. But not even this latter, direct connection merits a mention in Vincent's exhaustive arguments on behalf of "the Drenthe plan" (JLB 381, 9/5/1883). 

Context:
JLB 257, 8/14/1882: "I received a letter from Rappard yesterday. He has been to Drenthe, and judging by two sketches he sent me he hasn't been idle."

434. "being on the road" BVG 295, 6/22/1883. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 295, 6/22/1883: "I have been working with enormous pleasure lately, and with a firm feeling of 'being on the open road,' as Rappard says of himself in the letter which I sent you."
JLB 356, 6/22/1883: "Otherwise, the work is going well, I've been working with an extraordinary amount of pleasure lately, and with a firm feeling that I'm 'on a road', as R. says of himself in the letter I sent you."

435. Vincent pored over BVG 286, 5/21/1883. Brouwer, Siesling, and Vis identify this drawing as a sketch for a painting of "an old Drenthe woman at the spinning wheel, based on sketches made in the poorhouse of Rolde [a small town outside Assen in northern Drenthe]" (Brouwer, Siesling, and Vis, p. 22). In 1884, Van Rappard submitted this painting to the International and Universal Exhibition in the Crystal Palace, London, where it was awarded a silver medal. Brouwer, Siesling, and Vis write, "The literary allusions and symbolism with which painters of an older generation were used to investing these subjects have been eliminated. No clock or dying fire is needed to tell us that the woman is old, and when the painting was exhibited in 1885 at L'Essoir it bore as title simply the name of the sitter: Jantien Klinkers" (ibid.). 

Context:
JLB 344, 5/21/1883: "Now, as to my visit to Rappard -- I'm very glad I went. We'll visit each other in turn more often now. I found one painting by him, a woman spinning, and above all the large sketch for it, the same size, highly serious and truly sympathetic."

436. "something like Brabant" BVG R11, 8/13/1882. Elsewhere, Vincent admits: "I don't know Drenthe at all from having been there myself" (JLB 256, 8/13/1882). (We have removed the emphasis in original.) 

Context:
BVG R11, 8/13/1882: "I imagine it is something like Brabant when I was young -- say, some twenty years ago. I remember as a boy seeing that heath and the little farms, the looms and the spinning wheels in exactly the same way I see them now in Mauve's and ter Meulen's drawings."
JLB 256, 8/13/1882: "I imagine it as being like North Brabant when I was young, about 20 years ago. I remember as a boy seeing the heath and the small farmhouses, the looms and the spinning wheels exactly as I see them now in drawings by Mauve and Ter Meulen." (Emphasis in original.)

437. to Drenthe again According to Vincent's report, Van Rappard's ultimate destination was "the fishing villages on Terschelling," one of the scenic barrier islands along the north coast of The Netherlands (JLB 378, 8/21/1883). Vincent apparently entertained the notion that Van Rappard might visit him in Drenthe on this trip ("He's going there [to Drenthe] again shortly"), presumably on the way back from Terschelling, although this could be either Van Rappard's courtesy or Vincent's wishfulness at work.  438. fixed Vincent's decision BVG 316, 8/21/1883. Since this subject is not mentioned until now, the "As I say" must refer to the brothers' meeting on August 17 (JLB 378, 8/21/1883). That would place the date of Van Rappard's visit sometime before that, probably immediately before. 

Context:
JLB 378, 8/21/1883: "As I say, my thoughts have become fixed on Drenthe, particularly since his visit and what we discussed in connection with the work."

439. more often in Drenthe BVG 316, 8/21/1883. 

Context:
JLB 378, 8/21/1883: "I suppose if I settled down there [i.e., Drenthe], Rappard would visit that same neighbourhood even more often than now, so that we could profit a little from each other's company."

440. "could profit from" BVG 316, 8/21/1883. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 316, 8/21/1883: "I suppose if I settled down there, Rappard would visit that same neighbourhood even more often than now, so that we could profit a little from each other's company."
JLB 378, 8/21/1883: "I think that if I were to settle somewhere there, Rappard would come even more often to that area than now, and we'd be company for each other."

441. "a kind of colony" BVG 316, 8/21/1883: The parallels to Vincent's plan to establish a "Studio of the South" in Arles in 1888, with Gauguin in Van Rappard's role, are unmistakable. 

Context:
BVG 316, 8/21/1883: "Once there, I think I would remain permanently in that country of heath and moorland, where more and more painters are settling down, so that perhaps, after a time, a kind of colony of painters might spring up."
JLB 378, 8/21/1883: "Once there, I believe I would stay for good in the heathland and the peat districts, where more and more painters are coming, and in time a kind of painters' colony might develop."

442. "saturate [themselves]" BVG 317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883: Vincent uses this phrase to describe what he expects to achieve in Drenthe. We have slightly altered the translation. 

Context:
BVG 317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883: "The main thing now is to paint a great deal. That, and again saturating myself in nature's serenity on the heath, will bring us victory in the end -- do not doubt it -- and progress from month to month."
JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883: "Now, however, painting a lot isn't something that may not be postponed. That, and being steeped once more in the serenity of nature in a heath area -- have no doubt -- will bring us to victory in the end." (Emphasis in original.)

443. "I should like to live" BVG 314, 8/19/1883. 

Context:
BVG 314, 8/19/1883: "Knowing now, however, how her people upset her last year, and fearing she might fall back again, I should like to live with her someplace in a little village where she could see nothing of the town and could live a more natural life."
JLB 376, 8/19/1883: "But knowing now how she was often upset by her family last year, and fearing that she may relapse, I would like to be able to live with her in a village somewhere where she saw nothing of the city and was confronted with a great deal of nature as a matter of course."

444. a storm of arguments As an "honest man," he could never leave her: "I want to be on my qui vive about remaining an honest man and being doubly attentive to DUTY" (JLB 374, 8/17/1883; emphasis in original). Moreover, this duty was inviolable: "For my part I know one thing, that in the first place what matters is not to deviate from what is duty, and that one can't compromise on duty. Duty is something absolute. The consequences? We're not responsible for them, but for the initiative of doing or not doing one's duty, yes." (ibid.). With unequivocal language like this, of course, Vincent is backing himself into a corner that will make reversing himself excruciatingly difficult. He compared himself to Christ, who was given a cup he could not refuse: "And my own future is a cup that cannot pass away from me except I drink it. So Thy will be done" (ibid.). Even as he strains to persuade Theo of the rightness of taking Sien to Drenthe, Vincent catalogues her problems in vivid, devastating detail. "[O]ne has to point out the same thing to her many times, and she'll sometimes drive a person to despair" (JLB 376, 8/19/1883).  445. "If I deserted the woman" BVG 314, 8/19/1883. At times, Vincent's greatest fear seems to be that Sien would refuse to go if he invited her: "On leaving I'll say to the woman: are you coming or are you staying? If she comes, then I believe I'll have more influence over there, and be able to make her stronger." (JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883; emphasis in original.) This passage clearly suggests that, as of August 23-29, Vincent was not sure if Sien would be willing to come with him to Drenthe or not. Other times, he feared she would desert him after they arrived. "[W]ho can assure me that over there it won't be, 'How miserable it is here, why did you bring me here?''" (ibid; emphasis in original). This concern must have nagged at Vincent, because he raises it again later in the same letter: "If, say, in Drenthe she were to start nagging: why did you bring me here?, one wouldn't have made the slightest progress" (ibid.). One can imagine that Sien, raised in the city, was at least trepidatious about an impoverished life in the country far from her large family; and, as a pragmatist, probably skeptical of Vincent's Millet-like fantasy of peasant life. To be safe, he made alternate plans to move to a different neighborhood in the The Hague and "simply stay here" (JLB 8/21/1883). This is all Vincent writes about this rejected scheme: "I will write you again soon, also about another plan of staying quietly here, when I have had information from my landlord about the house at Voorburg, which he says I can perhaps get cheaply" (ibid.). 

Context:
JLB 376, 8/19/1883: "If I left the woman, she might go mad …"

446. "the little boy" BVG 314, 8/19/1883. 

Context:
JLB 376, 8/19/1883: "Well, the little boy is terribly attached to me …"

447. he even offered, again BVG 297, 7/2/1883: Vincent made the offer to marry Sien most recently in early July. 

Context:
JLB 358, 7/2/1883: "I've already thought of country life for her many, many times. But moving also means spending a large amount in one go. And I'd also like to be married before I moved, if it came to going to the country or to London."

448. to marry her BVG 317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883. He wrote substantially the same thing to his father: "my letter to Pa about staying with her and getting married remained a fact all the same" (JLB 381, 9/8/1883). This is apparently a reference to the letter Vincent wrote his father, at Theo's request, immediately after their meeting on August 17 (JLB 376, 8/19/1883). 

Context:
JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883: "And you'll understand that I would so dearly like to stop her going under that, if that could be achieved by marrying her, for instance, I would marry her even now."

449. put all the blame Vincent recalls his separation from Sien, although he adds with his usual ambivalence, "neither she herself nor circumstances allow it" (JLB 382, 9/6/1883). Either way, it is not Vincent's fault. "It's certainly her own behaviour that made me decide to act" (ibid.). Showing remarkable flexibility and inventiveness in his self-justifications, he accuses Sien of being a hindrance to his art -- a stunning volte face from most of the previous year in which he argued her indispensability to his art -- who had to be jettisoned. He blames her for not having responded to his rescue more promptly: "I do believe that something will still awaken in her, but that's precisely the point -- it ought to have been awakened already" (JLB 381, 9/5/1883; emphasis in original). In an accelerating pathology of self-justification, he argues that (1) she never listened to him, (2) she took him for granted, (3) she will miss him when he is gone, and (4) she failed in her duty toward him (JLB 382, 9/6/1883): "Now she wouldn't listen, then she will yearn to speak to me and it won't be possible. As long as she was with me, she had no contrasting example, and now in other surroundings she'll remember things that she didn't care about and paid no attention to at the time. Now, because of the contrast, she'll think about that sometimes." (JLB 381, 9/5/1883; emphasis in original.)  450. her perfidyVincent seized on Sien's taking a job in a whorehouse as the last straw (one of many) in his extended rejection of Sien (JLB 383, 9/7/1883 or 9/8/1883). Apparently, Vincent thought Sien and her mother committed themselves to establishing a kind of "business" by hiring themselves out as charwomen. He even placed advertisements for this enterprise. Subsequently he discovers that one of the "jobs" Sien has arranged is in a whorehouse -- although, as Vincent tells it, not as a prostitute but as a charwoman. ("[She made] an attempt to be a maid in a whorehouse" [JLB 381, 9/5/1883].) This makes improbable sense because Sien did not, apparently, have the red card required by brothel keepers in The Hague under local regulations (see Ch. 17, n. 80). Nevertheless, Vincent comes to see the whole scheme as a ruse: "In recent days I again saw clearly how looking at the advertisements was done merely for the sake of appearances, and that they're probably waiting for my departure before embarking on something they don't discuss with me. All the more reason for me to leave immediately, for otherwise they'd resort to delaying things deliberately. And the mother again has a hand in this. This plan, which is again a twisting of what they began a few days ago, will almost certainly lead to nothing but wretchedness. But I would have to be mad to help when they're not being open with me, wouldn't I? So I intend simply to leave and to let fourteen days or so go by. Then I'll write to them and see how things are." (JLB 383, 9/7/1883 or 9/8/1883.)  451. her backslidingBVG 321, 9/7/1883-9/8/1883. 

Context:
JLB 383, 9/7/1883 or 9/8/1883: "In recent days I again saw clearly how looking at the advertisements was done merely for the sake of appearances, and that they're probably waiting for my departure before embarking on something they don't discuss with me. All the more reason for me to leave immediately, for otherwise they'd resort to delaying things deliberately. And the mother again has a hand in this."

452. her refusal to sever relations BVG 317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883. 

Context:
JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883: "She -- and long ago -- from the very beginning could have, should have, fully trusted me -- that was never the case, ... What she listened to and believed more was that I would leave her in the lurch after all, which, if it were finally to happen in the end, precisely because she sees it like that, would be more the family's fault than hers, because the family continually upset her with that."

453. Sunday, September 2 Sometime around September 4 (Tuesday), Vincent responds to a letter from Theo: "You write about your walk to Ville-d'Avray that Sunday, at the same time on that same day I was also walking alone, and I want to tell you something about that walk, since then our thoughts probably crossed again in some degree. I spoke to the woman as I wrote to you." (JLB 381, 9/5/1883.) Apparently, Vincent's talk with Sien and his walk had both occurred on the previous Sunday, September 2.  454. "It is impossible" BVG 319, 9/4/1883: The original does not put these words in quotation marks. We have changed the pronouns and tenses accordingly. 

Context:
BVG 319, 9/4/1883: "As I wrote you, I had spoken to the woman -- we felt that in the future it would be impossible for us to stay together, nay, that we should make each other unhappy, yet we both felt how strongly we are attached to each other."
JLB 381, 9/5/1883: "I spoke to the woman as I wrote to you -- we felt that staying together in the future was ruled out, indeed that we'd make each other unhappy, but we felt on both sides how strongly we were attached to each other."

348 455. "go straight" BVG 318, 9/2/1883. (We have slightly altered the translation.) That Vincent doubts the likelihood of Sien taking the straight path, it is suggestive of anger that he can't help communicating this skepticism to her: "The storm has passed, I believe you can now make a straight path for your feet without me. Well, you must try" (JLB 380, 9/2/1883). 

Context:
BVG 318, 9/2/1883: "I told her, 'perhaps you will not be able to stay quite straight, but go as straight as possible.'"
JLB 380, 9/2/1883: "I said to her, you may not be able to manage by going entirely straight, but go as straight as possible."

456. "Find a job" BVG 318, 9/2/1883: Vincent brings a degree of pragmatism to Sien's plight that he could never muster for his own. This despite the fact that he concluded in the previous letter: "She's a creature who is most unhappy and not very suited -- such a restless temperament -- to any position in service, of whatever kind" (JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883). Elsewhere he advises her to marry an older man: "I wish she could marry, and when I tell you that I'll keep an eye on her it's because I advised her to do that" (JLB 381, 9/5/1883; emphasis in original). "And I firmly recommend to her a marriage of convenience with a widower or someone, to which I add that she'll have to be better for such a person than she was for me" (ibid., emphasis in original). 

Context:
BVG 318, 9/2/1883: "That she must get her people to take the children, and that she must look for a job."
JLB 380, 9/2/1883: "She'd have to get her family to take the children in, and that she must go into service."

457. Sunday, September 11 Dijk and Van der Sluis, p. 81: Dijk and Van der Sluis are wonderfully complete on the subject of Vincent's train trip that day: "If we count backwards, then he must have left on the 2.05 p.m. train from the station in The Hague. At 3.50 p.m. he arrived in Utrecht, where he got on the train to Kampen at 4.00 p.m. Almost four hours later, at 7.35 p.m. he then arrives in Zwolle, where he has to change to the Groningen train. This one leaves at 7.58 p.m. to arrive in Hoogeveen at 9 p.m. All together a journey of almost seven hours!"  458. regrets tormented him Afterwards, Vincent took a long walk "[a] long way away, to talk to nature for a while" (JLB 381, 9/5/1883). There, he watched a sudden storm roll in from the ocean, battering the trees and houses in its path and imagined himself in Gethsemane. It was the "calamity" that had befallen him that lead him to make the association to storms like the one he watched on his walk, and then to the penultimate trial of Jesus's life: "Yes, for me the drama of a storm in nature, the drama of sorrow in life, is the best. A 'paradou' is beautiful, but Gethsemane is more beautiful still" (ibid.). The mention of Paradise is probably a reference to something Theo had written about his walk, on the same day, in the Alsatian town of Ville d'Avray. Vincent, in his renewed yearnings of solidarity with Theo, made much of the coincidence that both brothers had taken walks at the same time on the same day (Sunday, September 2) and that both were compelled to write the other about their walks (their descriptions crossed in the mail). "You write about your walk to Ville-d'Avray that Sunday, at the same time on that same day I was also walking alone" (ibid.).

In reporting the storm to Theo, Vincent recasts it as the consolation he needed, taking great care to frame it in the poetic nature imagery that he knew his brother loved as a signal that he had come out of his long enthrallment to Sien (and, by extension, the figure): "Well, at that moment, high above the meadows as endless as the desert, came one driven mass of cloud after the other, and the wind first struck the row of country houses with their trees on the opposite side of the waterway, where the black cinder road runs. Those trees, they were superb, there was a drama in each figure I'm tempted to say, but I mean in each tree. Then, the whole was almost finer than those windblown trees seen on their own, because the moment was such that even those absurd summer houses took on a singular character, rain-soaked and dishevelled. In it I saw an image of how even a person of absurd forms and conventions, or another full of eccentricity and caprice, can become a dramatic figure of special character if he's gripped by true sorrow, moved by a calamity." (ibid.) 

459. he might stayBVG 316, 8/21/1883. (See Ch. 19, n. 445.) 

Context:
JLB 378, 8/21/1883: "I'm also expecting a letter from Rappard about Drenthe. In any case, I'll write to you again soon about a plan to simply stay here when I have information from my landlord about a place in Voorburg that he says I may be able to get cheaply."

460. as he settled his debts BVG 316, 8/21/1883. "And having paid my debt with the money from C.M. [Uncle Cor], it might be desirable to make the move quickly." Vincent makes it sound as if he has paid all his debts, when, in fact, he has left some outstanding. The next time money is short -- at the end of the month -- he will regret even this partial debt repayment. "I must tell you frankly that lately I was sorry, and still am, that I paid my debt out of the money while I was in debt, but none of the people I paid recently was actually dunning me -- although they have done in the past -- and I could have put it off even longer." (JLB 391, 9/28/1883.)  461. store his possessions Concerning his furniture (which weighed on his departure despite its "village constable" spareness), Vincent writes, "They'll stay here in this house in the attic, since I've agreed this with my landlord" (JLB 382 7/6/1883; emphasis in original). Earlier, he considered shipping all his furniture to Drenthe and even sought bids on the job: "Through Van Gend & Loos one could even take along the furniture (the stove and bed) by taking half a goods wagon, in which case hardly any packing cases would be needed" (JLB 378, 8/21/1883). The bid itself is reported in detail in a later letter: "If I took my things, a 1/2 wagon to Drenthe would certainly cost something more than 25 guilders, according to a revised calculation by Van Gend & Loos, because there's also the cost of delivering to and collecting from home, although this isn't all that much" (JLB 382, 7/6/1883). But eventually, the expense of moving and the uncertainty of his plans cause him to make the special arrangement with his landlord, De Zwart. He gives an additional rationale for this disposition -- a rationale that betrays his ambivalence about leaving: "The Hague is a very remarkable place. It really is the centre of the art world in Holland, ... one can always work there. And so -- though certainly not for the time being -- after a period of 1 year, say, there will probably be a reason for being here for a brief or a longer stay. And through this arrangement regarding my things I stay in touch with someone who knows me and so can at any rate find me a place to live, if I ask." (ibid.).

The "someone" he refers to is probably Michiel Anthonie de Zwart, the thirty-year-old son of and business manager for Vincent's landlord, Pieter Willem de Zwart. The arrangement with De Zwart eventually becomes a source of friction (as Vincent's business deals often did) because he failed to pay the storage fee he agreed to. Vincent, of course, portrays himself as the wronged party: "I got a note from my former landlord, who gave me the impression that he could seize my things that I left behind (including all my studies, prints, books -- that I could hardly do without) if I didn't send him 10 guilders that I've promised him as payment for the use of an attic room for my belongings, and some rent that it was doubtful he was entitled to claim, but I agreed on condition of an arrangement to store my things." (JLB 408, 12/1/1883.) 

462. "took [him] deeper" BVG 320, 9/6/1883-9/7/1883. 

Context:
BVG 320, 9/6/1883-9/7/1883: "Well, I had to decide, as each week's delay took me deeper into the labyrinth, without additional benefit to her."
JLB 382, 9/6/1883: "Well, I had to decide, because every week of delay got me more entangled in thorns here, without any progress with her."

463. "wretchedness" BVG 321, 9/7/1883-9/8/1883: Vincent writes this referring to the plan of Sien and her mother to look for work as charwomen. 

Context:
BVG 321, 9/7/1883-9/8/1883: "This plan is again a corruption of what they started a few days ago; it will almost certainly lead to nothing but wretchedness."
JLB 383, 9/7/1883 or 9/8/1883: "This plan, which is again a twisting of what they began a few days ago, will almost certainly lead to nothing but wretchedness."

464. In a fever to leave BVG 320, 9/6/1883-9/7/1883. 

Context:
JLB 382, 9/6/1883: "I had to decide to separate, precisely because I was almost as certain of that then as I am now that I know more exactly what the plans were. Having taken the decision, I wanted to go ahead with my travel plans without delay." (Emphasis in original.)

465. he dismissed Theo's suggestion BVG 316, 8/21/1883. 

Context:
JLB 378, 8/21/1883: "A journey there [Drenthe] to assess the situation would seem to me unnecessary, really."

466. "The country has a very" BVG 322, 9/10/1883: We have changed the tense of Van Rappard's report as Vincent's account is confusing. If, in fact, Van Rappard wrote this "from Drenthe," then the present tense is more appropriate (JLB 384, 9/10/1883). 

Context:
BVG 322, 9/10/1883: "Friend Rappard has also started on his trip, has left Drenthe already, has almost reached Terschelling. He wrote to me from Drenthe: 'The country has a very serious character, the figures often reminded me of studies of yours.'"
JLB 384, 9/10/1883: "Friend Rappard is also travelling, and already has Drenthe behind him and is nearly on Terschelling. He wrote to me from Drenthe 'the country here is very earnest in mood, the figures often made me think of studies by you."

467. He begged Theo BVG 321, 9/7/1883-9/8/1883. 

Context:
JLB 383, 9/7/1883 or 9/8/1883: "Do your best towards the tenth to send me enough for me to be able to leave if need be, because this would be wise. All the same, don't put yourself in difficulties for I'll act according to the circumstances and write to you straightaway to say what I've done."

468. "as soon as possible" BVG 318, 9/2/1883: We have inverted the passages in the translation. 

Context:
BVG 318, 9/2/1883: "But the sooner the better. I want to be free of that heavy rent, you see, and I want to leave here as soon as possible."
JLB 380, 9/2/1883: "But first I want to be rid of the burden of my house rent, the sooner the better, you understand, and I want to go over there, the sooner the better."

469. offered to go anywhere BVG 318, 9/2/1883. A few days later, Vincent makes an even more desperate offer: "If it's [the money Theo sends] too little for Drenthe I'll go to Loosduinen for a day or so and wait there. I've found splendid things in Loosduinen, old farmhouses, and the effects in the evening are superb there. In that case I would probably send my things ahead or put them in storage." (JLB 383, 9/7/1883 or 9/8/1883.) Loosduinen is a small town in the dunes south of Scheveningen. Vincent is basically saying that he must leave The Hague and will go as far as Theo's money takes him, wherever that may be. If the money is delayed in coming, Vincent reassures his brother that he will still leave The Hague: "I'll stay in a village close by for a day or two if need be" (ibid.). 

Context:
JLB 380, 9/2/1883: "I want to go over there, the sooner the better. I need it to make progress. Drenthe, Katwijk [a seaside village just north of The Hague], Brabant, I don't mind. To stay for a time with a farmer or someone, far, far away in the country, far enough away for nature there to be real."

470. "far, far, away" JLB 380, 9/2/1883. 

Context:
BVG 318, 9/2/1883: "… to live with a farmer for a time, far, far away in the country -- far away, alone with nature."
JLB 380, 9/2/1883: "To stay for a time with a farmer or someone, far, far away in the country, far enough away for nature there to be real."

471. the money finally arrived BVG 322, 9/10/1883: There is a strong suggestion in this letter that Theo has informed Vincent that he will only send 100 francs a month now, instead of the 150 that Vincent has been receiving. And he might not be able to send even this lower amount: "Of course I agree with the proposed arrangement (regarding the partial reimbursement of the 100 francs); indeed, if you're hard up, wait for a favourable moment" (JLB 384, 9/10/1883). Vincent tries, at this crucial moment, to adjust himself to the lower amount: "I reckon 50 francs for board and lodging and the rest on the work, and that's a big difference from what I was able to do here" (ibid.). 

Context:
JLB 384, 9/10/1883: "I've just received your letter and the 100 francs enclosed. And I leave tomorrow for Hoogeveen in Drenthe."

472. a secret from Sien Vincent seemed to think that if he surprised Sien (and her mother) with his leaving, it would make a more serious impression on them. Only two or three days before his departure, he wrote of his plan: "I intend simply to leave and to let fourteen days or so go by. Then I'll write to them and see how things are. I'm also beginning to think that I must leave in order to make them be serious." (JLB 383, 9/7/1883 or 9/8/1883; emphasis in original.) The "also" suggests that Theo may have suggested something like this plan -- or maybe just planted the idea that Vincent's departure would be a wake-up call to Sien and her mother. The idea of springing his departure on them suddenly was apparently Vincent's contribution to this painfully naïve scenario. He must have told them at the last minute, otherwise they would not have appeared at the station, but this is not inconsistent with his intent to teach them a lesson.  473. see him off BVG 323, 9/11/1883-9/12/1883. 

Context:
JLB 385, 9/11/1883-9/12/1883: "The woman and her children were with me until the last minute, of course, and the parting wasn't very easy when I left." Vincent also reports that his land surveyor friend and student, Antoine Furnée, "came to the station to see me."

474. "The little boy" BVG 326, 9/21/1883. 

Context:
BVG 326, 9/21/1883: "As I told you, the little boy was very fond of me, and when I was already on the train, I still had him on my lap."
JLB 388, 9/21/1883: "As I wrote to you, the little lad loved me very much, and when I was already sitting in the wagon I still had him on my lap."

475. "My work is my duty" BVG 322, 9/10/1883. 

Context:
BVG 322, 9/10/1883: "That is a thing I thought over at once, and because my work so indubitably demands my going away, my opinion is that my work is my duty, even more immediate than the woman, and that the former must not suffer because of the latter."
JLB 384, 9/10/1883: 'That's something I immediately thought about a great deal, and because my work so undoubtedly demands the step of going there, it's my understanding that work is more directly duty than even the woman, and that the former mustn't suffer for the sake of the latter."

476. Yearning for Theo BVG 319, 9/4/1883. Both the artists listed and the images ("a farm after the rain" and "crooked, windswept trees") are favorites of Theo (JLB 381, 9/5/1883). 

Context:
JLB 381, 9/5/1883: "I received your letter just now when I came home from the dunes behind Loosduinen, soaking wet because I had spent 3 hours in the rain at a spot where everything was Ruisdael, Daubigny or Jules Dupré. I came back with a study of crooked, windswept trees, and a second of a farm after the rain. Everything is already bronze, everything is what one can see in nature only at this time of year, or if one stands before one of those paintings like a Dupré, for instance, and so beautiful that one's imagination always falls short of it."

477. Theo's next visit BVG 322, 9/10/1883. 

Context:
JLB 384, 9/10/1883: "So thanks for this, and I believe it'll prove to be a good step. My plan is to stay there until you come to Holland next year, for instance. I wouldn't want to miss you then. But in that way I would just see all the seasons go by and have a general view of the character of things in that region."

478. join a societyBVG 319, 9/4/1883. Vincent is referring to the Hollandsche Teeken-Maatschappij (Dutch Drawing Society). (He uses the word Teekenmaatschappij, but there is no doubt this is the organization that he is referring to.) According to De Leeuw, the society's first "committee" consisted of Mesdag, Maris, and Mauve (De Leeuw, Sillevis, and Dumas, pp. 83-84). (See Ch. 16, n. 101.) This is nothing less than a promise of reconciliation with both Mauve and his nemesis Tersteeg, who, as Vincent knew, was a major figure in the society. Later in the same letter, Vincent draws the connection between Drenthe and this proposed rapprochement even more directly: "Your letter pleased me greatly, for I see that you think that there's something in the Drenthe plan, and that's enough for me; later on it will become clear of itself what benefit there is to be gained. But for me it's already linked directly to becoming a member of the Drawing Society." He returns to the subject in the next letter: "I might be able to become a member of the Drawing Society, just to mention one thing. Which is one of the things I might desire and could achieve then." (JLB 382, 7/6/1883.) 

Context:
JLB 381, 9/5/1883: "My plan is to get a long way with painting in Drenthe so that I'll be eligible for the Drawing Society when I come back."

479. go to London BVG 319, 9/4/1883. Even before he became an artist, Vincent saw England as a kind of promised land. That earlier view informs his vision of England as the natural home of black-and-white illustrators: "For in England people are very serious once they begin; whoever finds favour in England finds loyal friends there. I need only mention E. [Édouard] Frère and Henriette Browne, for example, who are now just as well liked as on the first day their work was seen there" (JLB 381, 9/5/1883; emphasis in original). Again, he draws a direct connection between his trip to Drenthe and his plans for England: "Your letter pleased me greatly, for I see that you think that there's something in the Drenthe plan, and that's enough for me; later on it will become clear of itself what benefit there is to be gained. But for me it's already linked directly to becoming a member of the Drawing Society and also to England -- because I know for sure that the subjects from over there will be sympathetically received in England if I'm able to put some sentiment into them" (ibid.). 

Context:
JLB 381, 9/5/1883: "My plan is to get a long way with painting in Drenthe so that I'll be eligible for the Drawing Society when I come back. That, in turn, is linked to a second plan, to go to England."

480. He imagined his uncles After the meeting with Theo in August, Vincent sent his Uncle Cor a large number of studies -- "more than 20" -- in order that "he'll [not] be dissatisfied" (JLB 380, 9/2/1883). He offers to let Cor "exchange them later" (ibid.). This exchange was following up on the interest Cor had apparently shown, through Theo, by sending Vincent a payment in advance -- presumably against additional works. Vincent gives Theo extensive advice on how to present the Drenthe trip to their uncle: "I would ask you to consider putting the case to him -- that it would be good if I could go to the country and do a lot of painting. That we'll try to manage without his aid, but that when necessary it would be such a help if he didn't stay out of it completely in future." (ibid.) (This proposed strategy speaks volumes about Vincent's various similar manipulations of Theo.) Vincent is terrified of being disappointed by his family again, and his reaction to the prospect of dealing with his uncle again swings between cautious optimism ("But if we're lucky enough to get something from C.M.") and despair: "I, for one, think that C.M. might just do nothing at all" (JLB 384, 9/10/1883). These swings will grow even wider and more traumatic after Vincent arrives in Drenthe.  481. "The main thing now" BVG 317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883. 

Context:
BVG 317, 8/22/1883-8/23/1883: " The main thing now is to paint a great deal. That, and again saturating myself in nature's serenity on the heath, will bring us victory in the end -- do not doubt it -- and progress from month to month."
JLB 379, 8/23/1883-8/29/1883: " Now, however, painting a lot isn't something that may not be postponed. That, and being steeped once more in the serenity of nature in a heath area -- have no doubt -- will bring us to victory in the end, and to progress from one month to another." (Emphasis in original.)

482. "clumsy" BVG 299, 7/11/1883.

Context:
BVG 299, 7/11/1883: "I do at times like the work of [Ernst Theodor Amadeus] Hoffmann and Edgar [Allen] Poe (the Fantastic Tales, Raven, etc.) but I find Breitner's stuff objectionable because the imagination behind it is clumsy and meaningless and has virtually no contact with reality."
JLB 361, 7/11/1883: "I like the work of Hoffmann and Edgar Poe on occasion. (Contes fantastiques, Raven &c.) But I find this unpalatable because the fantasy is heavy-handed and without meaning, and there are almost no correspondences to what exists."